Users Guide

Version 5.6

- 1 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Content
Using function Find 12
User defined environment 12
Window for application 12
Control menu 13
Horizontal tool bars 14
Tool bar Files 14
Tool bar Scale and shift 15
Tool bar Plot setting 16
Tool bar Stage of construction 16
Tool bar 3D visualization 17
Tool bar Selections 18
Vertical tool bars 18
Setting visualization style 19
Style manager 20
Frames 21
Tables 22
Dialogue windows 24
Active dimensions and objects 25
Unit metric / imperial 26
Copy to clipboard 26
Options 26
Options copy to clipboard 27
Options print picture 28
Options - input 29
Common input 29
Project Earth pressures 29
Inputting and editing soils 30
Soil classification 32
Soil and rock labels 33
Manual classification of soil 33
Interfaces in 2D environment 34
Adding interface 35
Editing interface 36
Corrector of inputted interface 36
World coordinates 38
Assigning soils 38
Design coefficients 39
Running more analyses / verifications 40
Connecting programs 41
Selecting and storing views 42
Setting results visualization 43
Setting color range 44
Scale color definition 45
Import - export DXF 46
Reading data into template 47
Inputting data using template 47
Modifying template during data input 48
Export DXF 49
Input regimes and analysis 50
Program Earth Pressure 50
Project 50
Geometry 51
Profile 51
Soils 52
Assign 53
Terrain 54
Water 54
Surcharge 55
Earthquake 56
Setting 57
Analysis 57
Program Sheeting Design 58
- 2 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Project 58
Profile 59
Soils 59
Assign 60
Geometry 61
Anchors 61
Props 62
Supports 62
Pressure specification 63
Terrain 64
Water 65
Surcharge 66
Forces 67
Earthquake 67
Setting 68
Analysis 69
Program Sheeting Check 70
Project 70
Profile 71
Modulus of subsoil reaction 71
Soils 72
Geometry 73
Adding and editing section 73
User catalogue 74
Assign 75
Excavation 76
Terrain 77
Water 78
Surcharge 79
Forces 80
Anchors 80
Props 81
Supports 82
Earthquake 83
Setting 84
Analysis 84
Internal stability 86
External stability 87
Envelopes 88
Program Slope Stability 88
Project 88
Interface 89
Embankment 89
Earth cut 90
Soils 91
Rigid body 92
Assign 92
Anchors 93
Reinforcements 94
Surcharge 95
Water 96
Earthquake 97
Setting 98
Analysis 98
Constrains on the optimization procedure 100
Height multiplier 101
Program Cantilever Wall 102
Project 102
Geometry 103
Material 103
Profile 104
Soils 105
Assign 106
Terrain 106
Water 107
- 3 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Surcharge 108
Front face resistance 109
Inputted forces 110
Earthquake 111
Base anchorage 111
Setting 112
Verification 113
Bearing capacity 114
Dimensioning 114
Stability 115
Program Masonry wall 116
Project 116
Geometry 117
Material 117
Profile 118
Soils 119
Assign 120
Terrain 120
Water 121
Surcharge 122
Front face resistance 123
Inputted forces 124
Earthquake 125
Base anchorage 125
Setting 126
Verification 127
Bearing capacity 128
Dimensioning 128
Stability 129
Program Gravity Wall 130
Project 130
Geometry 131
Material 131
Profile 132
Soils 133
Assign 134
Terrain 134
Water 135
Surcharge 136
Front face resistance 137
Inputted forces 138
Earthquake 139
Setting 139
Verification 140
Bearing capacity 140
Dimensioning 141
Stability 142
Program Block Wall 143
Project 143
Geometry 143
Profile 144
Soils 145
Assign 146
Terrain 146
Water 147
Surcharge 148
Front face resistance 149
Inputted forces 150
Earthquake 151
Setting 151
Verification 152
Bearing capacity 152
Dimensioning 153
Stability 154
Program RediRock Wall 155
- 4 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Project 155
Blocks 156
Setbacks 156
Geometry 157
Footing 158
Profile 159
Soils 160
Assign 161
Terrain 161
Water 162
Surcharge 163
Front face resistance 164
Inputted forces 165
Earthquake 166
Setting 166
Verification 167
Bearing capacity 168
Dimensioning 169
Stability 169
Program Gabion 170
Project 170
Material 170
Geometry 171
Profile 172
Soils 173
Assign 173
Terrain 174
Water 175
Surcharge 175
Front face resistance 176
Inputted forces 177
Earthquake 178
Setting 178
Verification 179
Bearing capacity 179
Dimensioning 180
Stability 181
Program Spread Footing 182
Project 182
Project - Analyses 182
Profile 183
Soils 184
Assign 185
Foundation 185
Load 186
Import of loading 187
Geometry 188
Sand-gravel cushion 189
Material 190
Surcharge 191
Water, incompressible subsoil 192
Setting 193
1.LS - bearing of a footing 194
2.LS - settlement and rotation of a footing 195
Dimensioning 196
Program Pile 197
Project 197
Profile 198
Modulus of subsoil reaction 198
Soils 199
Assign 200
Load 201
Geometry 201
Material 202
Water, incompressible subsoil 203
- 5 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Negative skin friction 204
Setting 205
Vertical bearing capacity 205
Vertical bearing capacity CSN 205
Vertical bearing capacity FEM 206
Horizontal bearing capacity 207
Program Settlement 208
Project 208
Interface 208
Embankment 209
Earth cut 210
Incompressible subsoil 211
Soils 212
Assign 212
Surcharge 213
Water 214
Setting 215
Analysis 215
Program Abutment 216
Project 216
Geometry cut 217
Wings 218
Geometry plane view 219
Foundation steps 220
Material 220
Profile 221
Soils 222
Loading - LC 223
Assign 223
Terrain 224
Water 225
Surcharge 226
Front face resistance 227
Inputted forces 228
Earthquake 229
Setting 229
Verification 230
Bearing capacity 231
Dimensioning 231
Stability 233
Program Nailed slopes 233
Project 233
Geometry 234
Types of nails 234
Geometry of nails 235
Material 236
Profile 236
Soils 237
Assign 237
Terrain 238
Water 239
Surcharge 240
Earthquake 241
Setting 241
Internal stability 242
Verification 242
Bearing capacity 243
Dimensioning 244
External stability 245
Program Ground Loss 246
Project 246
Buildings 246
Profile 247
Soils 248
Assign 249
- 6 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Geometry 249
Measurement 250
Settings 251
Analysis 251
Damages 252
Program Rock slope 254
Project 254
Terrain 255
Rock 256
Slip surface plane 256
Slip surface - polygonal 257
Parameters polygonal slip surface 258
Water plane slip surface 259
Surcharge plane and polygonal slip surface 260
Anchors plane and polygonal slip surface 260
Earthquake 261
Setting 262
Analysis plane slip surface 262
Analysis polygonal slip surface 263
Geometry 264
3D View 264
Slip surface rock wedge 265
Parameters rock wedge 266
Surcharge rock wedge 266
Anchors rock wedge 267
Water rock wedge 268
Analysis rock wedge 268
Program Terrain 269
Project 269
Basic data 269
Global coordinate system 270
Soils 271
Assign 272
Points 272
Import of points 274
Automatic calculation of height 274
Edges 275
Water 277
Bore holes 278
Earth grading 279
Generate 281
Modeling terrain on edges 282
Point constructions 283
Line constructions 284
Launching 285
Outputs 287
Adding picture 287
Picture list 288
Print and export document 289
Print and export picture 290
Control menu Print and export 291
Tool bar Print and export 292
Setting header and footer 293
Page properties 294
Page numbering 295
About company 295
Theory 297
Stress in a soil body 297
Geostatic stress, uplift pressure 297
Effective/total stress in soil 298
Increment of earth pressure due to surcharge 299
Increment of earth pressure under footing 300
Earth pressure 302
Sign convention 302
- 7 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Active earth pressure 303
Active earth pressure the Mazindrani theory 303
Active earth pressure - the Coulomb theory 304
Active earth pressure - the Mller-Breslau theory 305
Active earth pressure - the Caqouot theory 306
Active earth pressure - the Absi theory 307
Active earth pressure total stress 308
Passive earth pressure 308
Passive earth pressure - the Rankin and Mazindrani theory 309
Passive earth pressure - the Coulomb theory 310
Passive earth pressure - the Caquot Krisel theory 310
Coefficient of passive earth pressure Kp 312
Reduction coefficient of passive earth pressure 313
Passive earth pressure - the Mller Breslau theory 313
Passive earth pressure - the Absi theory 314
Passive earth pressure - the Sokolovski theory 314
Passive earth pressure total stress 316
Earth pressure at rest 316
Earth pressure at rest for inclined ground surface at the back of structure 317
Setting of analysis 318
Alternate angel of internal friction of soil 319
Distribution of earth pressures in case of broken terrain 320
Influence of water 321
Without ground water, water is not considered 321
Hydrostatic pressure, ground water behind structure 321
Hydrostatic pressure, ground water behind and in front of structure 322
Hydrodynamic pressure 323
Special distribution of water pressure 324
Uplift pressure in footing bottom 325
Influence of tensile cracks 326
Minimal dimensioning pressure 326
Earth - pressure wedge 327
Surcharge 329
Surface surcharge 329
Strip surcharge 330
Trapezoidal surcharge 331
Concentrated surcharge 331
Line surcharge 332
Surcharge in non-homogeneous soil 334
Surface surcharge 334
Strip surcharge 335
Trapezoidal surcharge 336
Concentrated surcharge 336
Surface surcharge 337
Influence of earthquake 337
MononobeOkabe theory 340
Arrango theory 340
Influence of water 341
Influence of friction between soil and back of structure 343
Table of ultimate friction factors for dissimilar materials 344
Table of recommended values DELTA/F 345
Adhesion of soil 345
Parameters of rocks 346
Nailed slopes 347
Analysis of nails bearing capacity 347
Estimated bond strength 349
Analysis of internal stability 349
Force of transmitted by nails 350
Factor of safety 350
Theory of limit states 351
Verification of bearing capacity of nails 352
Dimensioning of concrete cover 352
Analysis of walls 353
Geo-reinforcements, mesh overhangs 354
Base anchorage 354
- 8 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Verification limit states 356
Verification - factor of safety 357
Accounting for wall jump 358
Dimensioning of masonry wall 359
Bearing capacity of foundation soil 360
Wall dimensioning 361
Internal stability of gabion 362
Internal stability of gabion wall limit states 364
Internal stability of gabion wall factor of safety 365
Calculating abutment forces 366
Sheeting design 367
Analysis of sheet pile wall 367
Analysis of anchored wall fixed in heel 368
Analysis of anchored wall simply supported at heel 369
Sheeting check 370
Method of dependent pressures 372
Modulus of subsoil reaction 373
Modulus of subsoil reaction according to CUR 166 374
Modulus of subsoil reaction according to Schmitt 375
Modulus of subsoil reaction according to Mnard 375
Modulus of subsoil reaction according to Chadeisson 376
Modulus of subsoil reaction derived from iterations 376
Verification of internal stability of structure 378
Braced sheeting 379
Nonlinear modulus of subsoil reaction 380
Slope stability analysis 381
Soil body 381
Influence of water 382
Surcharge 383
Anchors 384
Georeinforcements 384
Earthquake effect 384
Analysis according to the theory of limit states / factor of safety 385
Polygonal slip surface - Sarma 386
Optimization of polygonal slip surface 388
Changing inclination of dividing planes 388
Foliation 389
Circular slip surface Petterson, Bishop 389
Optimization of circular slip surface 390
Influence of tensile cracks 390
Analysis of bearing capacity of foundation 391
Bearing capacity on drained subsoil 391
Standard analysis 392
Bearing capacity on undrained subsoil 393
Standard analysis 394
Bearing capacity of foundation on bedrock 394
Standard analysis 395
Solution according to CSN 73 1001 395
Analysis according to EC 7-1 (EN 1997-1:2003) 395
Parameters to compute foundation bearing capacity 396
Horizontal bearing capacity of foundation 398
Homogenization of layered subsoil 400
Effective area 401
Determination of cross-sectional internal forces 402
Pile analysis 403
Vertical bearing capacity analysis according to CSN 403
Vertical bearing capacity - FEM 404
Limit loading curve 405
Shear strength of skin 406
Coefficient of increase of limit skin friction 406
Depth of deformation zone 406
Incompressible subsoil 409
Negative skin friction 409
Influence of technology 410
Shear resistance on skin 410
- 9 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Stiffness of subsoil below the pile heel 411
Increments of vertical loading 412
Distributions of forces acting on pile 412
Dependence of shear on deformation 412
Horizontal bearing capacity 412
Constant distribution of modulus of subsoil reaction 413
Linear modulus of subsoil reaction 413
Modulus of subsoil reaction according to CSN 73 1004 414
Modulus of subsoil reaction after Matlock and Rees 414
Modulus of subsoil reaction after Vesic 415
Settlement analysis 415
Stress in the footing bottom 416
Overall settlement and rotation of foundation 417
Influence of foundation depth and incompressible subsoil 417
Influence of sand-gravel cushion 418
Analysis using the oedometric modulus 418
Analysis using the compression constant 419
Analysis using the compression index 419
Analysis according to NEN (Buismann, Ladd) 420
Analysis using the Soft soil model 421
Analysis according to the Janbu theory 422
Analysis for cohesionless soils after Janbu 422
Analysis for coarse-grained soils after Janbu 422
Analysis for sands and silts after Janbu 423
Analysis for overconsolidated sands and silts after Janbu 423
Analysis for cohesive soils after Janbu 424
Analysis for overconsolidated cohesive soils after Janbu 424
Settlement analysis using DMT (constrained modulus) 425
Theory of settlement 425
Primary settlement 426
Secondary settlement 428
Determination of the depth of influence zone 429
Theory of structural strength 429
Method of restriction of the magnitude of primary stress 430
Characteristics of settlement analyses 431
Compression index 431
Oedometric modulus 433
Compression constant 434
Compression constant 10 435
Void ratio 436
Recompression index 436
Janbu characteristics 437
Influence of loading history 438
Coefficient m 439
Modified compression index 439
Index of secondary compression 440
Overconsolidation index of secondary compression 441
Analyses in program Ground Loss 442
Analysis of subsidence trough 442
Volume loss 442
Recommended values of parameters for volume loss analysis 443
Classical theory 444
Analysis for layered subsoil 445
Shape of subsidence trough 446
Coefficient of calculation of inflection point 447
Subsidence trough with several excavations 447
Analysis of subsidence trough at a depth 447
Calculation of other variables 448
Analysis of failure of buildings 449
Tensile cracks 449
Gradient damage 450
Relative deflection 450
Failure of a section of building 451
Rock slope 451
Plane slip surface 452
- 10 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Stepped slip surface 453
Tensile strength of rock 454
Undulating slip surface 454
Anchorage of rock slope 455
Surcharge of rock slope 455
Influence of water acting on slip surface 456
GWT above toe of slope 456
GWT on tension crack 457
GWT on tension crack, max 458
Water acting on tension crack only 459
Own water force acting on slip surface only 460
Own water force behavior 461
Polygonal slip surface 461
Geometry of rock block 462
Anchor forces, surcharge 463
Influence of water 463
Solution procedure 464
Rock wedge 466
Geometry of rock wedge 466
Stereographic projection 467
Influence of ground water 467
Resolution of acting forces 469
Verification 469
Verification according to the factor of safety 470
Verification according to the theory of limit states 470
Rock - shear resistance criteria 471
Mohr - Coulomb 471
Parameters Mohr Coulomb 471
Hoek - Brown 471
Parameters Hoek Brown 472
Calculation of Hoek-Brown parameters 474
Barton - Bandis 476
Barton Bandis parameters 476
Bulk weight of rocks 479
Influence of seismic effects 480
Dimensioning of concrete structures 481
CSN 73 1201 R 481
Materials, coefficients, notation 481
Verification of cross-sections made from plain concrete 482
RC rectangular cross-section under M 482
RC rectangular cross-section under the bending moment and normal compression force 483
Verification of spread footing for punching shear 484
Verification of circular RC cross-section 485
EC2 (EN 1992 1-1) 485
Materials, coefficients, notation 486
Standard values of coefficients 486
RC rectangular cross-section under M 487
RC rectangular cross-section under the bending moment and normal compression force 487
Verification of spread footing for punching shear 488
Verification of cross-sections made from plain concrete 489
Verification of circular RC cross-section 490
PN-B-03264 491
Materials, coefficients, notation 491
RC rectangular cross-section under M 492
RC rectangular cross-section under the bending moment and normal compression force 492
Verification of spread footing for punching shear 493
Verification of cross-sections made from plain concrete 494
Verification of circular RC cross-section 495
BS 8110 495
Materials, coefficients, notation 496
RC rectangular cross-section under M 496
RC rectangular cross-section under the bending moment and normal compression force 497
Verification of spread footing for punching shear 497
Verification of cross-sections made from plain concrete 499
Verification of circular RC cross-section 499
- 11 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
IS 456 500
Materials, coefficients, notation 500
RC rectangular cross-section under M 501
RC rectangular cross-section under the bending moment and normal compression force 501
Verification of spread footing for punching shear 502
Verification of cross-sections made from plain concrete 503
Verification of circular RC cross-section 504
IS Road Bridges 504
ACI 31802 504
Materials, coefficients, notation 505
Verification of cross-sections made from plain concrete 505
RC rectangular cross-section under M 506
RC rectangular cross-section under the bending moment and normal compression force 506
Verification of spread footing for punching shear 507
Verification of circular RC cross-section 508
AS 3600-2001 509
Materials, coefficients, notation 509
Verification of cross-sections made from plain concrete 510
RC rectangular cross-section under M 510
RC rectangular cross-section under the bending moment and normal compression force 511
Verification of circular RC cross-section 512
Verification of spread footing for punching shear 512
Verification according to CSN 73 6206 513
- 12 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Using function Search
Function "Search" allows for finding an arbitrary text in the subject help. The searched text is
written into the field "I nput searched text" and button "List of topics" lunches the search.
The list of found topics containing the searched text is displayed in the column under the
buttons. Clicking the mouse on the topic title and pressing the "Show" button displays the
corresponding topic in the right part of the window (the double-clicking option is also
available).
The searched text is highlighted in blue color. Switching back to "Content" tab sheet shows
the topic location in the tree (help content).
Frame "Help" - tab sheet "Find"
User defined environment
The programs GEO5 are standard windows applications. Managing the application
environment (application window, dialogue windows, control menu, tables, frames, tool bars,
copy to clipboard) applies to standard properties of the Windows environment. The programs
support operating systems WIN 98, WIN 2000, WIN NT and WIN XP.
The minimum hardware and software configuration corresponding to class of PC PENTIUM III
with 128 MB of operating memory and minimum resolution of graphic adapter and monitor of
1024x768 pixels with 256 bit color range is required. Recommended configuration
corresponds to a class of PC computers of Pentium 4, 512 MB of operating memory.
Window for application
The program is launched in standard dialogue window containing all managing tools typical
for the Windows environment (minimizing, maximizing and closing the application window).
The window header displays information on currently executed task (file name and location)
see figure:
- 13 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Managing tools of window for application
The desktop constitutes the window of application. It includes the control menu, horizontal
tool bars, space for graphic visualization of the executed task and vertical tool bars to select
individual inputting modes to specify the task. The bottom part of the desktop displays
frames that allow the user to introduce various input parameters into the task. Location of
individual elements on the desktop is evident from the following figure:

Managing tools of window for application
Control menu
Selecting an item from the menu is performed by clicking the left mouse button, or
alternatively using keyboard by pressing ALT + underlined letter in the selected menu
item.
As typical for the WINDOWS environment, some of the options in the menu can be replaced
with the buttons on individual tool bars, or with abbreviated commands entered through the
keyboard (providing it exists it is displayed next to the command in the menu e.g., Save
file CTRL+S).
Some of the options in the program can be set only with the help of menu e.g., program "
Options".
- 14 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Control menu of program
Horizontal tool bars
The program contains the following tool bars:
- Tool bar "Files"
- Tool bar "Scale and shift"
- Tool bar "Plot setting"
- Tool bar "Stage of construction"
Tool bar "Files"
The tool bar contains the following buttons:
Tool bar "Files"
Individual buttons function as follows:
New file
- opens a new file if there is an existing task
opened in the same window, the program
prompts the user to save the unsaved data
- 15 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Open file
- opens an existing file - if there is an existing task
opened in the same window, the program
prompts the user to save the unsaved data
Save data into file
- saves data of currently opened task if no name
is assigned to the task, the program opens the "
Save as" dialogue window
Undo
- returns the last performed step (the function is
available only in programs with 2D environment
and must be allowed in dialogue window "Options
")
Redo
- restores one returned step (the function is
available only in programs with 2D environment
and must be allowed in dialogue window "Options
")
Print and export
document
- opens the dialogue window to create, edit and
print output documents
Print and export picture
- opens the dialogue window to create, edit and
print the current drawing displayed on the
desktop
Copy
- copies the current picture displayed on the
desktop or the inputted soil profile into clipboard
Insert
- inserts the soil profile stored in the clipboard (this
option allows the user to copy the soil profile
created in a different GEO program e.g., from
program "Pressures" to program "Gravity wall"
Tool bar "Scale and shift"
The tool bar buttons serve to manage all plots displayed on the desktop (zoom in/out,
move). The following figure shows locations of individual buttons:
Tool bar "Scale and shift"
Scale up
- scales up desktop view while keeping location of the
point under the axis cross unchanged this action is
repeated using the left mouse button, the right button
leaves the zooming mode
Scale down
- scales down the desktop view while keeping location of
the point under the axis cross unchanged this action
is repeated using the left mouse button, the right
mouse button leaves the zooming mode
Shows marked region
- shows and scales up the marked region - the region is
selected using the left mouse button
Move displayed region
- moves the current view in an arbitrary direction to
proceed move mouse in the desired location while
keeping the left mouse button pressed
Scale up
- scales up the displayed region while keeping the
region centered
Scale down
- scales down the displayed region while keeping the
region centered
Modify scale
- scales the view such that all objects are visible
- 16 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Use previous scale
- modifies view scale - returns the original view scale
prior to the last applied scale action
Tool bar "Plot setting"
The button on a tool bar serves to set the setting visualization style on the desktop (colors,
thickness and style of lines, background.).

Toll bar "Plot setting"
Plot setting
- The button opens the "Setting visualization style" dialogue
window that allows for setting all parameters of the picture
displayed on the desktop.
Tool bar "Stage of construction"
Tool bar buttons serve to work with stages of construction. Picture shows location of
individual buttons:
Tool bar "Stage of construction"
Adds construction stage
- adds new stage of construction at the end of
list
Removes construction
stage
- removes the last stage of construction from the
list

Construction stage 1,2 ...
- switches between individual stages of
construction selection is performed using the
left mouse button
In all programs GEO5 this bar allows for defining stages of construction. Construction stages
serve to model gradual building of a construction (essential for programs Sheeting
verification, Settlement, FEM). This function can be also used for parametric studies and in
each stage of construction assume different soil assignment or different design coefficients. It
is rather advantageous to model earthquake effects on a structure in a separate stage of
construction as it is then possible to assume different factors of safety or different design
coefficients.
For individual types of input (soil assignment, anchors, supports) there always exists
relationship over construction stages. There are two types:
Defined heredity (anchors, supports, surcharges) these objects always remember the
stage, in which they were created. This is also the stage where these objects can be edited.
In all subsequent stages these objects can be either removed or it is possible to change some
of their properties (post-stressing anchor, changing surcharge magnitude, translating
support). When defining a new construction stage these objects are automatically carried
over to that stage.
Automatic heredity (assigning soil, terrain profile, water impact, analysis setting) for
such types of inputs the properties from the previous stage are carried over to a new one if
created. When changing properties in the current construction stage the program proceeds as
follows:
- if the property in the next stage remains the same as in the previous stage it
also receives the tag new this change also applies to all subsequent stages
- 17 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- if the property in the next stage differs from the one in the previous stage
(this means that this property has been in the next stage already changed)
then this change is not carried over to subsequent stages
Changes within stages of construction automatic heredity
Tool bar "3D visualization"
The following buttons are available in the tool bar:
Tool bar "3D visualization"
Individual buttons have the following functions:
Lighting direction
- Opens the dialogue window, which allows us to set
the lighting direction
Axonometric view
- Sets the axonometric view of drawing
Perspective view
- Sets the perspective view of drawing
3D view
- Sets the predefined 3D view of drawing
View along the X-axis
- Sets the view in the direction of the X-axis
View in opposite direction
to X-axis
- Sets the view in the direction opposite to the X-axis
View along the Y-axis
- Sets the view in the direction of the Y-axis
View in opposite direction
to Y-axis
- Sets the view in the direction opposite to the Y-axis
View along the Z-axis
- Sets the view in the direction of the Z-axis
View in opposite direction
to Z-axis
- Sets the view in the direction opposite to the Z-axis
Moves the displayed cut
- Moves the displayed cut in an arbitrary direction to
move the drawing slide the mouse while pressing the
left mouse button
Rotates the scene
- Rotates the displayed drawing in an arbitrary
direction to move the drawing slide the mouse
while pressing the left mouse button
Automatic scene rotation
- Turns on an automatic rotation of drawing according
to the last used rotation (use the "Rotate scene"
button)
Tool bar "Selections"
The tool bar buttons allow for setting the way in which individual objects on the desktop are
selected when adjusting the drawing. The picture shows positions of these buttons:
- 18 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Tool bar "Selections"
Selection
individually
- in a given mode each mouse click adds one object into the
selection set (point, edge)
Selection by
crossing
- in a given mode each mouse click adds all objects crossed by
the line into the selection set (point, edge)
Selection using
rectangle
- in a given mode each mouse click adds all objects found inside
the rectangle into the selection set (point, edge)
Selection using
rhomboid
- in a given mode each mouse click adds all objects found inside
the rhomboid into the selection set (point, edge)
Add to the
selection set
- adds additional objects to the overall list according to the
assumed selection mode
Remove from the
selection set
- removes objects from the overall list according to the assumed
selection mode
Invert selection
- inverts all selected objects depending on the assumed selection
mode
Vertical tool bars
The vertical tool bars serve to select the desired mode (regime) of inputting data (project,
geometry, profile.) including analysis type and verification. Selecting the mode from this bar
displays in the bottom part of the desktop the corresponding frame for data input.
Tool bar for switching between input data regimes
Standalone vertical tool bar serves to manage pictures.
The "Add picture" button opens the "New picture" dialogue window. The next line in the bar
provides the number of stored pictures in a given regime of data input. The "Total" line
shows the total number of stored pictures. The "Picture list" button opens the list of pictures
.
Tool bar for controlling view manager editor
- 19 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Setting visualization style
The "Setting visualization style" dialogue window serves to set the plot style (line type and
color) for visualization on the desktop or for printout, respectively. It contains a group of tab
sheets that correspond to individual data input regimes. The tab sheets serve to set the style
for drawing objects, which are specified in the related input regime.
The "Global" tab sheet defines the settings common to all input regimes (background color,
color of elements to be deleted or modification and style of drawing of inactive elements).
The program implicitly contains two standard settings of styles and colors, particularly for
black or white background. The setting can be modified in combo list on the tool bar. User
setting can be defined, i.e. the user can specify its own style of drawing and store that style
with the help of button on the tool bar into the "Style manager".
Dialogue window "Setting visualization style" global setting
The following picture shows an example of a tab sheet for setting the plot in the regime "
Water". Individual columns of the table contain (moving from the left):
Item
- list of items plotted in a given input rgime (here, e.g., water tables,
dimensions, gradient, water pressure.)
Active
- shows / hides a given item in the active regime "Water". In case the
option cannot be turned off (the field has a gray base in this case
items "Tables" and "Water pressure") the visualization on the
desktop is mandatory!
Inactive
- shows / hides a given item in other input data regimes.
Visualization color depends on the assumed setting in the tab sheet "
Global"
Desktop
- determines the item color displayed on the desktop
Pictures
- determines the item color displayed in the "Picture list" or on printout
("Print and export picture", "Print and export document")
Line type
- determines the line style
Thickness
- determines the line thickness
- 20 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008

Dialogue window "Setting visualization style" setting for the input regime "Water"
Style manager
The red button on a tool bar of the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window opens the
"New style" dialogue window. The window allows for setting the style name and its
description. The "OK" button saves the selected style.
Saving the user profile of visualization style
In such a way an arbitrary number of user profiles of visualization styles can be defined. The
list of such profiles can be accessed from a combo list already containing implicitly predefined
profiles (black and white background), or a view manager (can be opened by pressing the
button on a tool bar) that allows for editing the profile. The buttons "Up" and "Down" serve
to move within a list of the user defined profiles.
Dialogue window "Style manager"
- 21 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frames
The frame is a permanently opened window in the bottom part of the application window.
Frames are changed depending on the input data regime of a given task selected from the
vertical control bar. The frame may contain the following items: table, combo list, fields for
inputting data (h1, h2.) and command buttons.
The function key "Tab" together with cursor arrows for moving within the selected element
(e.g., combo list) and in case of command buttons the corresponding underlined letter ("Add"
"A") are employed when selecting the data using keyboard.
Frame control elements
The frame can be minimized using the button in the left upper corner. In this case the frame
space is taken by the drawing space. In some cases it is more advantageous to exploit the
frame space for increasing the drawing space, which is possible owing to the fact that the
program uses the system of active dimensions and active objects so that the frame does not
have to be displayed all the time.
Returning the frame to its original face is performed by pressing the button in left bottom
corner of the desktop showing the frame name. Providing the frame is minimized, e.g. in the
regime "Soils" it remains hidden even when switching to other input data regime.
- 22 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame control elements
Tables
The table is a list of inputted data (for example a list of surcharges, soils, profile interfaces).
The table header contains a list of items (surcharge, name, width, size) and in the upper
left corner control elements to manage the table rows:
"+"
- selects all table rows
"- "
- cancels selection
"* "
- inverts selection
The assumed selection can be also changed by pressing the desired row number. Buttons
with numbers are "pressed".
The "Add" button opens the corresponding dialogue window for inserting the table data. If
the list of data in the table is empty then all input fields in the dialogue window are empty. If
the table contains some already inputted elements then the input fields are filled with values
taken from the current table row (an "arrow" is positioned next to the row number).
Elements (rows) are inserted in the table by pressing the "Add" button in the dialogue
window. New data are placed at the end of the table.
Individual rows are edited with the help of the "Edit" button. Only the row marked with an
arrow (see figure) will be edited regardless of other selected rows in the table. Some of the
dialogue windows allows for editing a group of selected items using the "Edit selected"
button. It is therefore possible to modify values in more rows all at once. Always the selected
rows are edited.
The "Remove" button deletes all selected ("pressed") rows. More than one row can be
removed at the same time. If not item is selected the program deletes the current row
(marked with an "arrow").
It there is among rows selected for deletion a row, which cannot be deleted (e.g. starting
point of a structure), the program stops the deletion process!
- 23 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Table example
Selection state of individual table rows corresponds to visualization state of objects on the
desktop. An object on the desktop that corresponds to the current row in the table (an "
arrow" is positioned next to the row number) is implicitly displayed extra bold. If the row is
selected ("pressed") the corresponding object is displayed in green. Pressing the "Remove"
button colors all objects selected for deletion red.
Visualization of selected objects
Marking objects using these colors is implicitly set. This setting, however, can be modified in
the "Setting visualization style" - tab sheet "Global".
- 24 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Setting color for selecting objects
Dialogue windows
A dialogue window is one of the elements that allows for inputting data into program. In all
GEO programs the dialogue windows apply to conventional windows management typical for
the WINDOWS environment. A left mouse button is used when selecting objects in the
window or alternatively the function key "Tab" when using keyboard. The cursor arrows, key
"ENTER" or in case of command buttons the corresponding underlined letter ("Cancel" - "C",
"OK" "O") are employed when moving within an object.
A dialogue window can contain the following items: table, combo list, fields for inputting data
(number, text) and command buttons. The "OK" command button confirms the selection,
while the "Cancel" button leaves the input mode.
Providing the window contains a certain non-typical control element (or this element has
some other rather then typical effect) its function is described in the corresponding data input
regime.
As an example consider the following picture showing the "Edit surcharge" dialogue window
that contains the "OK+ " and "OK+ " buttons. These buttons allow the user to move within
the list of inputted surcharges and at the same time to confirm changes made in the window.
Pressing this button results in the same action as if closing the window with the "OK" button
and opening it again for the next element in the list.
- 25 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window example
Active dimensions and obj ects
The system of active dimensions and objects allows for faster editing of the inputted data.
Active dimension is a dimension that can be edited directly on the desktop. The value of
active dimension is labeled by frame (dashed line). Positioning the mouse cursor and the
frame changes its mask into a "hand". Clicking the value than changes the frame view (is
plotted in a solid line), to cursor starts to blink and the dimension can be edited. The "Enter"
button closes the editing mode. The change is immediately displayed on the desktop.
Active obj ect functions in a similar way. Changing the cursor mask into a "hand" and
clicking the object (double click) than activates the editing mode. In this case, however, the
values are not edited directly on the desktop, but rather in the dialogue window originally
used to create the object. The picture shows an example of an active object (trapezoidal
surcharge), when clicking on the desktop opens the "Edit surcharge" dialogue window.
- 26 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Example of using active dimensions and active objects
Unit - metric / imperial
The program allows for choosing either metric or imperial units. Use combo list to select the
desired type of units. A prompt message appears requesting to confirm the selection.
Dialogue window to confirm the change of units
Copy to clipboard
The program allows for using the Windows clipboard in two different ways:
- it is possible to copy the current desktop view. The picture can be then
inserted into an arbitrary editor (MS Word, Drawing, Adobe Photoshop, etc.)
Individual parameters are set in the "Options" dialogue window, tab sheet "
Copy to clipboard"
- it is possible to copy the program input data (soil parameters, profile and
interfaces, surcharges, water impact, terrain, etc.). The copied data can be
then inserted into another GEO5 program
Copying to clipboard is available either from the control menu (items "Modifications", "Copy
picture") or using the "Files" button on the tool bar.
Options
The "Options" dialogue window serves to set some of the special program functions (copy to
clipboard, print view, grid and step, etc.).
This dialogue window is opened from a control menu (items "Setting", "Options").
- 27 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The window contains individual tab sheets (number and content may vary depending on
individual programs) that allow for specifying corresponding settings.
Dialogue window "Options"
Options - copy to clipboard
The "Copy to clipboard" tab sheet allows for setting the controlling parameters:
Picture size
- the setting defines the picture size. Either the picture width or
height can be assigned manually. The other dimension is always
set automatically
Picture format
- the setting defines the picture format (*.EMF, *.WMF, *.BMP), its
resolution and color. Recommended setting is displayed in the
figure (format: *.EMF, resolution: 600 dpi, color)
Options
- the setting defines the picture frame and header. If both options
are checked, the picture contains both the frame and header
The "Default" button in the window sets original implicit values.
- 28 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "Options" tab sheet "Copy to clipboard"
Options - print picture
This dialogue window is opened from the control menu (items "Setting", "Options"). The "
Print picture" tab sheet allows for setting the picture parameters assumed for printout or
export in the "Print and export picture" dialogue window.
Options
- the setting defines the picture frame and header. If both options
are checked, the picture contains both the frame and header
The "Default" button in the window sets original implicit values.
- 29 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "Options" tab sheet "Print picture"
Options - input
The "Options" dialogue window, tab sheet "I nput" allows for setting the "Grid" parameters
and parameters of functions "Back" and "Repeat".
This tab sheet is implemented only in 2D programs (Slope stability, Settlement, Beam,
etc.).
Grid
- sets the grid origin and step in the X and Z directions
Show grid
- shows / hides grid on the desktop
Snap to grid
- turns on / off the snap to grid option using mouse
(when shifting the mouse the cursor jumps over the
defined grid a point off the grid can be specified by
holding the "CTRL" key)
Horizontal rule
- shows / hides horizontal rule with a scale of distances
on the desktop
Vertical rule
- shows / hides vertical rule with a scale of distances on
the desktop
Functions Back and
Repeat
- turns on / off the possibility of using these functions in
the program (on horizontal tool bar these buttons are "
foggy"
Dialogue window "Options" - tab sheeet "I nput"
Common input
This chapter contains the hint sections that either provide details on the chapter "Data input
and analysis regimes" or are common to several GEO programs.
Proj ect - Earth pressures
The "Proj ect" frame tab sheet "Earth pressures" contains basic settings driving the
analysis of earth pressures. The program offers presetting for various countries (Czech
- 30 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Republic, Germany, France.) and "Standard setting" recommended by the authors for
countries stored in the list.
When the "User" option is selected it is possible choose from an arbitrary type of analysis
offered by the program:
Earth pressure analysis
Methods to compute active pressure Methods to compute passive pressure
- Caqout-Kerisel - Caqout-Krisel (CSN 730037)
- Coulomb (CSN 730037) - Coulomb
- Mller-Breslau (DIN 4085) - Mller-Breslau
- Mazindrani (Rankin) - Sokolovski (DIN 4085)
- Absi - Mazindrani (Rankin)
- Absi
Earthquake analysis
- Mononobe-Okabe
- Arrango
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Earth pressures"
I nputting and editing soils
The "Add new soil" dialogue window serves to input name soil parameters that should be
obtained from laboratory measurements or geological survey.
All inputting fields in the window must be filled. The only exception is the value of
sat
(bulk
weight of saturated soil) in the window section "Uplift". Should this filed remain empty the
program autonatically adds the value of (bulk weight of soil).
Cliking the hint button " " provides information about the theory of analyses linked to
individual values being inputted.
Color and soil sample are selected in "Soil and rock symbols" dialogue window. To open this
window press the "Sample and color" button.
If no geological survey or laboratoray experiments are available, the soil can be specified with
the help of soil database containg approximate values of basic characteristics. The "Classify"
button opens the "Soil classification" dialogue window with the values offered for inserting
into the window. The "Delete" button allows for removing the information about classified
soil from the catalogue. Soil parameters that do not appear in the catalogue ("Friction angle
struc-soil" in the picture) must be in any case assigned manually.
- 31 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The specified soil is inserted into the list of soils by pressing the "Add" button.
Dialogue window "Adding new soils"
Soil classification
Approximate values of soils can be obtained from the catalogue of soils according to CSN 73
1001 standard "Foundation soil below spread footings". The combo list serves to select the
desired soil and specify its consistency or compactness, respectively. The soil parameters
obtained from the catalogue appear in the window.
- 32 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "Soil classification"
Pressing the "OK" button shows in the "Add new soil" recommended values next to
corresponding input fields (see Fig.). Pressing the "OK+Assign" button then assigns to
individual input fields the average values of soil parameters. The "Cancel" button leaves the
window with no action.
The "Manual" button opens the "Manual soil classification" dialogue window that allows for
classifying the soil if its parameters are known, e.g., from laboratory measurements (grading,
moisture, compactness.).
Soil classification recommended range of values
Soil and rock labels
- 33 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The soil inputted either manually or inserted from the catalogue of soils can be assigned a
sample (type of hatching) and color to be shown in the profile on the desktop.
A color selected from the "Desktop" combo list is the color used to plot soils (rocks) on the
desktop. A color selected from the "Pictures" combo list is the color used to visualize soils
(rocks) in pictures that are either stored in the "Picture list" or printed with the help of "Print
and export pictures".
The sample color to be sufficiently visible should be chosen with respect to the desktop
background or printout paper, respectively.
Dialogue window "Soil and rock symbols"
Manual classification of soil
This dialogue window allows for specifying the soil parameters, which serve to add the soil
into a catalogue of soils. The "OK" button switches back to the "Soil classification" dialogue
window with setting and classified soil.
- 34 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "Manual classification of soil"
I nterface in 2D environment
The left part of the desktop contains a table with the list of interfaces. Interfaces are ordered
in the table from top to bottom. For currently selected interface the program displays in the
mid section of the desktop another table listing individual interface points.
A tool bar in the top part of the desktop contains control buttons to manage interfaces.
Tool bar "I nterface"
Margins
- opens the "World coordinates" dialogue window that
allows for setting the world dimensions (left and right
edge).
Add
- turns on the regime for inputting a new interface
individual interfaces can be added in an arbitrary order.
Each interface is automatically stored in the list of
interface when leaving the input mode
Modify
- turns on the regime for editing an interface this regime
is also activated by clicking the desired interface on the
desktop
remove
- upon pressing the "Remove" button the program marks
the selected interface with a red color and opens the
dialogue window to confirm this action
Every change made to a given interface can be put back using the "UNDO and REDO" buttons
on the horizontal tool bar.
- 35 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "I nterface"
Adding interface
The "Add" button starts the regime for inputting points of a new interface. Other buttons on
the same tool bar assumed for inputting and editing interface points become active. The "OK"
button (tinged green) closes the input regime and stores the inputted points. The "Cancel"
button (tinged red) closes the input regime without accounting for changes.
Two options are available to specify coordinates of individual interface points:
Using table: interface points are introduced in the "New interface points" table. The "Add"
button opens the "New point" dialogue window that allows for specifying coordinates of a
new point. The "Add" button then inserts the point into the table. The "Cancel" button is
serves to close the input mode when all interface points are introduced. The "Edit" and "
Remove" buttons allow for either editing or deleting the inputted points. Each change in
interface geometry immediately appears on the desktop.
Using mouse: individual buttons on the vertical tool drive this inputting mode. The following
modes are available:
Add point
- the point is inserted by clicking the left mouse button on the
desktop - the grid option can be exploited when inserting the
point - the inputted point is automatically rounded to two
decimal digits both mouse and keyboard input modes are
therefore identical
Edit point using
mouse
- pressing the existing interface point using the left mouse
button allows for selecting this point and then moving it to a
new position
Edit point in
dialogue point
- clicking the existing interface point opens the dialogue window
that allows for modifying the point coordinates
Remove point
- pressing the existing interface point using the left mouse
button opens the "Remove point" dialogue window when
confirming this action the point is deleted
When inputting points, it is possible to utilize the template obtained from import DXF.
- 36 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The program allows also for introducing vertical interfaces in such a case the program
requests to insert the point either to the left or to the right. The buttons that serve to
confirm the action are colored the same color is also used to visualize both input variants
on the desktop.
The "OK" button (tinged green) is used to store the inputted interface when all interface
points are introduced.
The program also contains an automatic corrector of inputted interface that determines the
interface end points and then adds the interface to the list of interfaces.
Frame "I nterface"
Editing interface
The "Modify" button turns on the regime of inputting points of a new interface. The program
also opens the currently selected interface (it is selected from the "List of interfaces" table;
it is displayed as a solid thick line on the desktop). An interface can be selected also as an
active obj ect by clicking a point, line or interface using the left mouse button.
The actual editing procedure (adding, shifting, deleting points) is the same as for adding
interface input mode.
The "OK" button closes the editing regime and stores all performed changes. The "Cancel"
button closes the regime without accounting for all previously made modifications.
After leaving the edit mode (similarly to adding interface), the program immediately runs the
corrector of the inputted interface to check for the interface shape and if necessary to modify
the interface end points.
Corrector of inputted interface
When the inputting or editing process is completed the program automatically modifies the
inputted interface to comply with the program requirements, i.e. the end points touch the
world edges or other interfaces. The automatic corrector can be further used to simplify the
input process e.g., if only one point is used to specify an interface the program
automatically creates a horizontal interface containing the inputted point.
If the interface touches another interface the corrector creates new end points of the current
interface. These points then also become the points of the interface being touched. All lines of
individual interfaces thus start and end in a point.
In case of an incorrect input (see the picture below) the interface cannot be stored. In this
- 37 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
case the interface must be modified or the inputting process must be stopped using the "
Cancel" button.
Here we present examples of interface corrector functions (correct and incorrect input):
Correct and incorrect interface shapes
- 38 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
World coordinates
The dialogue window serves to specify world coordinates (dimensions) for a given task left
and right edges. The third data is auxiliary it determines the depth of drawing earth profiles
on the desktop it has no effect on the performed analysis.
The world coordinates can be changed at any time when increasing dimensions all inputted
interfaces are automatically prolonged, when reducing dimensions all points falling off the
new world coordinates are automatically removed.
Dialogue window "World coordinates"

Assigning soils
Two options are available to assign soils into individual profile layers. Clicking the left muse
button on the tool bar button above the table selects the desired soil (positioning the mouse
cursors in the bar above the soil button displays a bubble hint with the soil name). The soil is
inserted by moving the mouse cursor (the cursor mask changes into a "hand") first into a
specific layer and then by pressing the left mouse button.
The second option requires opening a combo list of a specific interface and then selecting the
desired soil to be assigned. All changes in the soil assignment are automatically displayed on
the desktop.
- 39 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Assigning"
Design coefficients
The "Analysis" or "Verification" frames that display the list of computed forces allow for
specifying design coefficients. A design coefficient multiplies the corresponding force. When
inputting the coefficient the results are automatically recomputed and the desktop shows
modified forces.
Design coefficients are advantageous for example for:
- structure testing when a structure response to an increase of force
specified directly in the analysis window can be visualized
- excluding several forces from verification or their reduction
- Specifying design combinations e.g., different coefficients can be
assigned in the sense of EC to main load variables and side
variable loads
The following combinations can be for example specified when performing the wall
verification:
Analysis 1 Analysis 2 Analysis 3
- Wall
1,0 1,0 1,0
- Active pressure
1,0 1,0 1,0
- Surcharde 1
1,0 0,5 0,5
- Surcharde 2
0,5 1,0 0,5
- Surcharde 3
0,5 0,5 1,0
- 40 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Verification" application of design coefficients
Running more analyses / verification
Most frames that display the analysis results allow for defining more than one analysis to be
run. Several analyses within one construction stage are carried out for example for:
- dimensioning structure in more locations
- analyses of various slip surfaces
- verification with various design coefficients
The bar in the top part of the frame serves to manage individual analyses.
Frame "Analysis" tool bar "Running more analyses / verification"
Add
- adds additional analysis on the bar
Remove
- removes the currently selected analysis

Analysis 1,2,3
...
- switches between individual analyses
- 41 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Analysis" - "running more analyses / verification"
Connecting programs
In some cases it is possible to launch a new program from a currently running program. For
example, the "Cantilever wall" program allows for running the "Slope stability" program to
verify the external stability of a structure, or the "Spread footing" program to verify the
bearing capacity of a footing of a structure.
The new program loads the data of structure and then it behaves as a stand alone program
closing the program, however, is different. Pressing the "OK" button (on the right below the
tool bars) closes the program and the analysis data are passed to the original program. This
is not the case if closing the program with the help of the "Cancel" button.
The program, when running it for the first time, creates the data of a structure and
passes on the structure dimensions, geology, loads, surcharges and other data. The program
then requires inputting some additional data, e.g. the analysis method, analysis setting,
slip surfaces, stages of construction, etc.
When running it again (always necessary if some changes were made in the original
program) the program regenerates the data to be passed on, but keeps the data already
inputted in this program. For example, when connecting the original program with the "
Spread footing" program the new program keeps the additionally inputted sand-gravel
cushion together with inputted soil the footing dimensions, foundation geometry, and
geological profile are, however, regenerated.
Some actions are not allowed in the new program e.g. to change the basic setting of the
project, unit, etc. The generated task, however, can be saved into new data using the "Save
as" button and work with it as with any other independent task.
- 42 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008

Run the program "Spread footing" from program "Cantilever wall"
Selecting and storing views
The programs offers a number of ways of displaying results. A specific option can be selected
from the "View results" dialogue window. Quite often is necessary to go through a complex
and tedious setting of views for example, if we are interested in the distribution of internal
forces developed in beams using FEM, it is necessary to turn off the color range, draw only
undeformed structure, select a variable to be displayed, select a suitable magnification, etc.

To simplify the way of managing individual views the programs allow us, using the "Selecting
and storing views" bar, to store the current view and also to go from one view to the
other in a relatively simple way.
The stored view keeps:
- all settings from the "View results"
- drawn variables
- color range
- picture zoom
The view is stored for all stages of construction if it is not possible in a certain construction
stage to perform such a setting (e.g. in the first construction stage the settlement and
depression are not defined) the programs displays the closest possible setting and the defined
view is switched to <none>.
- 43 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Control units of a tool bar "Views"
The following control units are available to manage views:
Define view
- opens the "Setting results visualization"
dialogue window, which serves to define
details for displaying the results
Select view
- a combo list allows for selecting an already
specified and stored view
Store current view
- opens the "New view" dialogue window to
store a new view

Open view manager
- opens the window with a list of views
Setting results visualization
The "Settlement - results visualization setting " dialogue window provides tools for a lucid
way of displaying the results both on the screen and in the printed format:
- parameters to draw depression line and influence zone
- setting surface views and color scale drawing
- setting and drawing tilted sections
The programs based on the finite element method further allow for setting:
- parameters to draw the finite element mesh
- parameters to draw construction deformed /
undeformed (note that undeformed option must be
selected when displaying beam internal forces)
- distribution of internal forces along interfaces and on
beam elements
All information specified in this window (including the setting of current magnification) can be
stored using the selecting and storing views bar.
- 44 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "Settlement results visualization setting"
Setting color range
The color range is an important tool providing a lucid way of visualization of results. The
program offers two predefined types of color ranges "Uniform" and "Across zero". Both
ranges have a moving minimum and maximum value and predefined colors. The minimum
and maximum values are automatically regenerated whenever the variable or a stage of
construction is changed. The "Uniform" range means that colors are uniformly spread from
the minimum to the maximum value. The " Across zero" range draws the positive values
using warm colors (yellow, red), while cold colors (green, blue) are used to represent
negative values.
The program allows for introduction of user- defined ranges with both the fixed minimum
and maximum and the moving minimum and maximum. A user-defined range is spec ified in
the "Scale color definition" dialogue window. The range is always defined for the current unit
(e.g. kPa, m) when switching the units the program always adjusts the range particular for
a given unit.
Control units of a tool bar "Ranges"
The following control units are available to manage ranges:
Select range
- a combo list allows for selecting an
already specified and stored range
Define color ranges
- opens the "Scale color definition" dialogue
window to create a user-defined range
- 45 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Store current range
- opens the "New range" dialogue window
to store a new range

Open range manager
- opens the window with a list of automatic
and user-defined ranges
Scale color definition
The "Scale color definition " dialogue window serves to cerate a user- defined color scale.
The "Floating minimum and maximum" check box determines the basic type of a scale. If
checked, the minimum and maximum values of a scale are automatically adjusted whenever
the corresponding variable or a construction stage is changed. In such a case it possible to
adjust the following:
- scale refinement (the minimum number of levels is
four and the maximum is 100)
- scale color
- uniform scale / across zero
The number of scale levels and scale type are specified in the "Scale generation"
dialogue window, which opens after pressing the "Generate values" button. It is possible to
adjust both values and colors in the table in the left part of the dialogue window. The range
values can be easily changed in the table. If the box in the "Control color " column is
checked, it is possible to choose an arbitrary color from the combo box. The color on
intermediate not checked rows are automatically blended from the inputted colors in checked
rows. The default values can be recalled anytime after pressing the "Predefined colors "
button.
An important property of the program is a definition of ranges with the fixed minimum and
maximum. If the "Floating minimum and maximum" check box is not checked, the color
range is fixed and its minimum and maximum values are inputted. As oppose to the moving
range it is further possible to specify:
- range end points (in the "Scale generation" dialogue
window)
- colors to display values out of the range
When changing a variable or a construction stage the color range remains still the same ,
keeping the same end ranges. The values found outside the range (below the minimum or
above the maximum value) are drawn using colors specified in the right part of the window.
The minimum and maximum range values are inputted in the "Scale generation"
dialogue window. The inputted minimum and maximum values are linked to the same unit
e.g. when specifying the rage of 0-200 kPa, this range is kept the same for all variables
being specified in kPa when changing the currently displayed variable to the variable
settlement, the current range is switched to that corresponding to the unit of settlement.
For both the fixed and floating scale it is possible to choose whether the colors in the ranges
are distributed uniformly or across zero. The "Uniform" scale means that colors are
smoothly spread from the minimum to the maximum value of the scale. The " Across zero"
scale draws the colors above the selected value using warm colors (yellow, red), while cold
colors (green, blue) are used to represent the colors below the selected value.
- 46 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "Scale color definition"
I mport - export DXF
Programs 2D (Slope stability, Settlement, FEM) allow for importing and exporting data in DXF
format. The program main menu (item "File") contains items "I mport" and "Export" "
Format DXF". These items are accessible in the menu even if the module "I mport- export
DXF" has not been purchased. If the module is not implemented, the program displays a
warning message.
Warning message for missing module
If the module is purchased, the desktop contains a tool bar for handling the imported data.
Menu and tool bar for module "Export-import DFX"
Data import proceeds in two steps:
- Reading data into template
- Inputting data using template
- 47 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- Modifying template during data input
The data inputted in the program can be exported in DXF format anytime.
Reading data into template
To proceed, use the program menu (item "File") and choose the item "I mport", "Format
DXF". Next, select the file intended for import. The loaded data are displayed in the dialogue
window, which allows for selecting individual layers to be subsequently read into a
template. All data are always loaded into the program so that the layer selection can be
modified anytime.
When importing data it is possible adjust the world margins based on the imported data
this is particularly useful when defining a new task.
Imported data are not transferred directly into the program. Instead, they are read into a
template, which is used to transfer data into program later on. When the data are loaded the
template is displayed on the desktop and the buttons on a horizontal tool bare, which are
used to manage the template, are made available.
Reading data into a template
Modifying world margins
I nputting data using template
Inputting data using a template is essentially the same as a standard input of data in the
program. The main difference appears in the possibility of adding a point from a template into
the data being inputted. During input the mouse cursor appears as an axial cross when
approaching the template it turns into a small cross and long axes disappear. When a point
- 48 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
is now inputted (using the left mouse button) the point from the template is inserted (the
inputted point has now the same coordinates as the point in the template). To accelerate the
input of individual lines it appears useful to employ the zooming tools. After interfaces are
inputted, the procedure can be applied to input other entities. During input it is possible to
modify template anytime .
I nputting data using a template
Modifying template during data input
When inputting data, the template can be modified anytime. In particular, pressing the "
Modify" button on the "Template DXF" tool bar opens a dialogue window with individual
layers of the template. For example, when inputting anchors, it is possible to turn off all
layers except for anchors inputting anchors then becomes simple and lucid.
- 49 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Turning on/ off layers in a template
Display after modifying layers in a template
Export DXF
To proceed, use the program menu (item " File") and choose the item "Export", "Format
DXF". Next, select the file name intended for export. Using a dialogue window the program
then provides information regarding the performed data export.
- 50 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
I nformation regarding the performed data export
The exported data can be verified by importing them back into the program GEO5.
Check of exported data
I nput regimes and analysis
This capture contains basic description of individual regimes of inputting data into the
program:
Program Earth Pressure
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data and to specify the overall setting
of the analysis run. The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic
data about the analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc.
- 51 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The "Proj ect" tab sheet also allows the user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial).
The "Earth pressures" tab sheet serves to choose the basic theory or standards to be followed
in the solution of a given problem.
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Project"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame contains table listing the points of a structure. Adding (editing) points
is performed in the "Add ( edit) point" dialog window.
The existing geometry points can be further edited on the desktop with the help of active
objects double clicking on a selected point opens a dialog window to edit the point.
Frame "Geometry"
Profile
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of inputted interfaces. After specifying
interfaces it is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active
dimensions.
Adding (editing) layer is performed in the "Add ( edit) interface" dialogue window. The
- 52 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified.
The program allows for raising or lowering the top point of a structure in the "Change
terrain elevation" dialogue window so that the whole interface can be translated while
keeping the thicknesses of individual layers. This function is important when copying the
profile from program "Terrain".
Frame "Profile"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of inputted soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding (editing) a soil is performed in the "Add (edit) soil" dialogue window.
The soil characteristics are specified in the program "Earth Pressure". These characteristics
are further specified in chapters: "Basic data", "Earth pressure at rest" and "Uplift pressure".
- 53 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Soils"
Assign
The "Assign" frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
Procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in details herein.
Frame "Assign"
Terrain
- 54 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The "Terrain" frame allows, by pressing the button, for specifying the terrain shape. The
selected shape with graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the
left part of the frame. The terrain shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values
into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The last option to choose from is a general shape of a terrain. In this case the frame contains
a table with a list of terrain points. The first point with coordinates [0, 0] coincides with the
top point of a structure.
Analysis of earth pressures in case of inclined terrain is described in the theoretical part of the
help "Distribution of earth pressures for broken terrain".
Frame "Terrain"
Water
The "Water" allows, by pressing the button, for selecting the type of water. The selected type
together with a graphic hint (Parameter chart) of inputted values is displayed in the left
part of the frame. Water parameters (h1, h2...) can be edited either in the frame by inserting
values into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The last option is a manual input of pore pressure both in front and behind the structure. Two
tab sheets "I n front of structure" and "Behind structure" appear with tables. The table is
filled with values of pore pressure in front, or behind the structure at a depth of z (z-axis).
The ground water table can also be specified above the structure or earth profile,
respectively in such a case the depth of water is inputted with negative value.
Analysis of earth pressures with influence of water is described in the theoretical part of the
hint chapter "Influence of water".
The program further allows for specifying a depth of tensile cracks filled with water.
- 55 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of inputted surcharges. Adding (editing)
surcharge is performed in the "New ( edit) surcharge" dialogue window. The inputted
surchages can be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects,
respectively.
The z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified (positive direction
downwards) when inputting the surcharge at a certain depth. Providing the surcharge is
found off the terrain the computer prompts an error message.
Analysis of earth pressures due to surcharges is described in the theoretical part of the hint,
chapter "Influence of surcharge".
- 56 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Surcharge"
Earthquake
The "Earthquake" frame serves to input earthquake parameters. Directions of inputted
earthquake effects are displayed on the desktop.
Analysis of earth pressures while accounting for earthquake is described in the theoretical
part of the hint in chapter "Influence earthquake".
Frame "Earthquake"
Setting
- 57 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The "Setting" frame contains basic settings for the analysis of earth pressures. The program
offers pre-setting for different countries (Czech Republic, Germany, France,...) and "
Standard setting" recommended by the authors of the program for countries no included in
the list. While changing settings in the combo list the values of coefficients of reduction of soil
parameters in corresponding windows are changed.
An arbitrary analysis setting is available with the option "User setting". Selecting the option
"Reduce soil parameters" allows for specifying in input fields individual values of the
coefficients of reduction of soil parameters (e.g., recommended values according to EC7).
Frame "Setting"
Analysis
The "Analysis" frame displays the analysis results. The frame serves to select type of
computed earth pressure (active pressure, pressure at rest, passive pressure). Two options "
Create soil wedge" and "Minimum dimensioning pressure" are available when computing the
active earth pressure.
Several analyses can be performed for a single task by varying design coefficients of
individual components of earth pressure.
The analysis results are displayed on the desktop and are updated immediately for an
arbitrary change in input data or setting. Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "
Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
- 58 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Analysis"
Program Sheeting Design
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data and to specify the overall setting
of the analysis run. The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic
data about the analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc.
The "Proj ect" tab sheet also allows the user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial).
The "Earth pressures" tab sheet serves to choose the basic theory or standards to be followed
in the solution of a given problem.
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Project"
- 59 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Profile
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of inputted interfaces. After specifying
interfaces it is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active
dimensions.
Adding (editing) layer is performed in the "Add ( edit) interface" dialogue window. The
z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified.
The program allows for raising or lowering the top point of a structure in the "Change
terrain elevation" dialogue window so that the whole interface can be translated while
keeping the thicknesses of individual layers. This function is important when copying the
profile from program "Terrain".
Frame "Profile"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of inputted soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding (editing) a soil is performed in the "Add (edit) soil" dialogue window.
The soil characteristics are specified in the program "Sheeting design". These characteristics
are further specified in chapters: "Basic data" and "Uplift pressure".
- 60 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Soils"
Assign
The "Assign" frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
Procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in details herein.
Frame "Assign"
Geometry
- 61 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The "Geometry" frame is used to specify the depth of a construction ditch and by pressing
the button to choose the shape of a bottom. The selected shape with a graphic hint ("
Parameter chart") appears in the left part of the frame. The dimensions of a structure can
be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the desktop with the
help of active dimensions.
The frame can be further used to input surcharge of a construction ditch bottom and
coefficient of reduction of earth pressure below the ditch bottom (this coefficient serves to
analyze braced sheeting).
Frame "Geometry"
Anchors
The "Anchors" frame contains a table with a list of inputted anchors. Adding (editng)
anchors is performed in the "New anchor ( Edit anchor) " dialogue window. The inputted
anchors can be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
- 62 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Anchors"
Props
The "Props" frame contains a table with a list inputted props. Adding (editing) props is
performed in the "New prop ( Edit prop) " dialogue window. The inputted props can also be
edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects, respectively.
Frame "Props"
Supports
The "Supports" frame contains a table with a list of inputted supports. Adding (editing)
- 63 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
supports is performed in the "New support ( Edit support) " dialogue window. The inputted
supports can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active
objects, respectively.
Frame "Supports"
Pressure determination
The "Pressure specification" frame allows by pressing the button "Analyze" ("I nput",
respectively) for selecting a method for the calculation of active earth pressure. Choose
option "Analyze" if you wish the active earth pressure to be computed automatically based
on specified earth profile.
In some special cases (redistribution of earth pressures due to presence of anchors,
nonstandard rotation of a structure) it advisable to specify the distribution of earth pressure
on a structure manually. Selecting the option "I nput" opens a table in the frame with a list of
inputted points and the corresponding pressure value. The pressure is specified up to the
depth of structure increased by the depth of zero point (the depth of zero point is introduced
in the top part of the frame). The depth of zero point equal to zero is selected if we wish to
specify the pressure values only up to the depth of construction ditch. Below the ditch the
programs computes the pressure values based on the specified geological profile. Providing
the earth pressure is specified manually the program does not account for the influence of
terrain profile, surcharge and water.
- 64 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Pressure determination"
Terrain
The "Terrain" frame allows, by pressing the button, for specifying the terrain shape. The
selected shape with graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the
left part of the frame. The terrain shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values
into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The last option to choose from is a general shape of a terrain. In this case the frame contains
a table with a list of terrain points. The first point with coordinates [0, 0] coincides with the
top point of a structure.
Analysis of earth pressures in case of inclined terrain is described in the theoretical part of the
hint, chapter "Distribution of earth pressures for broken terrain".
- 65 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Terrain"
Water
The "Water" allows, by pressing the button, for selecting the type of water. The selected type
together with a graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the left
part of the frame. Water parameters h
1
, h
2
can be edited either in the frame by inserting
values into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The ground water table can also be specified above the structure or earth profile,
respectively in such a case the depth of water is inputted with negative value.
Analysis of earth pressures with influence of water is described in the theoretical part of the
hint chapter "Influence of water".
The program further allows for specifying a depth of tensile cracks filled with water.
- 66 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of inputted surcharges. Adding (editing)
surcharge is performed in the "New ( edit) surcharge" dialogue window. The inputted
surchages can be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects,
respectively.
The z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified (positive direction
downwards) when inputting the surcharge at a certain depth. Providing the surcharge is
found off the terrain the computer prompts an error message.
Analysis of earth pressures due to surcharges is described in the theoretical part of the hint,
chapter "Influence of surcharge".
- 67 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Surcharge"
Forces
The "Forces" frame contains a table with a list of forces acting on a structure. Adding
(editing) forces is performed in the "New force ( edit force) " dialogue window. The inputted
forces can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
Frame "Forces"
Earthquake
The "Earthquake" frame serves to input earthquake parameters. Directions of inputted
- 68 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
earthquake effects are displayed on the desktop.
Analysis of earth pressures while accounting for earthquake is described in the theoretical
part of the hint in chapter "Influence earthquake".
Frame "Earthquake"
Setting
The "Setting" frame contains basic settings for the analysis of earth pressures. The program
offers pre-setting for different countries (Czech Republic, Germany, France,...) and "
Standard setting" recommended by the authors of the program for countries no included in
the list. While changing settings in the combo list the values of coefficients of reduction of soil
parameters in corresponding windows are changed.
An arbitrary analysis setting is available with the option "User setting". Selecting the option
"Reduce soil parameters" allows for specifying in input fields individual values of the
coefficients of reduction of soil parameters (e.g., recommended values according to EC7-1).
Frame "Setting"
- 69 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Analysis
The "Analysis" frame displays the analysis results. The analysis is carried out by pressing the
"Analyze" button in the right part of the frame. The frame has two variants. The first variant
applies to a wall free of anchors (sheet pile) and the second one to an anchored (strutted)
wall.
A coefficient of reduction of passive earth pressure (or factor of safety) together with a choice
whether to consider a minimum dimensioning pressure behind the structure is specified for a
non- anchored wall.
A type of heel support (fixed, free) and analysis parameters (coefficient of reduction of
passive pressure, minimum dimensioning pressure) are specified for an anchored wall.
The analysis results are displayed on the desktop. Visualization of results can be adjusted in
the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Analysis" - non-anchored wall
- 70 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Analysis" - anchored wall
Program Sheeting Check
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data and to specify the overall setting
of the analysis run. The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic
data about the analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc.
The "Proj ect" tab sheet also allows the user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial).
The "Earth pressures" tab sheet serves to choose the basic theory or standards to be followed
in the solution of a given problem.
The "Other" tab sheet allows the user to specify subdivision of a wall in to finite elements (by
default the number of elements equals to 30).
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Project"
Profile
- 71 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of inputted interfaces. After specifying
interfaces it is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active
dimensions .
Adding (editing) layer is performed in the "Add ( edit) interface" dialogue window. The
z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified.
The program allows for raising or lowering the top point of a structure in the "Change
terrain elevation" dialogue window so that the whole interface can be translated while
keeping the thicknesses of individual layers. This function is important when copying the
profile from program "Terrain".
The frame "Profile"
Modulus of subsoil reaction
This frame serves to specify a type of analysis for computation of the modulus of subsoil
reaction, which is an important input parameter when analyzing a structure using the method
of dependent pressures.
The program makes possible to input the distribution of the modulus of subsoil reaction
(along the length of a structure, as a soil parameter), iterate from soil material parameters,
or to compute it. The modulus of subsoil reaction can be either linear or nonlinear.
Selecting the option "I nput by distribution" opens a table in the frame that allows for
specifying the values of the modulus of subsoil reaction both in front and behind the
structure. When selecting other options the required information needed to compute the
modulus value are inputted as soil parameters in the frame "Soils".
- 72 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Modulus of subsoil reaction"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of inputted soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding (editing) a soil is performed in the "Add (edit) soil" dialogue window.
The soil characteristics are specified in the program "Sheeting check". These characteristics
are further specified in chapters: "Basic data", "Earth pressure at rest", "Uplift pressure" and "
Modulus of subsoil reaction".
- 73 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Soils"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame contains a table with a list of inputted structural sections forming the
sheeting wall. For each section the table stores its cross-sectional characteristics (A area, I
Moment of inertia) and material characteristics (E Modulus of elasticity, G Shear
modulus these variables are always expressed with respect to 1m of a construction length).
Adding (editing) sections is performed in the "New section (Edit section)" dialogue window.
The program allows for adding (inserting) another section in between two already existing
sections of a structure. Inserting a new section is performed in the "I nsert section" dialogue
window that complies with the "New section" dialogue window. The inserted section is
ordered such as to precede the currently selected section of a structure.
The inputted sections can be further edited on the desktop with the help of active objects
double clicking on a structure opens a dialog window with a given section.
Frame "Geometry"
Adding and editing section
The "New section ( Edit, section, I nsert section) " dialog window contains the following
items:
Type of wall
- combo list containing individual types of walls to create a
sheeting (pile wall, reinforced concrete rectangular wall,
sheet pile wall, steel I cross-section, or own generation of
desired cross-sectional characteristics
Section length
- use input field to specify length of sheeting wall or length
of a given section of a structure, respectively
Coeff. of reduc. of
earth press. below
ditch bottom
- coefficient allowing for computation of braced sheeting (for
classical sheeting is set equal to one)
- 74 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Geometry
- contains information about geometry for a given structural
variant (e.g., for pile wall it contains pile cross-section and
spacing of piles, for reinforced concrete wall its thickness,
etc.)
Profile
- contains information about profile for the selected
structural variant "steel I cross-section" (buttons "
Catalogue" and "Edit" open the "Rolled section steel
profiles", which contains a list of these cross-sections)
Material
- contains information about material of a given structural
variant (e.g., for pile wall it contains a catalogue of
materials to select the type of concrete, for sheet pile wall
the elastic modulus, etc.)
Information
- contains overview of cross-sectional characteristics of the
inputted cross-section area and moment of inertia are
always evaluated for 1m of length in out of plane direction
The "User catalogue" button in the bottom part of the window opens the "User catalogue"
dialogue window.
Dialogue window "New section"
User catalogue
The user catalogue allows the user to define and store own cross-sections and their
characteristics that appear in the construction of a wall. At first use of the catalogue (has not
been yet created) the program prompts a warning message that no catalogue was found.
Then, pressing the button "OK" opens the "Save as" dialogue window that allows for entering
- 75 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
the catalogue name and saving it into a specified location by pressing the "Save" button (by
default a folder used for saving the project data is assumed).
The program allows the user to create more than one catalogue. The next catalogue is
created by pressing the "New" button the program asks, whether the current catalogue
should be replaced (the currently loaded catalogue is not deleted!) and saves the new
catalogue under a new name. The "Open" button allows for loading an arbitrary user
catalogue and by pressing the "Save as" button for saving it under a different name.

Dialogue window at first use user catalogue of cross-sections
The "User catalogue" dialogue window contains a table listing the user defined
cross-sections. The Add item button opens the New catalogue item dialogue window
that allows for specifying and subsequent saving of characteristics of a new cross-section into
the catalogue. Buttons Edit item and Remove item serve to edit individual items in the
table.
The "Accept current" button accepts the current cross-sectional characteristics of a
cross-section specified in the "New section" dialogue window and opens the "New catalogue
item" dialogue window that allows for modifying and saving the current cross-section.
Dialogue windows "User catalogue" and "New catalogue item"
Assign
The "Assign" frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
Procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in details herein.
- 76 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Assign"
Excavation
The "Excavation" frame serves to input the depth of a construction ditch and by pressing the
button to select the shape of the ditch base. The selected shape with a graphic hint "
Parameter chart" appears in the left part of the frame. The dimensions of a structure can be
edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the desktop with the help
of active dimensions.
The frame also allows for specifying surcharge acting on the ditch base or a thickness of
made-up ground of new soil below the ditch base (the soil can be selected from a combo list
containing soils inputted in the regime "Soils"). When introducing the made-up ground with
brace sheeting it is assumed that there is a sheeted structure in the location of made-up
ground, i.e., all pressures are acting on the entire width of a structure as above the
construction ditch base.
- 77 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Excavation"
Terrain
The "Terrain" frame allows, by pressing the button, for specifying the terrain shape. The
selected shape with graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the
left part of the frame. The terrain shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values
into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The last option to choose from is a general shape of a terrain. In this case the frame contains
a table with a list of terrain points. The first point with coordinates [0, 0] coincides with the
top point of a structure.
Analysis of earth pressures in case of inclined terrain is described in the theoretical part of the
hint, chapter "Distribution of earth pressures for broken terrain".
- 78 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Terrain"
Water
The "Water" allows, by pressing the button, for selecting the type of water. The selected type
together with a graphic hint (Parameter chart) of inputted values is displayed in the left
part of the frame. Water parameters (h1, h2...) can be edited either in the frame by inserting
values into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The last option is a manual input of pore pressure both in front and behind the structure. Two
tab sheets "I n front of structure" and "Behind structure" appear with tables. The table is
filled with values of pore pressure in front, or behind the structure at a depth of z (z-axis).
The ground water table can also be specified above the structure or earth profile,
respectively in such a case the depth of water is inputted with negative value.
Analysis of earth pressures with influence of water is described in the theoretical part of the
hint chapter "Influence of water".
The program further allows for specifying a depth of tensile cracks filled with water.
- 79 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of inputted surcharges. Adding (editing)
surcharge is performed in the "New ( edit) surcharge" dialogue window. The inputted
surchages can be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects,
respectively.
The z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified (positive direction
downwards) when inputting the surcharge at a certain depth. Providing the surcharge is
found off the terrain the computer prompts an error message.
Analysis of earth pressures due to surcharges is described in the theoretical part of the hint,
chapter "Influence of surcharge".
- 80 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Surcharge"
Forces
The "Forces" frame contains a table with a list of forces acting on a structure. Adding
(editing) forces is performed in the "New force ( edit force) " dialogue window. The inputted
forces can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
Frame "Forces"
Anchors
The "Anchors" frame contains a table with a list of inputted anchors. Adding (editng)
- 81 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
anchors is performed in the "New anchor ( Edit anchor) " dialogue window. The inpuuted
anchors can be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
You are asked to input the anchor location, its length and inclination, pre-stress force and
parameters needed to determine the anchor stiffness (cross-sectional area, modulus of
elasticity). The anchor is introduced automatically on already deformed structure (obtained
from the previous stage of construction).
The anchor stiffness becomes effective in subsequent stages of construction. In subsequent
stages the anchor can no longer be edited. The only action available is the change of anchor
pre-stress force.
Note: The program does not check the anchor bearing capacity against breakage.
Frame "Anchors"
Props
The "Props" frame contains a table with a list inputted props. Adding (editing) props is
performed in the "New prop ( Edit prop) " dialogue window. The inputted props can also be
edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects, respectively.
You are asked to input the prop location, its length and parameters needed to determine the
prop stiffness (cross-sectional area, modulus of elasticity).
The prop is introduced automatically on already deformed structure (obtained from the
previous stage of construction). In subsequent stages the props can no longer be edited. The
only action available is the change of prop stiffness.
Note: The program does not check the prop bearing capacity neither for compression nor for
buckling.
- 82 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Props"
Supports
The "Supports" frame contains a table with a list of inputted supports. Adding (editing)
supports is performed in the "New support ( Edit support) " dialogue window. The inputted
supports can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active
objects, respectively.
You are asked to specify the support type (free, fixed, and spring) and its location. The
support is inputted automatically on already deformed structure (obtained from the previous
stage of construction). In subsequent stages the supports can no longer be edited. The only
action available is the introduction of prescribed (forced) displacement in a support.
- 83 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Support"
Earthquake
The "Earthquake" frame serves to input earthquake parameters. Directions of inputted
earthquake effects are displayed on the desktop.
Analysis of earth pressures while accounting for earthquake is described in the theoretical
part of the hint in chapter "Influence earthquake".
Frame "Earthquake"
Setting
- 84 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The "Setting" frame contains basic settings for the analysis of earth pressures. The program
offers pre-setting for different countries (Czech Republic, Germany, France,...) and "
Standard setting" recommended by the authors of the program for countries no included in
the list. While changing settings in the combo list the values of coefficients of reduction of soil
parameters in corresponding windows are changed.
An arbitrary analysis setting is available with the option "User setting". Selecting the option
"Reduce soil parameters" allows for specifying in input fields individual values of the
coefficients of reduction of soil parameters (e.g., recommended values according to EC7).
The "Other" tab sheet contains setting for minimum dimensioning pressure and setting of
parameters of internal stability of a structure.
The program "Sheeting check" is useful particularly when modeling real behavior of a
structure consequently we recommend the analysis to be performed without reduction of
input characteristics of soils ("Standard setting").
Frame "Setting" - tab sheet "Pressure calculation"
Frame "Setting" - tab sheet "Other"
Analysis
The frame "Analysis" displays the analysis results. Switching to this regime automatically
runs the analysis. The frame contains three buttons to show the analysis results:
- K
h
+ pressures
- 85 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Variation of the modulus of subsoil reaction is displayed in the left part of the desktop
(by default a blue color with hatching) is assumed. Referring to the method of
depending pressures some of the springs (values of modules of subsoil reaction) are
removed (spring stiffness set equal to zero) from the analysis. The analysis may fail to
converge providing the critical (limit) state developed both in front and behind the
structure and there is not enough constrains available (anchors, supports). The
program exists without finding a solution. An error message appears in the bottom part
of the frame such a case calls for modification in problem input e.g., add an
anchor, change a depth of excavation, improve soil parameters, etc.
Some construction stages display (by default a yellow dotted line is assumed)
deformation at the onset of mobilization of the earth pressure at rest this is a
complementary information showing plastic deformation of a structure.
Distributions of limiting pressures (by default a green dashed line is assumed) are
presented in the right part of the window (passive pressure, pressure at rest and active
pressure). The actual pressure acting on a structure is plotted in a solid blue line.
Both deformed (by default a solid red color is assumed) and undeformed structure
appears in the right part of the desktop. Forces and displacements developed in
anchors, supports and props are also shown.
- I nternal forces
Plot of a structure together with forces acting in anchors, reactions and deformations of
supports and props appear in the left part of the desktop. Distributions of bending
moment and shear force are then plotted on the right.
- Deformations + Stresses
Plot of a structure together with forces acting in anchors, reactions and deformations of
supports and props appear in the left part of the desktop. The deformed shape of a
structure together with overall pressure acting on a structure is then plotted on the
right.
Providing the modulus of subsoil reaction is found by iteration it is necessary to check the
course of iteration in the dialogue window. Details are provided in the theoretical part of the
hint "Modulus of subsoil reaction determined by iteration".
Frame "Analysis" - modulus of susoil reaction, earth pressures and deformations
- 86 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Analysis" - bending moment and shear force
Frame "Analysis" - deformation and pressure acting on structure
I nternal stability
This frame serves to check the internal stability of anchors the frame is therefore accessible
only in stages, in which the anchors are introduced. For each row of anchors the table shows
inputted anchor forces and the maximum allowable forces in each anchor. Overall check for
the most stressed row of anchors is displayed in the right part of the frame.
The verification procedure depends on "Setting" either based factors of safety or according
- 87 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
to the theory of limit states. The solution procedure is described herein.
Frame "I nternal stability"
External stability
Pressing the "External stability" button launches the "Slope stability" program. This
program then allows us to check the overall stability of the analyzed structure. The button is
available only if the program "Slope stability" is installed.
After completing all analyses press the "OK" button to leave the program all data are then
carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Sheeting verification" program.
- 88 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "External stability"
Envelopes
The frame "Envelopes" allows for displaying an envelope of internal forces and
displacements from all analyses (stages of constructions). By default the envelope is
constructed from the results from all construction stages. It can, however, be created only
from the selected stages (pressing buttons selects the constructions stages that are used to
generate the current envelope). The program makes possible to construct more envelopes
with various combinations.
The maximum internal forces and displacements are displayed in the right part of the frame.
Frame "Envelopes"
Program Slope Stability
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data and to specify the overall setting
of the analysis run. The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic
data about the analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc.
The "Proj ect" tab sheet also allows the user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial).
The "Analysis" tab sheet is used to specify whether the analysis is performed in total or
effective parameters.
- 89 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Project"
I nterface
The "I nterface" frame serves to introduce individual soil interfaces into the soil body.
Detailed description how to deal with interfaces id described herein.
Frame "I nterface"
Embankment
The "Embankment" frame allows for inputting interfaces to create an embankment above
the current terrain. The frame contains a table with a list of interfaces forming the
embankment. A table listing the points of currently selected interface of the embankment is
displayed in the mid section of the frame. Inputting an embankment interface follows the
same steps as used for standard interfaces.
An embankment cannot be specified in the first stage of construction. An embankment cannot
be built if there is an earth cut already specified in a given stage - in such a case either a new
stage of construction must be introduced for embankment input or the existing open cut must
be first removed.
- 90 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Embankment"
Earth cut
The "Earth cut" frame serves to specify the shape of an open cut. This function allows for
modifying the terrain profile within a given stage of construction. Several earth cuts can be
introduced at the same time. In such a case some of the lines in the cut appear partially
above the terrain.
A table listing individual interface points is displayed in the left part of the frame. Inputting
an earth cut interface follows the same steps as used for standard interfaces.
An open cut cannot be specified in the first stage of construction. An earth cut cannot be built
if there is an embankment already specified in a given stage - in such a case either a new
stage of construction must be introduced for earth cut input or the existing embankment
must be first removed.
- 91 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Earth cut"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of inputted soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding (editing) a soil is performed in the "Add (edit) soil" dialogue window.
The soil characteristics are specified in the program "Slope stability". These characteristics
are further specified in chapters:"Uplift pressure" and "Foliation". An input of parameters
further depends on the selected type of analysis (effective / total stress state), which is set in
the frame "Projekt", tab sheet "Analysis".
- 92 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Soils"
Rigid bodies
The "Rigid bodies" frame contains a table with a list of inputted rigid bodies. The rigid
bodies serve to model regions with a high stiffness e.g., sheeting structures or rock
subgrade. This table also provides information about the currently selected rigid body
displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding (editing) rigid bodies is performed in the "Add new rigid body" dialogue window.
This window serves to input the unit weight of the rigid body material and to select color and
pattern. The rigid bodies are in the frame "Assign" ordered after inputted soils.
Rigid bodies are introduced in the program as regions with high strength so they are not
intersected by a potential slip surface. Providing we wish the slip surface to cross a rigid
body (e.g., pile wall) it is recommended to model the rigid body as a soil with a cohesion
corresponding to pile bearing capacity against slip.
Frame "Rigid bodies"
Assign
The Assign frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
Procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in details herein.
- 93 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Assign"
Anchors
The "Anchors" frame contains a table with a list of inputted anchors. Adding (editing)
anchors is performed in the "New anchor ( Modify anchor parameters) " dialogue window.
The inputted anchors can be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
You are asked to input the anchor location (starting point), its length and inclination, anchor
spacing and pre-stress force. The anchor starting point is always attached to the terrain.
All inputted parameters can be modified in the stage of construction, in which the anchor was
introduced. In subsequent stages the program allows only for modifying the anchor pre-stress
force (option "Anchor post- stressing").
Anchors can also be introduced with help of a mouse click. Mouse input mode is determined
by pressing buttons on the horizontal bar "Anchor". The following modes are available:
- Add
clicking the left mouse button allows for specifying the starting and
end point of an anchor. The grid function can be exploited in the
input mode. The starting point is always "attached" to the terrain.
The coordinates of inputted points are automatically round up to
two digits both input modes (manual, mouse) are therefore
identical
- Modify
clicking the left mouse button on already existing anchor opens the
"Modify anchor property" dialogue window, where the selected
anchor can be modified
- Remove
clicking the left mouse button on an anchor opens the dialogue
window to confirm the reinforcement removal confirming this
action then removes the anchor
Effect of anchors on the analysis is described in more details in the theoretical part of the
hint.
Note: The program does not check the anchor bearing capacity against breakage.
- 94 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Anchors"
Reinforcements
The "Reinforcement" frame contains a table with a list of inputted reinforcements. Adding
(editing) reinforcement is performed in the "New reinforcement ( Modify interface
properties) " dialogoue window. The inputted reinforcements can be edited on the desktop
with the help of active objects.
Properties like reinforcement location, anchorage length from both left and right end and
reinforcement strength must be specified. All inputted parameters can be modified only in
the stage of construction, in which the reinforcement was introduced. In subsequent stages
the geo-reinforcement can only be removed.
Reinforcements can also be introduced with help of a mouse click. Mouse input mode is
determined by pressing buttons on the horizontal bar "Reinforcement". The following modes
are available:
- Add
clicking the left mouse button allows for specifying the starting
and end point of a reinforcement. A predefined grid can be used
in the input mode. The starting point is always "attached" to the
terrain. The coordinates of inputted points are automatically
round up to two digits both input modes (manual, mouse) are
therefore identical
- Modify
clicking the left mouse button on already existing reinforcement
opens the "Modify reinforcement property" dialogue window,
where the selected reinforcement can be modified
- Remove
clicking the left mouse button on reinforcement opens the
dialogue window to confirm the reinforcement removal
confirming this action then removes the reinforcement
Reinforcements can be introduced only in the horizontal direction.
Including reinforcements in the analysis is described in more details in the theoretical part of
the hint.
- 95 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Reinforcements"
Surcharge
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of inputted surcharges. Adding (editing)
surcharge is performed in the "New ( edit) surcharge" dialogue window. The inputted
surchages can be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects,
respectively.
All inputted parameters of a surcharge can be modified in the construction stage where the
surcharge was specified. Only the surcharge magnitude can be modified in all subsequent
construction stages (option "Adj ust surcharge").
Influence of surcharge on stability analysis of slopes is described in the theoretical part of the
hint.
- 96 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Surcharge"
Water
The "Water" frame serves to set the type of ground water table. Five options to specify the
type of water are available from the combo list.
Inputting the ground water table or isolines, respectively, is identical with the standard input
of interfaces.
A field for specifying a value of coefficient Ru or pore pressure appears next to the table if
introducing water using isolines of Ru- interfaces or pore pressure, respectively. Pressing
the button with a blue arrow next to the input field opens the "Coefficient Ru" or "Pore
pressure" dialogue window to enter the desired value. It is advantageous to input all values
at once using the "OK+ " and "OK+ ". The value of a given quantity found in a specific
point between two isolines is approximated by linear interpolation of values pertinent to
given isolines. The first (the most top one) always coincides with terrain it therefore
cannot be deleted.
The ground water table or table of suction, respectively, is specified as continuous
interfaces, which can be located even above the terrain.
If the inputted data in individual stages are different, the program then allows for accepting
the data from the previous stage of construction by pressing the "Accept" button.
The program further allows for specifying a depth of tensile cracks filled with water.
- 97 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Water"
Earthquake
The "Earthquake" frame serves to input earthquake parameters. Directions of inputted
earthquake effects are displayed on the desktop.
Slope stability analysis while accounting for earthquake is described in the theoretical part of
the hint in chapter "Influence earthquake".
Frame "Earthquake"
Setting
- 98 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The "Settings" frame contains basic settings to assess the slope stability. The program offers
pre-setting for different countries (Czech Republic, Germany, France,...) and "Standard
setting" recommended by the authors of the program for countries no included in the list.
While changing settings in the combo list the values of coefficients of reduction of soil
parameters in corresponding windows are changed. Changing settings in the combo list
modifies previously set values in corresponding windows.
An arbitrary analysis setting is available with the option "User setting".
Selecting the option "Safety factor" allows the user to specify in input field own value of the
factor of safety.
Selecting the option "Limit states" allows for specifying individual values of the coefficients of
reduction of soil parameters (e.g.,recommended values of coefficients according to EC7-1)
and coefficient of overall stability.
Frame "Settings"
Analysis
The "Analysis" frame displays the analysis results. Several analyses can be performed for a
single task.
The starting point in the slope stability analysis is the selection of the type of slip surface. The
input is available from a combo list in the left top part of the frame containing two options
circular slip surface and polygonal slip surface. After introducing the slip surface the
analysis is started using the "Analysis" button. The analysis results appear in the right part
of the frame.
The type of analysis is selected in the mid section of the frame the circular slip surface
allows two options the Bishop or Petterson method, the polygonal slip surface is analyzed
exploiting the Sarma method.
Based on the "Settig" in the frame the verification of the slope stability is performed using
either the factor of safety concept or the theory of limit states.
Checking the box "Optimize slip surface" allows for optimizing either the circular or
polygonal slip surface. This step also activates the "Constrains" button pressing this button
changes the frame appearance and makes possible to introduce constrains on optimization
procedure.
It is also possible to specify how to deal with anchors in the analysis (box "I nfinite anchor
lengths assumed").
The slip surface (even the optimized one) must be introduced in the frame several
possibilities are available:
- Circular slip surface
- 99 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
using mouse press the "I nput" button to active the input regime and then by
clicking the left mouse button enter three points to define a circular slip surface
(the introduced slip surface can be further modified using the "Modify" button or
specified again with the help of the "Replace" button
using the dialogue window pressing the "I nput" button in the "Circular slip
surface" frame opens the "Circular slip surface" dialogue window that allows for
specifying the radius and coordinates of center
- Polygonal slip surface
using mouse - press the "I nput" button to active the input regime entering the
surface points proceeds in the same steps as when specifying interfaces
using table pressing the button "I nput" actives several buttons that allow for
filling the adjacent table with the coordinates of slip surface points (buttons "Add",
"Modify", "Remove")
The analysis results appear in the left part of the frame and the optimized slip surface on the
desktop. Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue
window.
Frame "Analysis" - circular slip surface
- 100 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Analysis" - polygonal slip surface
Constrains on the optimization procedure
The "Analysis" frame allows (after pressing the "Constrains") for specifying constrains on
the optimization process.
Regardless of the assumed type of slip surface it is possible to introduce into the soil
body (with the help of mouse) segments, which should not be crossed by the optimized slip
surface. These segments also appear in the table in the left part of the frame.
Polygonal slip surface also allows for excluding some points from optimization, either
entirely or partially only in specified direction. "Keeping the point fixed" during
optimization process is achieved by checking the box in the table with corresponding point.
This input mode is quitted by pressing the red button "Return to analysis regime".
- 101 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Analysis" - constrains on slip surface optimization by segments
Height multiplier
Providing the analyzed slope is too long or has small height the plotted slip surface might not
be sufficiently visible. This problem can be solved by selected courser scale in the vertical
direction with the help of height multiplier. The value of this multiplier is set in the "Setting
visualization style" dialogue window, tab sheet "Global 2D". Using standard setting ("Height
multiplier" equal to one) plots undistorted structure proportional to its dimensions.
Only polygonal slip surface can be inputted graphically when exploiting the height multiplier
option. The circular slip surface must be in such a case inputted manually in the "Circular
slip surface" dialogue window using the "I nput" button.
Setting height multiplier
- 102 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Visualization of the resulting slip surface when using height multiplier
Program Cantilever Wall
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data and to specify the overall setting
of the analysis run. The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic
data about the analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc.
The "Proj ect" tab sheet also allows the user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial).
The "Proj ect" tab sheet further serves to specify a standard for concrete structures
dimensioning. Referring to the selected standard the types of concrete and steel are then
inputted in the "Material" frame. The dimensioning of cross-sections of the analyzed structure
is then performed in the "Dimensioning" frame. Only ACI standard is available when selecting
imperial units. While selecting standard it is also necessary to specify whether the stress in
the foundation joint used for verification of a wall front key is assumed uniform (CSN) or
trapezoidal (Eurocode).
The "Earth pressures" tab sheet serves to choose the basic theory or standards to be followed
in the solution of a given problem.
- 103 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Project"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame allows by pressing the button for selecting the wall shape. The
selected shape with a graphic hint "Wall geometry chart" appears in the left part of the
frame. The shape of a wall can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input
fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
In case the structure is composed of inclined segments it is required to enter the ratio of
sides of an inclined segment 1:x. The straight structure is specified by entering the value
zero.
Frame "Geometry"
Material
The "Material" frame allows for the selection of material parameters for concrete and
longitudinal steel reinforcements.
Two options are available when selecting the material type:
- 104 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- the "Catalogue" button opens the "Material catalogue" dialogue window (for
concrete or steel reinforcements), the list of materials then serves to select the
desired material
- the "User" button opens the "Edit material concrete" dialogue window (for
concrete) or the "Edit material concrete steel" dialogue window (for
longitudinal steel reinforcements), which allows for manual specification of
material parameters
The catalogues content depends on the selection of standard for the design of concrete
structures set in the "Project" frame. The input field in the upper part of the frame serves to
specify the wall unit weight.
Frame "Material"
Profile
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of inputted interfaces. After specifying
interfaces it is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active
dimensions.
Adding (editing) layer is performed in the "Add ( edit) interface" dialogue window. The
z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified.
The program allows for raising or lowering the top point of a structure in the "Change
terrain elevation" dialogue window so that the whole interface can be translated while
keeping the thicknesses of individual layers. This function is important when copying the
profile from program "Terrain".
- 105 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Profile"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of inputted soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding (editing) a soil is performed in the "Add (edit) soil" dialogue window.
The soil characteristics are specified in the program "Cantilever wall". These characteristics
are further specified in chapters: "Basic data", "Earth pressure at rest" and "Uplift pressure".
Frame "Soils"
- 106 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Assign
The "Assign" frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
Procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in details herein.
Frame "Assign"
Terrain
The "Terrain" frame allows, by pressing the button, for specifying the terrain shape. The
selected shape with graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the
left part of the frame. The terrain shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values
into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The last option to choose from is a general shape of a terrain. In this case the frame contains
a table with a list of terrain points. The first point with coordinates [0, 0] coincides with the
top point of a structure.
Analysis of earth pressures in case of inclined terrain is described in the theoretical part of the
hint, chapter "Distribution of earth pressures for broken terrain".
- 107 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Terrain"
Water
The "Water" allows, by pressing the button, for selecting the type of water. The selected type
together with a graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the left
part of the frame. Water parameters (h1, h2...) can be edited either in the frame by inserting
values into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The combo list serves to specify whether the influence of uplift pressure of water due to
different tables at the foundation joint is considered. The uplift pressure can be assumed to
be linear, parabolic or it may not be considered at all. When verifying the wall, the uplift
pressure in base of footing joint due to different water tables is introduced in terms of a
special force.
The last option is a manual input of pore pressure both in front and behind the structure. Two
tab sheets "I n front of structure" and "Behind structure" appear with tables. The table is
filled with values of pore pressure in front, or behind the structure at a depth of "z" (z-axis).
The ground water table can also be specified above the structure or earth profile,
respectively in such a case the depth of water is inputted with negative value.
Analysis of earth pressures with influence of water is described in the theoretical part of the
hint chapter "Influence of water".
The program further allows for specifying a depth of tensile cracks filled with water.
- 108 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of inputted surcharges. Adding (editing)
surcharge is performed in the "New ( edit) surcharge" dialogue window. The inputted
surchages can be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects,
respectively.
The z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified (positive direction
downwards) when inputting the surcharge at a certain depth. Providing the surcharge is
found off the terrain the computer prompts an error message.
Analysis of earth pressures due to surcharges is described in the theoretical part of the hint,
chapter "Influence of surcharge".
- 109 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Surcharge"
Front face resistance
The "Front face resistance" frame allows by pressing the button for specifying the terrain
shape and parameters of front face resistance. The selected shape with a graphic hint ("
Parameter chart") of inputted values are displayed in the left part of the frame. The terrain
shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the
desktop with the help of active dimensions.
Combo lists in the frame allows the user to select the type of resistance and a soil (the combo
list contains soils introduced in the regime "Soils"). The magnitude of terrain surcharge in
front of the wall or soil thickness above the wall lowest points can also be specified in the
frame.
The resistance on a structure front face can be specified as a pressure at rest, passive
pressure or reduced passive pressure. The resulting force due to reduced passive pressure
is found as a resultant force caused by passive pressure multiplied by a corresponding
coefficient, which follows from the inputted type of reduced passive pressure.
- 110 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Front face resistance"
I nputted forces
The "I nputted forces" frame contains a table with a list of forces acting on a structure.
Adding (editing) forces is performed in the "New force ( edit force) " dialogue window. The
inputted forces can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
Frame "I nputted forces"
- 111 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Earthquake
The "Earthquake" frame serves to input earthquake parameters. Directions of inputted
earthquake effects are displayed on the desktop.
Analysis of earth pressures while accounting for earthquake is described in the theoretical
part of the hint in chapter "Influence earthquake".
Frame "Earthquake"
Base anchorage
The frame "Base anchorage" serves to input parameters (anchorage geometry, bearing
capacity against pulling-out and pulling-apart) specifying an anchorage of the wall
foundation. Geometry of footing anchorage can be edited either in the frame by inserting
values in the inputting boxes or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions. The
bearing capacity values can be either inputted or computed by the program from the inputted
parameters.
- 112 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Base anchorage"
Setting
The "Setting" frame contains basic settings for the analysis of earth pressures. The program
offers pre-setting for different countries (Czech Republic, Germany, France,...) and "
Standard setting" recommended by the authors of the program for countries no included in
the list. While changing settings in the combo list the values of coefficients of reduction of soil
parameters in corresponding windows are changed.
Evaluating the structure according to theory of limit states also calls for the input of
coefficient of overall stability of a structure. When subjecting the wall to overall
verification this coefficient is used to multiply the resisting moment M
res
and the resisting
shear force H
res
.
An arbitrary analysis setting is available with the option "User setting". Selecting the option
"Reduce soil parameters" allows for specifying in input fields individual values of the
coefficients of reduction of soil parameters (e.g., recommended values according to EC7-1).
The "Other" tab sheet serves to specify the type of pressure acting on a wall based on the
allowable wall deformation. Providing the wall is free to move an active pressure is assumed,
otherwise, a pressure at rest is used.
For wall with footing jump it is possible to choose in the tab sheet "Other" the way of
accounting for the wall footing jump.
- 113 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Setting"
Verification
The "Verification" frame shows the analysis results. Several computation with different
coefficients of resultant force effects can be carried out for a single task.
The wall is loaded either by active pressure or pressure at rest depending on input in the
frame "Setting".
Procedure for wall verification is described in the theoretical part of the hint.
The computed forced are displayed on the desktop and are automatically updated with every
change of input data and setting. The right part of the frame shows the result of verification
of a wall against overturning and translation. The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue
window, which contains detailed listing of the results of verification analysis.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Verification"
Bearing capacity
- 114 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The "Bearing capacity" frame displays the results from the analysis of foundation soil
bearing capacity. The stress in the footing bottom (assumed constant) is derived from all
verifications performed in the frame "Verification". The program "Spread footing" then
considers all verifications as loading cases.
Three basic analysis options are available in the frame:
- I nput the foundation soil
bearing capacity
The input field serves to specify the foundation soil
bearing capacity. The results of verification analysis
of a soil for eccentricity and bearing capacity are
displayed in the right part of the frame. The "I n
detail" button opens the dialogue window that
displays detailed listing of the results of verification
analysis of foundation soil bearing capacity.
- Compute the foundation
soil bearing capacity
using the program
"Spread footing"
Pressing the "Run "Spread footing" button starts
the program "Spread footing" that allows for
computing the soil bearing capacity or settlement and
rotation of a footing. Pressing the "OK" button leaves
the analysis regime the results and all plots are
copied to the program "Cantilever wall". The
program "Spread footing" must be installed for the
button to be active.
- Do not compute ( pile
footing)
The foundation soil bearing capacity is not computed.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Bearing capacity"
Dimensioning
The "Dimensioning" frame serves to design and verify the reinforcement of wall
cross-section the cross-section subjected to dimensioning is selected in the combo list.
- Wall stem verification
- 115 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- Construction j oint
verification
depth of construction joint from construction top
edge is specified
- Wall j ump verification
type of assumed stress acting in construction joint for
verification (linear, constant) can be selected in the
frame "Project"
- Verification of heel of
wall
type of assumed stress acting in construction joint for
verification (linear, constant) can be selected in the
frame "Project"
Calculation of forces and their action on the analyzed cross-section is described here.
The wall stem and construction joint are always loaded by the pressure at rest. When
verifying the front wall jump the wall is loaded either by the active pressure or the pressure
at rest depending on input specified in the frame "Setting".
Procedure to derive distribution of internal forces in individual cross-sections is described in
the theoretical part of this hint.
Dimensioning of the steel-reinforced concrete structure is performed according to the
standard set in the frame "Project".
Several computations for various cross-sections can be carried out. Various design
coefficients of individual forces can also be specified. The resulting forces are displayed on the
desktop and are updated with an arbitrary change in data or setting specified in the frame.
The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue window that contains detailed listing of the
dimensioning results.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Dimensioning"
Stability
Pressing the "Stability" button launches the "Slope stability" program. This program then
allows us to check the overall stability of the analyzed structure. The button is available only
if the program "Slope stability" is installed.
After completing all analyses press the "OK" button to leave the program all data are then
- 116 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Cantilever wall" program.
Frame "Stability"
Program Masonry wall
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data and to specify the overall setting
of the analysis run. The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic
data about the analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc.
The "Proj ect" tab sheet also allows the user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial).
The "Proj ect" tab sheet further serves to specify a standard for concrete structures
dimensioning. Referring to the selected standard the types of concrete and steel are then
inputted in the "Materil" frame. The dimensioning of cross-sections of the analyzed structure
is then performed in the "Dimensioning" frame. Only ACI standard is available when selecting
imperial units. While selecting standard it is also necessary to specify whether the stress in
the foundation joint used for verification of a wall front key is assumed uniform (CSN) or
trapezoidal (Eurocode).
The "Earth pressures" tab sheet serves to choose the basic theory or standards to be followed
in the solution of a given problem.
- 117 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Project"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame allows by pressing the button for selecting the wall shape. The
selected shape with a graphic hint "Wall geometry chart" appears in the left part of the
frame. The shape of a wall can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input
fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
Based on the selected shape of a wall, you specify in the frame "Geometry of masonry" the
number and dimensions of masonry blocks in individual columns, or if applicable also the
thickness of vertical joint between blocks. In addition it is necessary to input compressive
strength of masonry, which serves as the basic input parameter for the bearing capacity
verification of reinforced masonry.

Frame "Geometry"
Material
The "Material" frame allows for the selection of material parameters for concrete and
longitudinal steel reinforcements.
- 118 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Two options are available when selecting the material type:
- the "Catalogue" button opens the "Material catalogue" dialogue window (for
concrete or steel reinforcements), the list of materials then serves to select the
desired material
- the "User" button opens the "Edit material concrete" dialogue window (for
concrete) or the "Edit material concrete steel" dialogue window (for
longitudinal steel reinforcements), which allows for manual specification of
material parameters
The catalogues content depends on the selection of standard for the design of concrete
structures set in the "Project" frame. The input field in the upper part of the frame serves to
specify the wall unit weight.
Frame "Material"
Profile
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of inputted interfaces. After specifying
interfaces it is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active
dimensions.
Adding (editing) layer is performed in the "Add ( edit) interface" dialogue window. The
z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified.
The program allows for raising or lowering the top point of a structure in the "Change
terrain elevation" dialogue window so that the whole interface can be translated while
keeping the thicknesses of individual layers. This function is important when copying the
profile from program "Terrain".
- 119 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Profile"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of inputted soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding (editing) a soil is performed in the "Add (edit) soil" dialogue window.
The soil characteristics are specified in the program "Cantilever wall". These characteristics
are further specified in chapters: "Basic data", "Earth pressure at rest" and "Uplift pressure".
Frame "Soils"
- 120 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Assign
The "Assign" frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
Procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in details herein.
Frame "Assign"
Terrain
The "Terrain" frame allows, by pressing the button, for specifying the terrain shape. The
selected shape with graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the
left part of the frame. The terrain shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values
into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The last option to choose from is a general shape of a terrain. In this case the frame contains
a table with a list of terrain points. The first point with coordinates [0, 0] coincides with the
top point of a structure.
Analysis of earth pressures in case of inclined terrain is described in the theoretical part of the
hint, chapter "Distribution of earth pressures for broken terrain".
- 121 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Terrain"
Water
The "Water" allows, by pressing the button, for selecting the type of water. The selected type
together with a graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the left
part of the frame. Water parameters (h1, h2...) can be edited either in the frame by inserting
values into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The combo list serves to specify whether the influence of uplift pressure of water due to
different tables at the foundation joint is considered. The uplift pressure can be assumed to
be linear, parabolic or it may not be considered at all. When verifying the wall, the uplift
pressure in base of footing joint due to different water tables is introduced in terms of a
special force.
The last option is a manual input of pore pressure both in front and behind the structure. Two
tab sheets "I n front of structure" and "Behind structure" appear with tables. The table is
filled with values of pore pressure in front, or behind the structure at a depth of "z" (z-axis).
The ground water table can also be specified above the structure or earth profile,
respectively in such a case the depth of water is inputted with negative value.
Analysis of earth pressures with influence of water is described in the theoretical part of the
hint chapter "Influence of water".
The program further allows for specifying a depth of tensile cracks filled with water.
- 122 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of inputted surcharges. Adding (editing)
surcharge is performed in the "New ( edit) surcharge" dialogue window. The inputted
surchages can be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects,
respectively.
The z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified (positive direction
downwards) when inputting the surcharge at a certain depth. Providing the surcharge is
found off the terrain the computer prompts an error message.
Analysis of earth pressures due to surcharges is described in the theoretical part of the hint,
chapter "Influence of surcharge".
- 123 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Surcharge"
Front face resistance
The "Front face resistance" frame allows by pressing the button for specifying the terrain
shape and parameters of front face resistance. The selected shape with a graphic hint ("
Parameter chart") of inputted values are displayed in the left part of the frame. The terrain
shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the
desktop with the help of active dimensions.
Combo lists in the frame allows the user to select the type of resistance and a soil (the combo
list contains soils introduced in the regime "Soils"). The magnitude of terrain surcharge in
front of the wall or soil thickness above the wall lowest points can also be specified in the
frame.
The resistance on a structure front face can be specified as a pressure at rest, passive
pressure or reduced passive pressure. The resulting force due to reduced passive pressure
is found as a resultant force caused by passive pressure multiplied by a corresponding
coefficient, which follows from the inputted type of reduced passive pressure.
- 124 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Front face resistance"
I nputted forces
The "I nputted forces" frame contains a table with a list of forces acting on a structure.
Adding (editing) forces is performed in the "New force ( edit force) " dialogue window. The
inputted forces can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
Frame "I nputted forces"
- 125 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Earthquake
The "Earthquake" frame serves to input earthquake parameters. Directions of inputted
earthquake effects are displayed on the desktop.
Analysis of earth pressures while accounting for earthquake is described in the theoretical
part of the hint in chapter "Influence earthquake".
Frame "Earthquake"
Base anchorage
The frame "Base anchorage" serves to input parameters (anchorage geometry, bearing
capacity against pulling-out and pulling-apart) specifying an anchorage of the wall
foundation. Geometry of footing anchorage can be edited either in the frame by inserting
values in the inputting boxes or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions. The
bearing capacity values can be either inputted or computed by the program from the inputted
parameters.
- 126 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Base anchorage"
Setting
The "Setting" frame contains basic settings for the analysis of earth pressures. The program
offers pre-setting for different countries (Czech Republic, Germany, France,...) and "
Standard setting" recommended by the authors of the program for countries no included in
the list. While changing settings in the combo list the values of coefficients of reduction of soil
parameters in corresponding windows are changed.
Evaluating the structure according to theory of limit states also calls for the input of
coefficient of overall stability of a structure. When subjecting the wall to overall
verification this coefficient is used to multiply the resisting moment M
res
and the resisting
shear force H
res
.
An arbitrary analysis setting is available with the option "User setting". Selecting the option
"Reduce soil parameters" allows for specifying in input fields individual values of the
coefficients of reduction of soil parameters (e.g., recommended values according to EC7-1).
The "Other" tab sheet serves to specify the type of pressure acting on a wall based on the
allowable wall deformation. Providing the wall is free to move an active pressure is assumed,
otherwise, a pressure at rest is used.
For wall with footing jump it is possible to choose in the tab sheet "Other" the way of
accounting for the wall footing jump.
- 127 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Setting"
Verification
The "Verification" frame shows the analysis results. Several computation with different
coefficients of resultant force effects can be carried out for a single task.
The wall is loaded either by active pressure or pressure at rest depending on input in the
frame "Setting".
Procedure for wall verification is described in the theoretical part of the hint.
The computed forced are displayed on the desktop and are automatically updated with every
change of input data and setting. The right part of the frame shows the result of verification
of a wall against overturning and translation. The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue
window, which contains detailed listing of the results of verification analysis.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Verification"
Bearing capacity
- 128 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The "Bearing capacity" frame displays the results from the analysis of foundation soil
bearing capacity. The stress in the footing bottom (assumed constant) is derived from all
verifications performed in the frame "Verification". The program "Spread footing" then
considers all verifications as loading cases.
Three basic analysis options are available in the frame:
- I nput the foundation soil
bearing capacity
The input field serves to specify the foundation soil
bearing capacity. The results of verification analysis
of a soil for eccentricity and bearing capacity are
displayed in the right part of the frame. The "I n
detail" button opens the dialogue window that
displays detailed listing of the results of verification
analysis of foundation soil bearing capacity.
- Compute the foundation
soil bearing capacity
using the program
"Spread footing"
Pressing the "Run "Spread footing" button starts
the program "Spread footing" that allows for
computing the soil bearing capacity or settlement and
rotation of a footing. Pressing the "OK" button leaves
the analysis regime the results and all plots are
copied to the program "Cantilever wall". The
program "Spread footing" must be installed for the
button to be active.
- Do not compute ( pile
footing)
The foundation soil bearing capacity is not computed.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Bearing capacity"
Dimensioning
The "Dimensioning" frame serves to design and verify the reinforcement of wall
cross-section the cross-section subjected to dimensioning is selected in the combo list.
- Construction j oint
verification
the number of a joint between masonry blocks is
inputted
- 129 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- Wall j ump verification
type of assumed stress acting in construction joint for
verification (linear, constant) can be selected in the
frame "Project"
- Verification of heel of
wall
type of assumed stress acting in construction joint for
verification (linear, constant) can be selected in the
frame "Project"
Calculation of forces and their action on the analyzed cross-section is described here.
The wall is loaded either by the active earth pressure or by the pressure at rest depending on
the setting in the frame "Setting".
Procedure to derive distribution of internal forces in individual cross-sections is described in
the theoretical part of this hint.
Joints between masonry blocks are verified according to AS 3700 "Masonry structures"
standard. The program verifies the bearing capacity for bending, shear and combination of
compression and bending. Reinforcement can be specified on both front and back sides of a
structure. An additional loading applied to a cross-section (bending moment, compressive
normal force and shear force) can also be specified. These additional forces are added to the
computed ones.
Dimensioning of steel-reiforced concrete structure is performed according to the standard set
in the frame "Project".
Several computations for various cross-sections can be carried out. Various design
coefficients of individual forces can also be specified. The resulting forces are displayed on the
desktop and are updated with an arbitrary change in data or setting specified in the frame.
The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue window that contains detailed listing of the
dimensioning results.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Dimensioning"
Stability
Pressing the "Stability" button launches the "Slope stability" program. This program then
allows us to check the overall stability of the analyzed structure. The button is available only
- 130 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
if the program "Slope stability" is installed.
After completing all analyses press the "OK" button to leave the program all data are then
carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Masonry wall" program.
| Frame "Stability"
Program Gravity Wall
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data and to specify the overall setting
of the analysis run. The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic
data about the analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc.
The Proj ect tab sheet also allows the user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial).
The "Proj ect" tab sheet further serves to specify a standard fornormy se concrete structures
dimensioning. Referring to the selected standard the types of concrete and steel are then
inputted in the "Material" frame. The dimensioning of cross-sections of the analyzed structure
is then performed in the "Dimensioning" frame. Only ACI standard is available when selecting
imperial units. While selecting standard it is also necessary to specify whether the stress in
the foundation joint used for verification of a wall front key is assumed uniform (SN) or
trapezoidal (Eurocode).
The "Earth pressures" tab sheet serves to choose the basic theory or standards to be followed
in the solution of a given problem.
- 131 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame Project - tab sheet "Project"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame allows by pressing the button for selecting the wall shape. The
selected shape with a graphic hint ("Wall geometry chart") appears in the left part of the
frame. The shape of a wall can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input
fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
In case the structure is composed of inclined segments it is required to enter the ratio of
sides of an inclined segment 1:x. The straight structure is specified by entering the value
zero.
Frame "Geometry"
Material
The "Material" frame allows for the selection of material parameters for concrete and
longitudinal steel reinforcements.
Two options are available when selecting the material type:
- 132 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- the "Catalogue" button opens the "Material catalogue" dialogue window (for
concrete or steel reinforcements), the list of materials then serves to select the
desired material
- the "User" button opens the "Edit material concrete" dialogue window (for
concrete) or the "Edit material concrete steel" dialogue window (for
longitudinal steel reinforcements), which allows for manual specification of
material parameters
The catalogues content depends on the selection of standard for the design of concrete
structures set in the "Project" frame. The input field in the upper part of the frame serves to
specify the wall bulk weight.
Frame "Material"
Profile
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of inputted interfaces. After specifying
interfaces it is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active
dimensions.
Adding (editing) layer is performed in the "Add ( edit) interface" dialogue window. The
z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified.
The program allows for raising or lowering the top point of a structure in the "Change
terrain elevation" dialogue window so that the whole interface can be translated while
keeping the thicknesses of individual layers. This function is important when copying the
profile from program "Terrain".
- 133 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The frame "Profile"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of inputted soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding (editing) a soil is performed in the "Add (edit) soil" dialogue window.
The soil characteristics are specified in the program "Gravity wall". These characteristics are
further specified in chapters: "Basic data", "Earth pressure at rest" and "Uplift pressure".
Frame "Soils"
- 134 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Assign
The Assign frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
Procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in details herein.
Frame "Assign"
Terrain
The "Terrain" frame allows, by pressing the button, for specifying the terrain shape. The
selected shape with graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the
left part of the frame. The terrain shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values
into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The last option to choose from is a general shape of a terrain. In this case the frame contains
a table with a list of terrain points. The first point with coordinates [0, 0] coincides with the
top point of a structure.
Analysis of earth pressures in case of inclined terrain is described in the theoretical part of the
hint, chapter "Distribution of earth pressures for broken terrain".
- 135 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Terrain"
Water
The "Water" allows, by pressing the button, for selecting the type of water. The selected type
together with a graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the left
part of the frame. Water parameters (h1, h2...) can be edited either in the frame by inserting
values into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The combo list serves to specify whether the influence of uplift pressure of water due to
different tables at the foundation joint is considered. The uplift pressure can be assumed to
be linear, parabolic or it may not be considered at all. When verifying the wall, the uplift
pressure in foundation joint due to different water tables is introduced in terms of a special
force.
The last option is a manual input of pore pressure both in front and behind the structure. Two
tab sheets "I n front of structure" and "Behind structure" appear with tables. The table is
filled with values of pore pressure in front, or behind the structure at a depth of "z" (z-axis).
The ground water table can also be specified above the structure or earth profile,
respectively in such a case the depth of water is inputted with negative value.
Analysis of earth pressures with influence of water is described in the theoretical part of the
hint chapter "Influence of water".
The program further allows for specifying a depth of tensile cracks filled with water.
- 136 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of inputted surcharges. Adding (editing)
surcharge is performed in the "New ( edit) surcharge" dialogue window. The inputted
surchages can be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects,
respectively.
The z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified (positive direction
downwards) when inputting the surcharge at a certain depth. Providing the surcharge is
found off the terrain the computer prompts an error message.
Analysis of earth pressures due to surcharges is described in the theoretical part of the hint,
chapter "Influence of surcharge".
- 137 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Surcharge"
Front face resistance
The "Front face resistance" frame allows by pressing the button for specifying theterrain
shape and parameters of front face resistance. The selected shape with a graphic hint ("
Parameter chart") of inputted values are displayed in the left part of the frame. The terrain
shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the
desktop with the help of active dimensions.
Combo lists in the frame allows the user to select the type of resistance and a soil (the combo
list contains soils introduced in the regime "Soils"). The magnitude of terrain surcharge in
front of the wall or soil thickness above the wall lowest points can also be specified in the
frame.
The resistance on a structure front face can be specified as a pressure at rest, passive
pressure or reduced passive pressure. The resulting force due to reduced passive pressure
is found as a resultant force caused by passive pressure multiplied by a corresponding
coefficient, which follows from the inputted type of reduced passive pressure.
- 138 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Front face resistance"
I nputted forces
The "I nputted forces" frame contains a table with a list of forces acting on a structure.
Adding (editing) forces is performed in the "New force ( edit force) " dialogue window. The
inputted forces can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
Frame "I nputted forces"
- 139 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Earthquake
The "Earthquake" frame serves to input earthquake parameters. Directions of inputted
earthquake effects are displayed on the desktop.
Analysis of earth pressures while accounting for earthquake is described in the theoretical
part of the hint in chapter "Influence earthquake".
Frame "Earthquake"
Setting
The "Setting" frame contains basic settings for the analysis of earth pressures. The program
offers pre-setting for different countries (Czech Republic, Germany, France,...) and "
Standard setting" recommended by the authors of the program for countries no included in
the list. While changing settings in the combo list the values of coefficients of reduction of soil
parameters in corresponding windows are changed.
Evaluating the structure according to theory of limit states also calls for the input of
coefficient of overall stability of a structure. When subjecting the wall to overall
verification this coefficient is used to multiply the resisting moment M
res
and the resisting
shear force H
res
.
An arbitrary analysis setting is available with the option "User setting". Selecting the option
"Reduce soil parameters" allows for specifying in input fields individual values of the
coefficients of reduction of soil parameters (e.g., recommended values according to EC7).
- 140 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Setting"
Verification
The "Verification" frame shows the analysis results. Several computation with different
coefficients of resultant force effects can be carried out for a single task.
Procedure for wall verification is described in the theoretical part of the hint.
The computed forced are displayed on the desktop and are automatically updated with every
change of input data and setting. The right part of the frame shows the result of verification
of a wall against overturning and translation. The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue
window, which contains detailed listing of the results of verification analysis.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Verification"
Bearing capacity
The "Bearing capacity" frame displays the results from the analysis of foundation soil
bearing capacity. The stress in the footing bottom (assumed constant) is derived from all
- 141 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
verifications performed in the frame "Verification". The program "Spread footing" then
considers all verifications as loading cases.
Three basic analysis options are available in the frame:
- I nput the foundation soil
bearing capacity
The input field serves to specify the foundation soil
bearing capacity. The results of verification analysis
of a soil for eccentricity and bearing capacity are
displayed in the right part of the frame. The "I n
detail" button opens the dialogue window that
displays detailed listing of the results of verification
analysis of foundation soil bearing capacity.
- Compute the foundation
soil bearing capacity
using the program
"Spread footing"
Pressing the "Run "Spread footing" button starts
the program "Spread footing" that allows for
computing the soil bearing capacity or settlement and
rotation of a footing. Pressing the "OK" button leaves
the analysis regime the results and all plots are
copied to the program "Gravity wall". The program "
Spread footing" must be installed for the button to
be active.
- Do not compute ( pile
footing)
The foundation soil bearing capacity is not computed.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Bearing capacity"
Dimensioning
The "Dimensioning" frame serves to design and verify the reinforcement of wall
cross-section the cross-section subjected to dimensioning is selected in the combo list.
- Wall stem verification
- Construction j oint
verification
depth of construction joint from construction top
edge is specifiedse
- 142 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- Wall j ump verification
type of assumed stress acting in construction joint for
verification (linear, constant) can be selected in the
frame "Project"
Calculation of forces and their action on the analyzed cross-section is described here.
The wall stem and construction joint are always loaded by the pressure at rest. When
verifying the front wall jump the wall is loaded either by the active pressure or the pressure
at rest depending on input specified in the frame "Setting".
Procedure to derive distribution of internal forces in individual cross-sections is described in
the theoretical part of this hint.
Dimensioning of the steel-reinforced concrete structure is performed according to the
standard set in the frame "Project".
Several computations for various cross-sections can be carried out. Various design
coefficients of individual forces can also be specified. The resulting forces are displayed on the
desktop and are updated with an arbitrary change in data or setting specified in the frame.
The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue window that contains detailed listing of the
dimensioning results.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Dimensioning"
Stability
Pressing the "Stability" button launches the "Slope stability" program. This program then
allows us to check the overall stability of the analyzed structure. The button is available only
if the program "Slope stability" is installed.
After completing all analyses press the "OK" button to leave the program all data are then
carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Gravity wall" program.
- 143 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Stability"
Program Block wall
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data and to specify the overall setting
of the analysis run. The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic
data about the analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc.
The "Proj ect" tab sheet also allows the user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial).
The "Earth pressures" tab sheet serves to choose the basic theory or standards to be followed
in the solution of a given problem.
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Project"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame contains a table with a list of inputted structural precast units
- 144 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
(blocks) of a wall (the lowest block is labeled as No. 1). Adding (editing) blocks is performed
in the "New block ( Edit block) " dialogue window.
This dialogue window serves to define the geometry of a block, parameters of
reinforcement (overhang length, anchorage length, bearing capacity against pull out,
reinforcement strength) and material characteristics (self weight, shear resistance between
two blocks, cohesion).
The program allows for adding (inserting) another block in between two already existing
blocks of a structure. Inserting a new block is performed in the "I nsert block" dialog window
that complies with the "New block" dialogue window. The inserted block is ordered such to
proceed the currently selected block of a structure.
The inputted blocks can be further edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions
or active objects - double clicking on a structure opens a dialog window with a given block.
When using the regime of active obj ects the visualization of detailed dimensions
must be turned off in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Geometry"
Profile
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of inputted interfaces. After specifying
interfaces it is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active
dimensions.
Adding (editing) layer is performed in the "Add ( edit) interface" dialogue window. The
z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified.
The program allows for raising or lowering the top point of a structure in the "Change
terrain elevation" dialogue window so that the whole interface can be translated while
keeping the thicknesses of individual layers. This function is important when copying the
profile from program "Terrain".
- 145 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Profile"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of inputted soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding (editing) a soil is performed in the "Add (edit) soil" dialogue window.
The soil characteristics are specified in the program "Block wall". These characteristics are
further specified in chapters: "Basic data", "Earth pressure at rest" and "Uplift pressure".
Frame "Soils"
- 146 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Assign
The "Assign" frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
Procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in details herein.
Frame "Assign"
Terrain
The "Terrain" frame allows, by pressing the button, for specifying the terrain shape. The
selected shape with graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the
left part of the frame. The terrain shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values
into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The last option to choose from is a general shape of a terrain. In this case the frame contains
a table with a list of terrain points. The first point with coordinates [0, 0] coincides with the
top point of a structure.
Analysis of earth pressures in case of inclined terrain is described in the theoretical part of the
hint, chapter "Distribution of earth pressures for broken terrain".
- 147 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Terrain"
Water
The "Water" frame allows, by pressing the button, for selecting the type of water. The
selected type together with a graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is
displayed in the left part of the frame. Water parameters h
1
, h
2
can be edited either in the
frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active
dimensions.
The combo list serves to specify whether the influence of uplift pressure of water due to
different tables at the foundation joint is considered. The uplift pressure can be assumed to
be linear, parabolic or it may not be considered at all. When verifying the wall, the uplift
pressure in foundation joint due to different water tables is introduced in terms of a special
force.
The last option is a manual input of pore pressure both in front and behind the structure. Two
tab sheets "I n front of structure" and "Behind structure" appear with tables. The table is
filled with values of pore pressure in front, or behind the structure at a depth of "z" (z-axis).
The ground water table can also be specified above the structure or earth profile,
respectively in such a case the depth of water is inputted with negative value.
Analysis of earth pressures with influence of water is described in the theoretical part of the
hint chapter "Influence of water".
The program further allows for specifying a depth of tensile cracks filled with water.
- 148 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of inputted surcharges. Adding (editing)
surcharge is performed in the "New ( edit) surcharge" dialogue window. The inputted
surchages can be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects,
respectively.
The z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified (positive direction
downwards) when inputting the surcharge at a certain depth. Providing the surcharge is
found off the terrain the computer prompts an error message.
Analysis of earth pressures due to surcharges is described in the theoretical part of the hint,
chapter "Influence of surcharge".
- 149 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Surcharge"
Front face resistance
The "Front face resistance" frame allows by pressing the button for specifying the terrain
shape and parameters of front face resistance. The selected shape with a graphic hint ("
Parameter chart") of inputted values are displayed in the left part of the frame. The terrain
shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the
desktop with the help of active dimensions.
Combo lists in the frame allows the user to select the type of resistance and a soil (the combo
list contains soils introduced in the regime "Soils"). The magnitude of terrain surcharge in
front of the wall or soil thickness above the wall lowest points can also be specified in the
frame.
The resistance on a structure front face can be specified as a pressure at rest, passive
pressure or reduced passive pressure. The resulting force due to reduced passive pressure
is found as a resultant force caused by passive pressure multiplied by a corresponding
coefficient, which follows from the inputted type of reduced passive pressure.
- 150 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Front face resistance"
I nputted forces
The "I nputted forces" frame contains a table with a list of forces acting on a structure.
Adding (editing) forces is performed in the "New force ( edit force) " dialogue window. The
inputted forces can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
Frame "I nputted forces"
- 151 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Earthquake
The "Earthquake" frame serves to input earthquake parameters. Directions of inputted
earthquake effects are displayed on the desktop.
Analysis of earth pressures while accounting for earthquake is described in the theoretical
part of the hint in chapter "Influence earthquake".
Frame "Earthquake"
Setting
The "Setting" frame contains basic settings for the analysis of earth pressures. The program
offers pre-setting for different countries (Czech Republic, Germany, France,...) and "
Standard setting" recommended by the authors of the program for countries no included in
the list. While changing settings in the combo list the values of coefficients of reduction of soil
parameters in corresponding windows are changed.
Evaluating the structure according to theory of limit states also calls for the input of
coefficient of overall stability of a structure. When subjecting the wall to overall
verification this coefficient is used to multiply the resisting moment M
res
and the resisting
shear force H
res
.
An arbitrary analysis setting is available with the option "User setting". Selecting the option
"Reduce soil parameters" allows for specifying in input fields individual values of the
coefficients of reduction of soil parameters (e.g., recommended values according to EC7-1).
- 152 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Setting"
Verification
The "Verification" frame shows the analysis results. Several computation with different
coefficients of resultant force effects can be carried out for a single task.
Procedure for wall verification is described in the theoretical part of the hint.
The computed forced are displayed on the desktop and are automatically updated with every
change of input data and setting. The right part of the frame shows the result of verification
of a wall against overturning and translation. The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue
window, which contains detailed listing of the results of verification analysis.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Verification"
Bearing capacity
The "Bearing capacity" frame displays the results from the analysis of foundation soil
bearing capacity. The stress in the footing bottom (assumed constant) is derived from all
- 153 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
verifications performed in the frame "Verification". The program "Spread footing" then
considers all verifications as loading cases.
Three basic analysis options are available in the frame:
- I nput the foundation soil
bearing capacity
The input field serves to specify the foundation soil
bearing capacity. The results of verification analysis
of a soil for eccentricity and bearing capacity are
displayed in the right part of the frame. The "I n
detail" button opens the dialogue window that
displays detailed listing of the results of verification
analysis of foundation soil bearing capacity.
- Compute the foundation
soil bearing capacity
using the program
"Spread footing"
Pressing the "Run "Spread footing" button starts
the program "Spread footing" that allows for
computing the soil bearing capacity or settlement and
rotation of a footing. Pressing the "OK" button leaves
the analysis regime the results and all plots are
copied to the program "Block wall". The program "
Spread footing" must be installed for the button to
be active.
- Do not compute ( pile
footing)
The foundation soil bearing capacity is not computed.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Bearing capacity"
Dimensioning
The "Dimensioning" frame allows for verifying joints between individual blocks of a wall. The
"J oint above block No." field serves to select the desired joint subjected to verification
analysis. The verification against overturning and translation is performed in the same way
as for the entire wall friction between blocks and cohesion of a block material are inputted
in the frame "Geometry".
Several computations for various cross-sections can be carried out. Various design
coefficients of individual forces can also be specified. The resulting forces are displayed on the
- 154 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
desktop and are updated with an arbitrary change in data or setting specified in the frame.
The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue window that contains detailed listing of the
dimensioning results.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Dimensioning"
Stability
Pressing the "Stability" button launches the "Slope stability" program. This program then
allows us to check the overall stability of the analyzed structure. The button is available only
if the program "Slope stability" is installed.
After completing all analyses press the "OK" button to leave the program all data are then
carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Block wall" program.
- 155 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Stability"
Program RediRock Wall
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data and to specify the overall setting
of the analysis run. The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic
data about the analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc.
The "Proj ect" tab sheet also allows the user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial).
The "Earth pressures" tab sheet serves to choose the basic theory or standards to be followed
in the solution of a given problem.
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Project"
- 156 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Earth pressure"
Blocks
The "Blocks" frame is used to input the parameters of blocks. This function is available only
to the manufacturer. Editing and adding new types blocks in the freeware version is not
allowed.
Frame "Blocks"
Setbacks
The "Setbacks" frame is used to input the allowable setbacks. This function is available only
to the manufacturer. Editing and adding new distances of jumps of blocks in the freeware
version is not allowed.
- 157 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Setbacks"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame contains a table with a list of inputted structural precast units
(blocks) of a wall (the lowest block is labeled as No. 1). Adding (editing) blocks is performed
in the "New block ( Edit block) " dialogue window.
An group of blocks that is defined by a number of blocks and jumps between them is entered
at once.
The program allows for adding (inserting) another group in between two already existing
blocks of a structure. Inserting a new group is performed in the "I nsert" dialog window that
complies with the "Add" dialogue window. The inserted block is ordered such to proceed the
currently selected block of a structure.
- 158 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Geometry"
Footing
The "Footing" frame is used to input the footing below the foundation. The footing
dimensions and its material parameters are required. A soil footing requires the user to
introduce the footing bearing capacity, a concrete footing then requires its shear bearing
capacity and friction between a concrete footing and the first block.
The bearing pad is accounted for as specified by the user. A restriction according to Fig.
4- 4, page 73 of NCMA manual is neither automatically enforced nor checked by the
program. The bearing pad must be introduced into the program such that it complies with
the design criteria.
- 159 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Footing"
Profile
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of inputted interfaces. After specifying
interfaces it is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active
dimensions.
Adding (editing) layer is performed in the "Add ( edit) interface" dialogue window. The
z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified.
The program allows for raising or lowering the top point of a structure in the "Change
terrain elevation" dialogue window so that the whole interface can be translated while
keeping the thicknesses of individual layers. This function is important when copying the
profile from program "Terrain".
- 160 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Profile"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of inputted soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding (editing) a soil is performed in the "Add (edit) soil" dialogue window.
The soil characteristics are specified in the program "Redi-rock wall". These characteristics
are further specified in chapters: "Basic data", "Earth pressure at rest" and "Uplift pressure".
Frame "Soils"
- 161 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Assign
The "Assign" frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
Procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in details herein.
Frame "Assign"
Terrain
The "Terrain" frame allows, by pressing the button, for specifying the terrain shape. The
selected shape with graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the
left part of the frame. The terrain shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values
into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The last option to choose from is a general shape of a terrain. In this case the frame contains
a table with a list of terrain points. The first point with coordinates [0, 0] coincides with the
top point of a structure.
Analysis of earth pressures in case of inclined terrain is described in the theoretical part of the
hint, chapter "Distribution of earth pressures for broken terrain".
- 162 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Terrain"
Water
The "Water" frame allows, by pressing the button, for selecting the type of water. The
selected type together with a graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is
displayed in the left part of the frame. Water parameters h
1
, h
2
can be edited either in the
frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active
dimensions.
The combo list serves to specify whether the influence of uplift pressure of water due to
different tables at the foundation joint is considered. The uplift pressure can be assumed to
be linear, parabolic or it may not be considered at all. When verifying the wall, the uplift
pressure in foundation joint due to different water tables is introduced in terms of a special
force.
The last option is a manual input of pore pressure both in front and behind the structure. Two
tab sheets "I n front of structure" and "Behind structure" appear with tables. The table is
filled with values of pore pressure in front, or behind the structure at a depth of "z" (z-axis).
The ground water table can also be specified above the structure or earth profile,
respectively in such a case the depth of water is inputted with negative value.
Analysis of earth pressures with influence of water is described in the theoretical part of the
hint chapter "Influence of water".
The program further allows for specifying a depth of tensile cracks filled with water.
- 163 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Surcharge
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of inputted surcharges. Adding (editing)
surcharge is performed in the "New ( edit) surcharge" dialogue window. The inputted
surchages can be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects,
respectively.
The z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified (positive direction
downwards) when inputting the surcharge at a certain depth. Providing the surcharge is
found off the terrain the computer prompts an error message.
Analysis of earth pressures due to surcharges is described in the theoretical part of the hint,
chapter "Influence of surcharge".
- 164 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Surcharge"
Front face resistance
The "Front face resistance" frame allows by pressing the button for specifying the terrain
shape and parameters of front face resistance. The selected shape with a graphic hint ("
Parameter chart") of inputted values are displayed in the left part of the frame. The terrain
shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the
desktop with the help of active dimensions.
Combo lists in the frame allows the user to select the type of resistance and a soil (the combo
list contains soils introduced in the regime "Soils"). The magnitude of terrain surcharge in
front of the wall or soil thickness above the wall lowest points can also be specified in the
frame.
The resistance on a structure front face can be specified as a pressure at rest, passive
pressure or reduced passive pressure. The resulting force due to reduced passive pressure
is found as a resultant force caused by passive pressure multiplied by a corresponding
coefficient, which follows from the inputted type of reduced passive pressure.
- 165 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Front face resistance"
I nputted forces
The "I nputted forces" frame contains a table with a list of forces acting on a structure.
Adding (editing) forces is performed in the "New force ( edit force) " dialogue window. The
inputted forces can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
Frame "I nputted forces"
Earthquake
- 166 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The "Earthquake" frame serves to input earthquake parameters. Directions of inputted
earthquake effects are displayed on the desktop.
Analysis of earth pressures while accounting for earthquake is described in the theoretical
part of the hint in chapter "Influence earthquake".
Frame "Earthquake"
Setting
The "Setting" frame contains basic settings for the analysis of earth pressures. The program
offers pre-setting for different countries (USA, Czech Republic, Germany, France,...) and "
Standard setting" recommended by the authors of the program for countries no included in
the list. While changing settings in the combo list the values of coefficients of reduction of soil
parameters in corresponding windows are changed.
The tab sheet "Others" serves to specify the parameters for the Redi-Rock wall program.
The check button "Hinge height concept" determines, whether the HInge height concept
defined in the second addition of the NCMA manual will be used. Furthermore, the masonry
friction reduction factors, which reduce the bearing capacity of the joint between the soil and
concrete, are defined. Concrete-concrete or soil-soil joints do not account for the MRF in the
program.
Evaluating the structure according to theory of limit states also calls for the input of
coefficient of overall stability of a structure. When subjecting the wall to overall
verification this coefficient is used to multiply the resisting moment M
res
and the resisting
shear force H
res
.
An arbitrary analysis setting is available with the option "User setting". Selecting the option
"Reduce soil parameters" allows for specifying in input fields individual values of the
coefficients of reduction of soil parameters (e.g., recommended values according to EC7-1).
- 167 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Setting" - tab sheet "Wall check"
Frame "Setting" - tab sheet "Other"
Verification
The "Verification" frame shows the analysis results. Several computation with different
coefficients of resultant force effects can be carried out for a single task.
Procedure for wall verification is described in the theoretical part of the hint.
The computed forced are displayed on the desktop and are automatically updated with every
change of input data and setting. The right part of the frame shows the result of verification
of a wall against overturning and translation. The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue
window, which contains detailed listing of the results of verification analysis.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
To better understand the solution procedure it is possible to go through the sample hand
calculation.
Frame "Verification"
- 168 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Bearing capacity
The "Bearing capacity" frame displays the results from the analysis of foundation soil
bearing capacity. The stress in the footing bottom (assumed constant) is derived from all
verifications performed in the frame "Verification". The program "Spread footing" then
considers all verifications as loading cases.
The bearing pad is accounted for as specified by the user. A restriction according to Fig.
4- 4, page 73 of NCMA manual is neither automatically enforced nor checked by the
program. The bearing pad must be introduced into the program such that it complies with
the design criteria.
Three basic analysis options are available in the frame:
- I nput the foundation soil
bearing capacity
The input field serves to specify the foundation soil
bearing capacity. The results of verification analysis
of a soil for eccentricity and bearing capacity are
displayed in the right part of the frame. The "I n
detail" button opens the dialogue window that
displays detailed listing of the results of verification
analysis of foundation soil bearing capacity.
- Compute the foundation
soil bearing capacity
using the program
"Spread footing"
Pressing the "Run "Spread footing" button starts
the program "Spread footing" that allows for
computing the soil bearing capacity or settlement and
rotation of a footing. Pressing the "OK" button leaves
the analysis regime the results and all plots are
copied to the program "Block wall". The program "
Spread footing" must be installed for the button to
be active.
- Do not compute ( pile
footing)
The foundation soil bearing capacity is not computed.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Bearing capacity"
- 169 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dimensioning
The "Dimensioning" frame allows for verifying joints between individual blocks of a wall. The
"J oint above block No." field serves to select the desired joint subjected to verification
analysis. The verification against overturning and translation is performed in the same way
as for the entire wall friction between blocks and cohesion of a block material are inputted
in the frame "Geometry".
Several computations for various cross-sections can be carried out. Various design
coefficients of individual forces can also be specified. The resulting forces are displayed on the
desktop and are updated with an arbitrary change in data or setting specified in the frame.
The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue window that contains detailed listing of the
dimensioning results.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Dimensioning"
Stability
Pressing the "Stability" button launches the "Slope stability" program. This program then
allows us to check the overall stability of the analyzed structure. The button is available only
if the program "Slope stability" is installed.
After completing all analyses press the "OK" button to leave the program all data are then
carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Block wall" program.
- 170 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Stability"
Program Gabion
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data and to specify the overall setting
of the analysis run. The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic
data about the analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc.
The "Proj ect" tab sheet also allows the user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial).
The "Earth pressures" tab sheet serves to choose the basic theory or standards to be followed
in the solution of a given problem.
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Project"
Material
The "Material" frame contains a table with a list of inputted filling (aggregates) and material
- 171 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
parameters of applied gabion wire netting. Adding (Editing) material and netting is performed
in the "New material ( Edit material) " dialogue window.
The material parameters of filling and netting of currently selected gabion block are displayed
in the right part of the frame.
Frame "Material"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame contains a table with a list of inputted blocks of a wall (the lowest
block is labeled as No. 1). Adding (editing) blocks is performed in the "New block ( Edit
block) " dialogue window.
This dialogue window serves to define the geometry of a block, and parameters of mesh
overhang (overhang length, overhang anchorage, bearing capacity against pull out).
The program allows for adding (inserting) another block in between two already existing
blocks of a structure. Inserting a new block is performed in the "I nsert block" dialog window
that complies with the "New block" dialogue window. The inserted block is ordered such to
proceed the currently selected block of a structure.
The inputted blocks can be can be further edited on the desktop with the help of active
dimensions or active objects - double clicking on a structure opens a dialog window with a
given block. When using the regime of active obj ects the visualization of detailed
dimensions must be turned off in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
- 172 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Geometry"
Profile
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of inputted interfaces. After specifying
interfaces it is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active
dimensions.
Adding (editing) layer is performed in the "Add ( edit) interface" dialogue window. The
z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified.
The program allows for raising or lowering the top point of a structure in the "Change
terrain elevation" dialogue window so that the whole interface can be translated while
keeping the thicknesses of individual layers. This function is important when copying the
profile from program "Terrain".
- 173 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Profile"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of inputted soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding (editing) a soil is performed in the "Add (edit) soil" dialogue window.
The soil characteristics are specified in the program "Gabion". These characteristics are
further specified in chapters: "Basic data", "Earth pressure at rest" and "Uplift pressure".
Frame "Soils"
Assign
The "Assign" frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
Procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in details herein.
- 174 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Assign"
Terrain
The "Terrain" frame allows, by pressing the button, for specifying the terrain shape. The
selected shape with graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the
left part of the frame. The terrain shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values
into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The last option to choose from is a general shape of a terrain. In this case the frame contains
a table with a list of terrain points. The first point with coordinates [0, 0] coincides with the
top point of a structure.
Analysis of earth pressures in case of inclined terrain is described in the theoretical part of the
hint, chapter "Distribution of earth pressures for broken terrain".
- 175 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Terrain"
Water
The "Water" allows, by pressing the button, for selecting the type of water. The selected type
together with a graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the left
part of the frame. Water parameters (h1, h2...) can be edited either in the frame by inserting
values into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The combo list serves to specify whether the influence of uplift pressure of water due to
different tables at the foundation joint is considered. The uplift pressure can be assumed to
be linear, parabolic or it may not be considered at all. When verifying the wall, the uplift
pressure in foundation joint due to different water tables is introduced in terms of a special
force.
The last option is a manual input of pore pressure both in front and behind the structure. Two
tab sheets "I n front of structure" and "Behind structure" appear with tables. The table is
filled with values of pore pressure in front, or behind the structure at a depth of "z" (z-axis).
The ground water table can also be specified above the structure or earth profile,
respectively in such a case the depth of water is inputted with negative value.
Analysis of earth pressures with influence of water is described in the theoretical part of the
hint chapter "Influence of water".
The program further allows for specifying a depth of tensile cracks filled with water.
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of inputted surcharges. Adding (editing)
surcharge is performed in the "New ( edit) surcharge" dialogue window. The inputted
surchages can be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects,
respectively.
The z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified (positive direction
downwards) when inputting the surcharge at a certain depth. Providing the surcharge is
found off the terrain the computer prompts an error message.
Analysis of earth pressures due to surcharges is described in the theoretical part of the hint,
- 176 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
chapter "Influence of surcharge".
Frame "Surcharge"
Front face resistance
The "Front face resistance" frame allows by pressing the button for specifying theterrain
shape and parameters of front face resistance. The selected shape with a graphic hint ("
Parameter chart") of inputted values are displayed in the left part of the frame. The terrain
shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the
desktop with the help of active dimensions.
Combo lists in the frame allows the user to select the type of resistance and a soil (the combo
list contains soils introduced in the regime "Soils"). The magnitude of terrain surcharge in
front of the wall or soil thickness above the wall lowest points can also be specified in the
frame.
The resistance on a structure front face can be specified as a pressure at rest, passive
pressure or reduced passive pressure. The resulting force due to reduced passive pressure
is found as a resultant force caused by passive pressure multiplied by a corresponding
coefficient, which follows from the inputted type of reduced passive pressure.
- 177 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Front face resistance"
I nputted forces
The "I nputted forces" frame contains a table with a list of forces acting on a structure.
Adding (editing) forces is performed in the "New force ( edit force) " dialogue window. The
inputted forces can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
Frame "I nputted forces"
Earthquake
- 178 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The "Earthquake" frame serves to input earthquake parameters. Directions of inputted
earthquake effects are displayed on the desktop.
Analysis of earth pressures while accounting for earthquake is described in the theoretical
part of the hint in chapter "Influence earthquake".
Frame "Earthquake"
Setting
The "Setting" frame contains basic settings for the analysis of earth pressures. The program
offers pre-setting for different countries (Czech Republic, Germany, France,...) and "
Standard setting" recommended by the authors of the program for countries no included in
the list. While changing settings in the combo list the values of coefficients of reduction of soil
parameters in corresponding windows are changed.
Evaluating the structure according to theory of limit states also calls for the input of
coefficient of overall stability of a structure. When subjecting the wall to overall
verification this coefficient is used to multiply the resisting moment M
res
and the resisting
shear force H
res
.
Pro An arbitrary analysis setting is available with the option "User setting". Selecting the
option "Reduce soil parameters" allows for specifying in input fields individual values of the
coefficients of reduction of soil parameters (e.g., recommended values according to EC7).
The "Other" tab sheet allows for specifying the coefficient of reduction of friction between
blocks.
- 179 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Setting"
Verification
The "Verification" frame shows the analysis results. Several computation with different
design coefficients of resultant force effects can be carried out for a single task.
Procedure for wall verification is described in the theoretical part of the hint.
The computed forced are displayed on the desktop and are automatically updated with every
change of input data and setting. The right part of the frame shows the result of verification
of a wall against overturning and translation. The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue
window, which contains detailed listing of the results of verification analysis.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Verification"
Bearing capacity
The "Bearing capacity" frame displays the results from the analysis of foundation soil
bearing capacity. The stress in the footing bottom (assumed constant) is derived from all
verifications performed in the frame "Verification". The program "Spread footing" then
considers all verifications as loading cases.
- 180 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Three basic analysis options are available in the frame:
- I nput the foundation soil
bearing capacity
The input field serves to specify the foundation soil
bearing capacity. The results of verification analysis
of a soil for eccentricity and bearing capacity are
displayed in the right part of the frame. The "I n
detail" button opens the dialogue window that
displays detailed listing of the results of verification
analysis of foundation soil bearing capacity.
- Compute the foundation
soil bearing capacity
using the program
"Spread footing"
Pressing the "Run "Spread footing" button starts
the program "Spread footing" that allows for
computing the soil bearing capacity or settlement and
rotation of a footing. Pressing the "OK" button leaves
the analysis regime the results and all plots are
copied to the program "Gabion". The program "
Spread footing" must be installed for the button to
be active.
- Do not compute ( pile
footing)
The foundation soil bearing capacity is not computed.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Bearing capacity"
Dimensioning
The "Dimensioning" frame allows for verifying individual joints of gabion blocks. The "J oint
above block No." field serves to select the desired joint subjected to verification analysis.
The verification against overturning, translation, for side pressure and joint between blocks
is performed.
Several computations for various cross-sections can be carried out. Various design
coefficients of individual forces can also be specified. The resulting forces are displayed on the
desktop and are updated with an arbitrary change in data or setting specified in the frame.
The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue window that contains detailed listing of the
dimensioning results.
- 181 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Dimensioning"
Stability
Pressing the "Stability" button launches the "Slope stability" program. This program then
allows us to check the overall stability of the analyzed structure. The button is available only
if the program "Slope stability" is installed.
After completing all analyses press the "OK" button to leave the program all data are then
carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Gabion" program.
- 182 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Stability"
Program Spread Footing
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data and to specify the overall setting
of the analysis run.
The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic data about the
analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc.
The "Proj ect" tab sheet further serves to specify a standard fornormy se concrete structures
dimensioning. Referring to the selected standard the types of concrete and steel are then
inputted in the "Material" frame. The dimensioning of cross-sections of the analyzed structure
is then performed in the "Dimensioning" frame. Only ACI standard is available when selecting
imperial units. While selecting standard it is also necessary to specify whether the stress in
the foundation joint used for verification of a wall front key is assumed uniform (SN) or
trapezoidal (Eurocode).
The "Analysis" tab sheet serves to choose the basic theory or standards to be followed in the
solution of a given problem.
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Project"
Proj ect - Analyses
The "Project" frame "Analysis" tab sheet contains basic analysis settings. Three variants are
available for the analysis of vertical bearing capacity of shallow foundation foundation on
drained subsoil, foundation on undrained subsoil and foundation on rock subsoil.
The "Analysis method" tab sheet then serves to choose the analysis standard or solution
procedure, respectively, based on the selected variant.
Options to determine the foundation vertical bearing capacity:
Analysis for drained conditions Analysis for undrained conditions Foudation on rock subsoil
analysis
- Standard approach - Standard approach - Standardn approach
- CSN 73 1001 - CSN 73 1001 - CSN 73 1001
- PN - PN - EC7
- IS - IS
- EC7 - EC7
- NCMA
- 183 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Options for settlement and foundation rotation
analysis
Options for determination of depth of
influence zone when computing
settlement
- With the help of oedometric modulus - Using structural strength
- With the help of compression constant - Using percentage of geostatic stress
- With the help of compession index
- NEN (Buissman, Ladd)
- Soft soil model
- Janbu theory
- Analysis based on DMT
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Analyses"
Profile
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of inputted interfaces. After specifying
interfaces it is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active
dimensions.
Adding (editing) layer is performed in the "Add ( edit) interface" dialogue window. The
z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified.
The program allows for raising or lowering the top point of a structure in the "Change
terrain elevation" dialogue window so that the whole interface can be translated while
keeping the thicknesses of individual layers. This function is important when copying the
profile from program "Terrain".
- 184 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Profile"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of inputted soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding (editing) a soil is performed in the "Add (edit) soil" dialogue window.
The soil characteristics are specified in the program "Spread footing". These characteristics
are further specified in chapters: "Uplift pressure", "Foundation bearing capacity" and "
Settlement".
Frame "Soils"
- 185 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Assign
The "Assign" frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
Procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in details herein.
Frame "Assign"
Foundation
The "Foundation" frame allows for selecting a type of foundation. The selected type with
graphic hint ("Geometry chart") of inputted values is displayed in the left part of the frame.
The values can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the
desktop with the help of active dimensions. The frame also serves to specify the bulk weight
of overburden.
The following types of foundations can be selected:
- Centric spread footing - Circular spread footing
- Eccentric spread footing - Circular stepped spread
- Strip footing - Centric spread footing with
batter
- Stepped centric spread footing - Eccentric spread footing with
batter
- Stepped eccentric spread
footing
The soil profile is specified from the original ground. The foundation bearing capacity
depends mainly on the depth of foundation measured from the finished grade. Providing
the finished grade is found above the original ground it required to assign the same depth to
both the finished grade and original ground and introduce into subsoil a layer with a new
made-up-ground. This frame also allows for inputting the foundation thickness.
When completed the foundation is usually filled up with a soil its bulk weight must be
- 186 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
specified (Overburden bulk weight). Providing the analysis follows the theory of limit states
its weight is multiplied by the coefficient inputted in the frame "Setting".
For foundations with an undrained subsoil (type of analysis is selected in the frame "Proj ect"
tab sheet "Analysis") it is possible to introduce an inclination of the finished grade and
footing bottom. In all other cases both the gound and footing bottom are horizontal.
Frame "Foundation"
Load
The "Load" frame contains a table with a list of inputted loads. Adding (editing) loads is
performed in the "New ( edit) load" dialogue window. Input of individual forces follows the
sign convention displayed in the right part of the dialogue window.
The following types of loading can be specified:
- design load serves to verify the foundation bearing capacity
- service load serves to compute the foundation settlement and rotation
Dimensioning of reinforcements assumed for the foundation is carried out for both types of
loading.
The foundation is loaded always in the contact point between column and foundation. The
program automatically computes the foundation self weight and the weight of
overburden.
When inputting loads the program allows by pressing the "Service" button for creating the
service loads by dividing the already inputted design loads by design coefficient.
The program also allows for import of loading using the "I mport" button.
- 187 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Loading"
I mport of loading
It is possible to import values of loading into the program from text files. Import parameters
are set in the "I mport loading" dialogue window. In the "Column" input boxes you define
the column number in the text file, from which you wish to read data. The "Multiplier" box
allows for multiplying the original value by an arbitrary number (e.g. using the number one
with a minus sign changes the load direction). The "I mport" button opens the "Open"
dialogue window, which allows for loading the respective text file. The names of individual
loadings if contained by the first column of the text file can loaded while importing the data
by checking the "Name in the first column" box.
- 188 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "I mport of loading"
The program allows for importing data from an arbitrary text file ( * .TXT). All rows in the text
file marked at the beginning by a semicolon are ignored by the program. The figure shows a
listing of imported data, where values of individual forces start in the fourth column.
Example of file "I mport of loading"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame allows for specifying the foundation shape. The selected shape with
graphic hint ("Geometry chart") of inputted values is displayed in the left part of the frame.
The values can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the
desktop with the help of active dimensions.
Foundation type and its thickness are specified in the "Foundation"frame.
The program automatically computes the self weight of both foundation and overburden
above the foundation. The foundation self weight is specified in the "Material" frame.
Providing the analysis is carried out employing the theory of limit states the footing self
weight is multiplied by coefficients specified in the "Settings" frame.
- 189 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Geometry"
The "Dimensions design" button opens the "Foundation dimensions design" that serves
with the help of program to compute dimensions of a foundation. The dialogue window allows
for inputting the bearing capacity of foundation soil Rd or to select the option "Analyze". In
such a case the program determines all dimensions of a foundation based on inputted
parameters (soils, profile, water impact, send-gravel-cushion, setting, etc.).
While leaving the dialogue window by pressing the "OK" button the specified dimensions are
loaded into the "Geometry" frame.
Dialogue window "Foundation dimensions design"
Sand- gravel cushion
The "Sand- gravel cushion" frame allows for inputting parameters of the sand-gravel
cushion below foundation. The cushion thickness and overhang over foundation edge are
required. The values can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or
on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
- 190 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The cushion filling can be selected from a combo list that contains soils specified in the
regime "Soils".
The inputted sand-gravel cushion influences the analysis of both the foundation load bearing
capacity and settlement.
Frame "Sand - gravel cushion"
Material
The "Material" frame allows for the selection of material parameters for concrete and
longitudinal and transverse steel reinforcements.
Two options are available when selecting the material type:
- the "Catalogue" button opens the "Material catalogue" dialogue window (for
concrete or steel reinforcements), the list of materials then serves to select the
desired material
- the "User" button opens the "Edit material concrete" dialogue window (for
concrete) or the "Edit material concrete steel" dialogue window (for
longitudinal and transverse steel reinforcements), which allows for manual
specification of material parameters
The catalogues content depends on the selection of standard for the design of concrete
structures set in the "Project" frame.
The input field in the upper part of the frame serves to specify the wall bulk weight.
- 191 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame"Material"
Surcharge
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of inputted surcharges. Adding (editing)
surcharge is performed in the "New ( edit) surcharge" dialogue window. The values are
specified according to "Geometry" chart displayed in the right part of the dialogue window.
The inputted surchages can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
The z-coordinate measured from the foundation joint of a structure is specified (positive
direction downwards) when inputting the surcharge at a depth different from the depth of
foundation joint.
The surcharge is considered only when computing settlement and rotation of a foundation,
in which case it increases the stress in soil below foundation. When computing the
foundation bearing capacity, the surcharge is not considered its presence would increase
the bearing capacity.
- 192 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Surcharge"
Water, incompressible subsoil
The "Water + I S" frame serves to specify the depth of ground water table and level of
incompressible subsoil.
The values can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the
desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The influence of water is manifested by the change of ground water pressure below
foundation.
The incompressible subsoil cuts off the influence zone below foundation and also
influences reduction in settlement.
- 193 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Water, incompressible subsoil"
Setting
The "Setting" frame contains basic settings to assess the footings. The program offers
pre-setting for different countries (Czech Republic, Germany, France,...) and "Standard
setting" recommended by the authors of the program for countries no included in the list.
While changing settings in the combo list the values of coefficients of reduction of soil
parameters in corresponding windows are changed.
An arbitrary analysis setting is available with the option "User setting".
Selecting the option "Safety factor" allows the user to specify in input fields own values of
the factor of safety for vertical and horizontal bearing capacity.
Selecting the option "Limit sates" allows for specifying individual values of the coefficients of
reduction of soil parameters (e.g., recommended values of coefficients according to EC7)
and coefficients for computing the self weight of both foundation and overburden.
The frame further serves for inputting the design coefficients to determine the vertical
bearing capacity and the horizontal bearing capacity of a foundation, respectively.
Frame "Setting" - safety factor
- 194 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Setting" - limit states
1.LS - bearing of a footing
The "1. LS" frame serves to verify the verital and horizontal bearing capacity of a
footing. More computations can be performed in the frame. The verification can be
performed either for individual loads or the program finds the most critical one (can be
selected from a combo list).
The analysis follows the theory approach selected in the frame "Proj ect" tab sheet "
Analysis". The footing can be verified using either the theory of limit states or the factor of
safety concept specified in the frame "Setting".
The vertical bearing capacity analysis requires selection of the type of contact pressure
(general shape, rectangle). The shape of contact pressure is plotted in the left part of the
desktop.
The horizontal bearing capacity analysis requires selection of the type of earth resistance that
can be assumed as the pressure at rest, passive pressure or the reduced passive
pressure.
The soil parameters (friction angle structure-soil, cohesion structure-soil) can be further
reduced when computing the horizontal bearing capacity.
Detailed listing of the results is displayed in the right part of the desktop. Visualization of
results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
- 195 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "1.LS - bearing of a footing"
2.LS - settlement and rotation of a footing
The "2.LS" frame serves to compute the foundation settlement and rotation. The frame
allows for more analyses. The verification can be performed either for individual loads or the
program finds the most critical one (can be selected from combo list).
The analysis of foundation settlement and rotation is carried out according to the theory
specified in the frame "Proj ect" tab sheet "Analysis".
The stress in the footing button can be subtracted from the geostatic stress given by:
- original ground
- finished grade
- not specified
Distributions of the geostatic stress and the stress increment below foundation are
displayed in the left part of the desktop. The label below footing represents the depth of
deformation zone. The stress is drawn below footing at the point with a characteristic
deformation.
The frame also allows for specifying the coefficient of reduction of computation of settlement.
The detailed listing of the verification analysis results is displayed in the right part of the
desktop. It can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
- 196 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "2. LS - settlement and rotation of a footing"
Dimensioning
The "Dimensioning" frame allows for designing and verifying the longitudinal reinforcement
of a foundation and also for verifying the foundation against being pushed through. The
verification can be performed either for individual loads or the program finds the most
critical one (can be selected from a combo list).
The program derives the stress in the construction joint (the stress diagram is inputted in the
frame "Proj ect") and determines the internal forces in individual cross-sections.
Dimensioning of the steel-reinfoced concrete structure is performed according to the standard
set in the frame "Project".
The resulting information are displayed on the desktop and are updated with an arbitrary
change in data or setting specified in the frame. The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue
window that contains detailed listing of the dimensioning results.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
- 197 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Dimensioning"
Program Pile
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data and to specify the overall setting
of the analysis run.
The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic data about the
analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc.
The "Proj ect" tab sheet further serves to specify a standard for concrete structures
dimensioning. Referring to the selected standard the types of concrete and steel are then
inputted in the "Material" and the dimensioning is verified in the "Horizontal bearing capacity"
frame.
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Project"
The "Analysis" tab sheet serves to choose the analysis of vertical bearing capacity of a pile
analysis based on CSN 73 1002, or analysis using the finite element method.
- 198 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Analysis"
Profile
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of inputted interfaces. After specifying
interfaces it is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active
dimensions.
Adding (editing) layer is performed in the "Add ( edit) interface" dialogue window. The
z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified.
The program allows for raising or lowering the top point of a structure in the "Change
terrain elevation" dialogue window so that the whole interface can be translated while
keeping the thicknesses of individual layers. This function is important when copying the
profile from program "Terrain".
The frame "Profile"
Modulus of subsoil reaction
The combo list serves to select one of the methods for the evaluation of modulus of
subsoil reaction the required material parameters of soils are inutted in the frame "Soils"
based on the selected method.
Selecting the option "I nput by distribution" opens a table that allows for specifying the
values of the modulus of subsoil reaction along the pile.
- 199 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Modulus of subsoil reaction"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of inputted soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding (editing) a soil is performed in the "Add (edit) soil" dialogue window.
The soil characteristics are specified in the program "Earth Pressure". These characteristics
are further specified in chapters: "Uplift pressure", "Oedometric modulus" and "Modulus of
subsoil reaction". The specified soil parameters depend on the set up of modulus of subsoil
rection and selected theory of analysis specified in the frame "Project", tab sheet "Analysis".
- 200 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Rm "Zeminy"
Assign
The "Assign" frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
Procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in details herein.
Frame "Assign"
Load
- 201 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The "Load" frame contains a table with a list inputted loads. Adding (editing) load is
performed in the "New ( edit) load" dialogue window. The forces are inputted following the
sign convention displayed in the upper part of the dialogue window.
The program also allows for import of loading using the "I mport" button.
Frame "Load"
Geometry
The "Geometry" frame allows for specifying the pile cross- section (circular, circular
variable, rectangle, I-type cross-section) based on the theory of analysis (specified in the "
Project" frame, tab sheet "Analyses"). The selected shape with graphic hint is displayed in
the central section of the frame. Input fields serve to specify dimensions of the selected
cross-section.
Cross- sectional characteristics (area and moment of inertia) are computed by default, but
they can also be specified (tubes, hollow cross-sections, steel I-profiles).
The bottom part of the frame serves to specify the pile location (pile lift out and the depth of
finished grade). The pile lift out can also be negative in such a case the pile is placed
"in-ground".
Providing the pile is analyzed using the finite element method it is possible to account for
influence of pile technology by selecting the specific type of pile or directly by inputting
coefficients.
- 202 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Geometry"
Material
The "Material" frame allows for specifying the material parameters. The bulk weight of a
structure and material of a pile (concrete, timber, steel) are introduced in the input field
in the right part of the frame.
The elastic and shear moduli need to be specified when assuming timber or steel piles.
In case of a concrete pile the concrete material and parameters of transverse and
longitudinal steel reinforcements are required. Two options are available when selecting the
type of material:
- the "Catalogue" button opens the "Material catalogue" dialogue window (for
concrete or steel reinforcements), the list of materials then serves to select the
desired material
- the "User" button opens the "Edit material concrete" dialogue window (for
concrete) or the "Edit material concrete steel" dialogue window (for
longitudinal and transverse steel reinforcements), which allows for manual
specification of material parameters
The catalogues content depends on the selection of standard for the design of concrete
structures set in the "Project" frame.
- 203 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Material"
Water, incompressible subsoil
The "Water + I S" frame serves to specify the depth of ground water table and level of
incompressible subsoil.
The values can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the
desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The influence of water is manifested by the change of ground water pressure.
The incompressible subsoil cuts off the influence zone below foundation and also
influences reduction in settlement.
- 204 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Water, incompressible subsoil"
Negative skin friction
The "Negative skin friction" frame serves to specify the settlement of surrounding terrain
and the depth of influence zone. For more information on the influence of negative skin
friction the user is referred to theoretical section.
The setting option in the frame is active only when the finite element method is selected
for the analysis in the frame "Proj ect" tab sheet "Analysis".
Frame "Negative skin friction"
- 205 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Setting
The "Setting" frame contains basic settings for footings verification. The program offers
pre-setting for different countries (Czech Republic, Germany, France,...) and "Standard
setting" recommended by the authors of the program for countries no included in the list.
While changing settings in the combo list the values of coefficients of reduction of soil
parameters in corresponding windows are changed.
An arbitrary analysis setting is available with the option "User setting".
Selecting the option "Reduce soil parameters" allows for specifying individual values of the
coefficients of reduction of soil parameters (e.g., recommended values according to EC7).
The setting in the frame becomes available only if the type of analysis FEM is selected in the
frame "Proj ect" tab sheet "Analysis".
Frame "Setting"
Vertical bearing capacity
The "Vertical bearing capacity" frame has two variants depending on the type of analysis
of pile vertical bearing capacity:
- according to SN 73 1002
- using the finite element method
Vertical bearing capacity CSN
The "Vertical bearing capacity" frame serves to the vertical bearing capacity of a pile.
Several analyses can be carried out in the frame. The verification can be performed for
individual loads, or the program locates the most critical one (can be selected from a
combo list).
The analysis is carried out according to one of the method based on SN 73 1002.
Parameters needed in individual methods are inputted in the lower part of the frame.
The "Loading limit curve" and "Point- bearing pile capacity" modes contain a table in the
lower part of the frame, which allows for direct editing of inputted parameters using mouse.
The "Edit" buttons open the dialogue windows that include hints for individual parameters. A
given dialogue window allows for storing inputted parameters for a given layer in the table
by pressing the "OK" button.
Analysis results can be displayed in the right part of the desktop.
The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue window containing detailed listing of the
verification results.
The analysis results are displayed in the right part of the desktop. Visualization of the results
can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
- 206 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Vertical bearing capacity - analysis according CSN 73 1004"
Vertical bearing capacity FEM
The "Vertical bearing capacity" frame allows for verifying the pile vertical bearing
capacity. The analysis is performed automatically when swtiching to this frame. More
computations can be performed in the frame. The verification can be performed either for
individual loads or the program finds the most critical one (can be selected from a combo
list)
The analysis is performed with the help of finite element method. The results are
automatically updated whenever one of the analysis parameters "Maximal deformation", "
Coefficient increasing limit skin friction due to technology" or "Procedure
determining influence zone bellow heel" is changed.
Two options are available to determine influence zone below the heel:
By default the analysis follows the procedure described in the theoretical part of the hint in
secton "Depth of influence zone".
The second options assumes the depth influence zone to be set a k-th multiple of the pile
diameter. During gradual increase of pile surcharge the depth of influence zone is
continuously changed from zero at the onset of loading to the k-th multiple of the pile
diameter when exceeding the total load.
The second method, originaly used in the old verision GEO4, with the value of k=2,5 offers
less accurate results and usually underestimates the pile bearing capacity. Therefore a new
option that allows for specifying the depth of influnece zone through anlsysis is offered and is
also recommeded by default setting.
Switching between results is avaiable in the left part of the frame (limit loading curve,
distributions of internal forces, dependence of shear on displacement). The
shear-displacement relationship is derived for a given depth measured from the pile head.
The results are updated whenever the depth is changed.
The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue window, which contains detailed listing of the
results of verification analysis.
VsledkyVisualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue
- 207 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
window.
Frame "Vertical bearing capacity - analysis according FEM"
Horizontal bearing capacity
The horizontal bearing capacity of a pile is verified in the "Horizontal bearing capacity"
frame. Several analyses can be carried out. The verification analysis can be carried out for
individual loads, prescribed displacements, or the program finds the most critical load (can
be selected from a combo list). Assuming the prescribed displacement type of load requires
introduction of boundary conditions in pile head (translation and rotation).
The fixed end type of boundary condition prescribed in the pile heel can be assumed for all
types of loading.
For steel reinforced concrete pile the programs allow for verifying the reinforcement based
on the standard selected in the frame "Project".
The combo list serves to specify the direction of pile verification (x,y); for a circular pile the
program allows for displaying the results in the most stressed direction.
The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue window that contains detailed listing of the
verification results.
The analysis results are displayed on the desktop. Visualization of results can be adjusted in
the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
- 208 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Horizontal bearing capacity"
Program Settlement
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data and to specify the overall setting
of the analysis run. The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic
data about the analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc.
The "Proj ect" tab sheet also allows the user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial).
The frame "Analyses" serves to select the theoretical approach for the settlement analysis
and the way of reducing the influence zone.
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Project"
I nterface
The "I nterface" frame serves to introduce individual soil interfaces into the soil body.
Detailed description how to deal with interfaces id described herein.
- 209 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "I nterface"
Embankment
The "Embankment" frame allows for inputting interfaces to create an embankment above
the current terrain. The frame contains a table with a list of interfaces forming the
embankment. A table listing the points of currently selected interface of the embankment is
displayed in the mid section of the frame. Inputting an embankment interface follows the
same steps as used for standard interfaces.
An embankment cannot be specified in the first stage of construction. An embankment cannot
be built if there is an earth cut already specified in a given stage - in such a case either a new
stage of construction must be introduced for embankment input or the existing open cut must
be first removed.
- 210 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Embankment"
Earth cut
The "Earth cut" frame serves to specify the shape of an open cut. This function allows for
modifying the terrain profile within a given stage of construction. Several earth cuts can be
introduced at the same time. In such a case some of the lines in the cut appear partially
above the terrain.
A table listing individual interface points is displayed in the left part of the frame. Inputting
an earth cut interface follows the same steps as used for standard interfaces.
An open cut cannot be specified in the first stage of construction. An earth cut cannot be built
if there is an embankment already specified in a given stage - in such a case either a new
stage of construction must be introduced for earth cut input or the existing embankment
must be first removed.
- 211 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Earth cut"
I ncompressible subsoil
The frame "I ncompressible subsoil" serves to input a depth of incompressible subsoil.
Inputting the depth of incompressible subsoil is the same as when inputting standard
interfaces.
Inputting an incompressible subsoil is one the options how to restrict an influence zone if
inputted, then both ranges and tilted sections are drawn up to a depth of incompressible
subsoil. No ground deformation appears below the incompressible subsoil.
- 212 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "I ncompressible subsoil"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of inputted soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding (editing) a soil is performed in the "Add (edit) soil" dialogue window.
The soil characteristics are specified in the program "Settlement". These characteristics are
further specified in chapters:"Uplift pressure" and "Settlement analysis" - the input
parameters of soils are determined based on the selected theory of analysis in the frame "
Project" tab sheet "Analyses".
Frame "Soils"
Assign
The "Assign" frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
Procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in details herein.
- 213 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Assign"
Surcharge
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of inputted surcharges. Adding (editing)
surcharge is performed in the "New ( edit) surcharge" dialogue window. The inputted
surchages can be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects,
respectively.
All inputted parameters of a surcharge can be modified in the construction stage where the
surcharge was specified. Only the surcharge magnitude can be modified in all subsequent
construction stages (option "Adj ust surcharge").
Influence of surcharge on the change of stress in the soil body is described in the theoretical
part of the help section.
- 214 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Surcharge"
Water
The "Water" frame serves to set the type of ground water table.
Inputting the ground water table or isolines, respectively, is identical with the standard input
of interfaces.
If the inputted data in individual stages are different, the program then allows for accepting
the data from the previous stage of construction by pressing the "Accept" button.
Frame "Water"
- 215 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Setting
The frame "Setting" allows for specifying the position of control holes and thicknesses and
locations of layers where the stress values are calculated.
The program determines stresses at individual control holes. The terrain is always
subdivided into twenty holes with even spacing. Additional holes are automatically generated
in points specifying terrain, embankment, GWT, soil layer interfaces and end points of
surcharge. The control (calculation) holes can be plotted in the frame "Analysis".
Individual holes are divided into layers according to the inputted values. The first layer
always coincides with the original ground. In addition, all points specifying interfaces, GWT
and incompressible subsoil are included. The default setting of thicknesses of layers ensures
reasonable speed and accuracy of the analysis.
The layers are introduced up to depth of 250m. In actual analyses, however, the depth of
influence zone is restricted either by the inputted incompressible subsoil or by the reduction
of magnitude of stress change or by the structural strength, respectively (depending on the
setting in the frame "Project").
The number and location of calculation holes can be adjusted when selecting the option "user
defined". In such a case it is possible to select both the location of doles and thicknesses and
location of layers. The holes are then created according to the input in addition, the
program automatically includes all important points. When selecting the option exact
distribution, the holes are included into all terrain points, soil layer interfaces,
embankments, GWP and into end points of surcharge. When selecting the option minimal
distribution, the holes are not included into points of interfaces of soil and embankment
layers.
For standard analyses we recommend to keep the default setting of the analysis.
Frame "Setting"
Analysis
The "Analysis" frame displays the analysis results. The analysis is carried out based on
the calculation theory selected in the frame "Project", tab sheet "Analyses". The depth of
influence zone is determined either by inputted incompressible subsoil, by the theory
restriction of primary stress or by the theory of structural strength.
Information regarding the course of analysis, maximum settlement and the depth of influenc e
zone are printed out in the bottom section of the frame. The results, as the main output, are
displayed on the screen. To view the results, use the horizontal bar in the upper section of
the screen, which allows for adjusting the way the resulting values are plotted. The bar
contains the following control items:
- the button to display the "Settlement - results visualization setting" dialogue window.
This dialogue window allows for specifying all drawing parameters: parameters to display
depression line and influence zone, to set color range, to draw tilted sections, isosurfaces and
- 216 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
isolines, etc.
- option to store individual views
- selecting values for visualization either total values, or their change during the last
calculation stage or their change in comparison with previous stages can be plotted.
The setting is available only in problems where it makes sense. It is therefore possible to
display the change of stress, settlement or deformation in comparison with previous stages
however, always the current depth of influence zone is plotted.
- selecting variables
SigmaZ,tot - overall vertical total stress [kPa,ksf]
SigmaZ,eff - overall vertical effective stress [kPa, ksf]
Pore pressure - stress due to water [kPa, ksf]
Settlement - settlement of a point [mm, feet]
Deformation - relative settlement of a layer [-]*1000
- plotting option (do not plot, isosurfaces, isolines)
The color range is visible on the right part of the desktop. The buttons for setting the color
range are located below.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Analysis"
Program Abutment
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data and to specify the overall setting
of the analysis run. The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic
data about the analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc.
- 217 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The "Proj ect" tab sheet also allows the user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial).
The "Proj ect" tab sheet further serves to specify a standard for concrete structures
dimensioning. Referring to the selected standard the types of concrete and steel are then
inputted in the"Material" frame. The dimensioning of cross-sections of the analyzed structure
is then performed in the "Dimensioning" frame. Only ACI standard is available when selecting
imperial units. While selecting standard it is also necessary to specify whether the stress in
the foundation joint used for verification of a wall front key is assumed uniform (CSN) or
trapezoidal (Eurocode).
The "Earth pressures" tab sheet serves to choose the basic theory or standards to be followed
in the solution of a given problem.
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Project"
Geometry cut
The frame "Geom. cut" allows for selecting the shape of bridge abutment. The selected
shape with a graphic hint "Wall geometry chart" appears in the left part of the frame. The
shape of a wall can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on
the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
In case the structure is composed of inclined segments it is required to enter the ratio of
sides of an inclined segment 1:x. The straight structure is specified by entering the value
zero.
The frame serves to specify the final shape of abutment including the closure wall. The
abutment can be verified also for the construction state (without the closure wall) based on
the choice in the frame "Loading - LC". The abutment length and the length of abutment
foundation is specified in the frame "Geometry plane view".
- 218 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Geometry cut"
Wings
The frame "Wings" allows for inputting the bridge wings dimensions. The wings can be either
symmetrical or unsymmetrical. Assuming unsymmetrical wings requires inputting the right
and left wing dimensions separately. The screen always displays the currently inputted wing
only the left wing is then visualized in the remaining frames.
The frame "Geometry plane view" can also be used to input or edit the wing thicknesses and
lengths.
The Wing-abutment joint cross-section can also be verified in the frame "Dimensioning". The
loading due to moment is considered. The whole wing is loaded by active pressure
developed behind the wall. The "Dimensioning" dialogue window serves to input the
magnitude of surface surcharge to determine the wing pressure. The surcharge specified in
the frame "Surcharge" is then not taken into account and the terrain behind the wing is
considered as flat. The resulting moment applied to the joint is obtained by multiplying the
overall magnitude of soil pressure acting on the wall surface and by the difference of
centroids of the pressure resultant and the joint.
The length of cross-section used for dimensioning is considered by default as the wing height
a different length of wing-abutment joint can also be specified after selecting the option "
Reduce for dimensioning".
When using prolonged wing walls it is possible to input dimensions of the foundation below
the wall. Such foundation jumps are reflected in the analysis by computing a fictitious width
of the foundation as:
t o t
f i c t
A
d
S
=
where: A
tot
- overall area of foundation including all jumps
S - length of abutment foundation
d
fict
- fictitious width of foundation for verification analysis
The foundation is then considered as being rectangular, which is simplified but rather
- 219 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
conservative assumption.
Frame "Wings"
Geometry plane view
The frame "Geometry plane view" allows for inputting the abutment length, length of
abutment foundation and also dimensions of abutment wings.
Dimensions can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the
desktop with the help of active dimensions.
For details on the effect of abutment dimensions on verification analysis we refer the
reader to section "Calculating of abutment forces".
- 220 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Geometry plane view"
Foundation steps
The frame "Foundation steps" serves to input the steps of foundation below abutment. This
option thus allows for specifying additional shapes of bridge abutment.
Adding (editing) foundation step is performed in the "New step" dialogue window. Inputted
foundation steps can be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active
objects, respectively.
Frame "Foundation steps"
Material
The "Material" frame allows for the selection of material parameters for concrete and
longitudinal steel reinforcements.
Two options are available when selecting the material type:
- the "Catalogue" button opens the "Material catalogue"
dialogue window (for concrete or steel reinforcements), the list of
materials then serves to select the desired material
- the "User" button opens the "Edit material concrete"
dialogue window (for concrete) or the "Edit material concrete
steel" dialogue window (for longitudinal steel reinforcements),
which allows for manual specification of material parameters
The catalogues content depends on the selection of standard for the design of concrete
structures set in the "Project" frame. The input field in the upper part of the frame serves to
specify the abutment unit weight.
- 221 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Material"
Profile
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of inputted interfaces. After specifying
interfaces it is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active
dimensions.
Adding (editing) layer is performed in the "Add ( edit) interface" dialogue window. The
z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified.
The program allows for raising or lowering the top point of a structure in the "Change
terrain elevation" dialogue window so that the whole interface can be translated while
keeping the thicknesses of individual layers. This function is important when copying the
profile from program "Terrain".
- 222 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Profile"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of inputted soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding (editing) a soil is performed in the "Add (edit) soil" dialogue window.
The soil characteristics are specified in the program "Cantilever wall". These characteristics
are further specified in chapters: "Basic data", "Earth pressure at rest" and "Uplift pressure".
Frame "Soils"
- 223 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Loading - LC
The frame "Loading LC" serves to specify individual loading cases (construction, service)
and the loading caused by the bridge and approach slab. Verification and dimensioning
analyses of the whole bridge abutment or only its part are carried out according to the
specified type of LC.
No load specified in the case of construction state and the abutment is verified in a given
stage of construction without a closure wall and bridge wings.
In the case of service state the abutment is loaded by the bridge and approach slab, the
whole abutment is verified.
For abutment verification it appears advantageous to exploit the stage of construction and
specify in individual stages different load cases (e.g. construction state, service state without
live load, service state with all loads). Individual stages then allow inputting different loads,
surcharges, terrain shapes, type of pressure analysis (active, at rest), design coefficients, etc.
Frame "Loading - LC"
Assign
The "Assign" frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
Procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in details herein.
- 224 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Assign"
Terrain
The "Terrain" frame allows, by pressing the button, for specifying the terrain shape. The
selected shape with graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the
left part of the frame. The terrain shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values
into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The last option to choose from is a general shape of a terrain. In this case the frame contains
a table with a list of terrain points. The first point with coordinates [0, 0] coincides with the
top point of a structure.
Analysis of earth pressures in case of inclined terrain is described in the theoretical part of the
hint, chapter "Distribution of earth pressures for broken terrain".
- 225 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Terrain"
Water
The "Water" allows, by pressing the button, for selecting the type of water. The selected type
together with a graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the left
part of the frame. Water parameters (h1, h2...) can be edited either in the frame by inserting
values into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The combo list serves to specify whether the influence of uplift pressure of water due to
different tables at the foundation joint is considered. The uplift pressure can be assumed to
be linear, parabolic or it may not be considered at all. When verifying the wall, the uplift
pressure in base of footing joint due to different water tables is introduced in terms of a
special force.
The last option is a manual input of pore pressure both in front and behind the structure. Two
tab sheets "I n front of structure" and "Behind structure" appear with tables. The table is
filled with values of pore pressure in front, or behind the structure at a depth of "z" (z-axis).
The ground water table can also be specified above the structure or earth profile,
respectively in such a case the depth of water is inputted with negative value.
Analysis of earth pressures with influence of water is described in the theoretical part of the
hint chapter "Influence of water".
The program further allows for specifying a depth of tensile cracks filled with water.
- 226 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of inputted surcharges. Adding (editing)
surcharge is performed in the "New ( edit) surcharge" dialogue window. The inputted
surchages can be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects,
respectively.
The z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified (positive direction
downwards) when inputting the surcharge at a certain depth. Providing the surcharge is
found off the terrain the computer prompts an error message.
Analysis of earth pressures due to surcharges is described in the theoretical part of the hint,
chapter "Influence of surcharge".
- 227 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Surcharge"
Front face resistance
The "Front face resistance" frame allows by pressing the button for specifying the terrain
shape and parameters of front face resistance. The selected shape with a graphic hint ("
Parameter chart") of inputted values are displayed in the left part of the frame. The terrain
shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into input fields, or on the
desktop with the help of active dimensions.
Combo lists in the frame allows the user to select the type of resistance and a soil (the combo
list contains soils introduced in the regime "Soils"). The magnitude of terrain surcharge in
front of the wall or soil thickness above the wall lowest points can also be specified in the
frame.
The resistance on a structure front face can be specified as a pressure at rest, passive
pressure or reduced passive pressure. The resulting force due to reduced passive pressure
is found as a resultant force caused by passive pressure multiplied by a corresponding
coefficient, which follows from the inputted type of reduced passive pressure.
- 228 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Front face resistance"
I nputted forces
The "I nputted forces" frame contains a table with a list of forces acting on a structure.
Adding (editing) forces is performed in the "New force ( edit force) " dialogue window. The
inputted forces can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
Frame "I nputted forces"
- 229 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Earthquake
The "Earthquake" frame serves to input earthquake parameters. Directions of inputted
earthquake effects are displayed on the desktop.
Analysis of earth pressures while accounting for earthquake is described in the theoretical
part of the hint in chapter "Influence earthquake".
Frame "Earthquake"
Setting
The "Setting" frame contains basic settings for the analysis of earth pressures. The program
offers pre-setting for different countries (Czech Republic, Germany, France,...) and "
Standard setting" recommended by the authors of the program for countries no included in
the list. While changing settings in the combo list the values of coefficients of reduction of soil
parameters in corresponding windows are changed.
Evaluating the structure according to theory of limit states also calls for the input of
coefficient of overall stability of a structure. When subjecting the wall to overall
verification this coefficient is used to multiply the resisting moment M
res
and the resisting
shear force H
res
.
An arbitrary analysis setting is available with the option "User setting". Selecting the option
"Reduce soil parameters" allows for specifying in input fields individual values of the
coefficients of reduction of soil parameters (e.g., recommended values according to EC7-1).
The "Other" tab sheet serves to specify the type of pressure acting on a wall based on the
allowable wall deformation. Providing the wall is free to move an active pressure is assumed,
otherwise, a pressure at rest is used.
- 230 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008

Frame "Setting"
Verification
The "Verification" frame shows the analysis results. Several computation with different
coefficients of resultant force effects can be carried out for a single task.
The wall is loaded either by active pressure or pressure at rest depending on input in the
frame "Setting".
Procedure for wall verification is described in the theoretical part of the hint.
The computed forced are displayed on the desktop and are automatically updated with every
change of input data and setting. The right part of the frame shows the result of verification
of a wall against overturning and translation. The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue
window, which contains detailed listing of the results of verification analysis.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Verification"
Bearing capacity
- 231 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The "Bearing capacity" frame displays the results from the analysis of foundation soil
bearing capacity. The stress in the footing bottom (assumed constant) is derived from all
verifications performed in the frame "Verification". The program "Spread footing" then
considers all verifications as loading cases.
Three basic analysis options are available in the frame:
- I nput the foundation soil
bearing capacity
The input field serves to specify the foundation soil
bearing capacity. The results of verification analysis
of a soil for eccentricity and bearing capacity are
displayed in the right part of the frame. The "I n
detail" button opens the dialogue window that
displays detailed listing of the results of verification
analysis of foundation soil bearing capacity.
- Compute the foundation
soil bearing capacity
using the program
"Spread footing"
Pressing the "Run "Spread footing" button starts
the program "Spread footing" that allows for
computing the soil bearing capacity or settlement and
rotation of a footing. Pressing the "OK" button leaves
the analysis regime the results and all plots are
copied to the program "Abutment". The program "
Spread footing" must be installed for the button to
be active.
- Do not compute ( pile
footing)
The foundation soil bearing capacity is not computed.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Bearing capacity"
Dimensioning
The "Dimensioning" frame serves to design and verify the reinforcement of abutment
cross-section the cross-section subjected to dimensioning is selected in the combo list. The
table shows the abutment forces.
Offer of cross-sections that can be verified depands on the selected load case (construction,
service). The following cross-sections are available for both the construction and service
state:
- 232 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- Wall stem verification
- Construction j oint
verification
depth of construction joint from
construction top edge is specified
- Wall j ump verification
type of assumed stress acting in
construction joint for verification (linear,
constant) can be selected in the frame "
Project"
The service state makes also possible to verify:
- Verification of closure
wall
- Verification wing -
abutment
the surface surcharge due to terrain is inputted, for
actual analysis we refer to section "Wings"
The abutment is loaded either by active pressure or pressure at rest depending on the input
specified in the frame "Settting", an active earth pressure is used when analysing wing walls.
Procedure to derive distribution of internal forces in individual cross-sections is described in
the theoretical part of this hint.
Dimensioning of the steel-reinforced concrete structure is performed according to the
standard set in the frame "Project". Verification analysis based on the standard CSN 73 6206
"Design of concrete and steel reinforced concrete bridge structures" is described
herein.
Several computations for various cross-sections can be carried out. Various design
coefficients of individual forces can also be specified. The resulting forces are displayed on the
desktop and are updated with an arbitrary change in data or setting specified in the frame.
The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue window that contains detailed listing of the
dimensioning results.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Dimensioning"
Stability
- 233 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Pressing the "Stability" button launches the "Slope stability" program. This program then
allows us to check the overall stability of the analyzed structure. The button is available only
if the program "Slope stability" is installed.
After completing all analyses press the "OK" button to leave the program all data are then
carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Abutment" program.
Frame "Stability"
Program Nailed slopes
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data and to specify the overall setting
of the analysis run. The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic
data about the analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc.
The "Proj ect" tab sheet also allows the user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial).
The "Proj ect" tab sheet further serves to specify a standard for concrete structures
dimensioning. Referring to the selected standard the types of concrete and steel are then
inputted in the "Material" frame. The dimensioning of cross-sections of the analyzed structure
is then performed in the "Dimensioning" frame. Only ACI standard is available when selecting
imperial units.
The "Earth pressures" tab sheet serves to choose the basic theory or standards to be followed
in the solution of a given problem.
- 234 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Project"
Geometry
The frame "Geometry" contains a table with a list of inputted points of the structure front
face. Adding (editing) points is performed in the "Add ( edit) point" dialogue window.
The inputted points can also be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects
double-clicking an already inputted point then opens a dialogue window for its editing.
Frame "Geometry"
Types of nails
The frame "Types of nails " serves to specify a nail type in a specific table. The strength
parameters of nails can be either inputted by the user or directly determined by the program
depending on the inputted data.
The table lists the following input data, either inputted or computed tensile strength, pull
- out resistance, nail head strength per 1m (1ft).
- 235 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Types of nails"
Geometry of nails
The frame "Geometry of nails" contains a table with a list of inputted nails. Adding (editing)
nails is performed in the "New nail ( Edit nail) " dialogue window. The inputted nails can also
be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
The user is required to specify the nail depth, depth of a bench from a given nail (the next
nail must be introduced as deep as to be located below the bench of the upper nail), nail
length, its diameter and distance.
Frame "Geometry of nails"
- 236 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Material
The "Material" frame allows for the selection of material parameters for concrete and
longitudinal steel reinforcements.
Two options are available when selecting the material type:
- the "Catalogue" button opens the "Material catalogue" dialogue
window (for concrete or steel reinforcements), the list of materials
then serves to select the desired material
- the "User" button opens the "Edit material concrete" dialogue
window (for concrete) or the "Edit material concrete steel"
dialogue window (for longitudinal steel reinforcements), which allows
for manual specification of material parameters
The catalogues content depends on the selection of standard for the design of concrete
structures set in the "Project" frame.
Frame "Material"
Profile
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of inputted interfaces. After specifying
interfaces it is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active
dimensions.
Adding (editing) layer is performed in the "Add ( edit) interface" dialogue window. The
z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified.
The program allows for raising or lowering the top point of a structure in the "Change
terrain elevation" dialogue window so that the whole interface can be translated while
keeping the thicknesses of individual layers. This function is important when copying the
profile from program "Terrain".
- 237 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Profile"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of inputted soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding (editing) a soil is performed in the "Add (edit) soil" dialogue window.
The soil characteristics are specified in the program "Nailed slopes". These characteristics
are further specified in chapters: "Basic data", "Earth pressure at rest" and "Uplift pressure".
Frame "Soils"
Assign
The "Assign" frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
- 238 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
Procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in details herein.
Frame "Assign"
Terrain
The "Terrain" frame allows, by pressing the button, for specifying the terrain shape. The
selected shape with graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the
left part of the frame. The terrain shape can be edited either in the frame by inserting values
into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The last option to choose from is a general shape of a terrain. In this case the frame contains
a table with a list of terrain points. The first point with coordinates [0, 0] coincides with the
top point of a structure.
Analysis of earth pressures in case of inclined terrain is described in the theoretical part of the
hint, chapter "Distribution of earth pressures for broken terrain".
- 239 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Terrain"
Water
The "Water" allows, by pressing the button, for selecting the type of water. The selected type
together with a graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the left
part of the frame. Water parameters (h1, h2...) can be edited either in the frame by inserting
values into input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
The combo list serves to specify whether the influence of uplift pressure of water due to
different tables at the foundation joint is considered. The uplift pressure can be assumed to
be linear, parabolic or it may not be considered at all. When verifying the wall, the uplift
pressure in base of footing joint due to different water tables is introduced in terms of a
special force.
The last option is a manual input of pore pressure both in front and behind the structure. Two
tab sheets "I n front of structure" and "Behind structure" appear with tables. The table is
filled with values of pore pressure in front, or behind the structure at a depth of "z" (z-axis).
The ground water table can also be specified above the structure or earth profile,
respectively in such a case the depth of water is inputted with negative value.
Analysis of earth pressures with influence of water is described in the theoretical part of the
hint chapter "Influence of water".
The program further allows for specifying a depth of tensile cracks filled with water.
- 240 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Water"
Surcharge
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of inputted surcharges. Adding (editing)
surcharge is performed in the "New ( edit) surcharge" dialogue window. The inputted
surchages can be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects,
respectively.
The z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified (positive direction
downwards) when inputting the surcharge at a certain depth. Providing the surcharge is
found off the terrain the computer prompts an error message.
Analysis of earth pressures due to surcharges is described in the theoretical part of the hint,
chapter "Influence of surcharge".
Frame "Surcharge"
- 241 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Earthquake
The "Earthquake" frame serves to input earthquake parameters. Directions of inputted
earthquake effects are displayed on the desktop.
Analysis of earth pressures while accounting for earthquake is described in the theoretical
part of the hint in chapter "Influence earthquake".
Frame "Earthquake"
Setting
The "Setting" frame contains basic settings for the analysis of earth pressures. The program
offers pre-setting for different countries (Czech Republic, Germany, France,...) and "
Standard setting" recommended by the authors of the program for countries no included in
the list. While changing settings in the combo list the values of coefficients of reduction of soil
parameters in corresponding windows are changed.
An arbitrary analysis setting is available with the option "User setting". Selecting the option
"Reduce soil parameters" allows for specifying in input fields individual values of the
coefficients of reduction of soil parameters (e.g., recommended values according to EC7-1).
The tab sheet "Other" is used to specify a procedure for the verification of internal stability of
a structure. When using factors of safety it is possible to input different factors of safety for
the plane and broken slip surfaces, respectively.
V The tab sheet "Other" further serves to introduce a coefficient of reduction of active
pressure acting on a structure, which influences the calculation of nails bearing capacity. By
default the value of 0,85 is recommended.
- 242 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Setting"
I nternal stability
The frame allows for the verification of internal stability of a structure assuming either plane
or broken slip surface. The verification can be carried out depending on "Setting" using
either factor of safety or the theory of limit states. Individual steps of the verification
procedure are described herein.
This frame also allows for the verification of nails bearing capacity. This analysis must be
checked in the frame "Setting" tab sheet "Other".
Frame "I nternal stability"
Verification
The "Verification" frame shows the analysis results. Several computation with different
coefficients of resultant force effects can be carried out for a single task.
To verify the external stability a fictitious structure (wall) is created and further subjected
to the verification analysis. A fictitious wall consists of the structure front face, a line
connecting end points of individual nails, a vertical line constructed from the end point of the
first nail up to the terrain depth and from the end point of the last nail up to the structure
- 243 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
depth (thus the bottom edge of a fictitious structure is always horizontal). The wall points
that cause a concave curvature of the structure back face are automatically excluded by the
program. The structure is loaded by an active earth pressure.
Procedure for wall verification is described in the theoretical part of the hint.
The computed forced are displayed on the desktop and are automatically updated with every
change of input data and setting. The right part of the frame shows the result of verification
of a wall against overturning and translation. The "I n detail" button opens the dialogue
window, which contains detailed listing of the results of verification analysis.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Verification"
Bearing capacity
The "Bearing capacity" frame displays the results from the analysis of foundation soil
bearing capacity. The stress in the footing bottom (assumed constant) is derived from all
verifications performed in the frame "Verification". The program "Spread footing" then
considers all verifications as loading cases.
Three basic analysis options are available in the frame:
- I nput the foundation soil
bearing capacity
The input field serves to specify the foundation soil
bearing capacity. The results of verification analysis
of a soil for eccentricity and bearing capacity are
displayed in the right part of the frame. The "I n
detail" button opens the dialogue window that
displays detailed listing of the results of verification
analysis of foundation soil bearing capacity.
- Compute the foundation
soil bearing capacity
using the program
"Spread footing"
Pressing the "Run "Spread footing" button starts
the program "Spread footing" that allows for
computing the soil bearing capacity or settlement and
rotation of a footing. Pressing the "OK" button leaves
the analysis regime the results and all plots are
copied to the program "Nailed slopes". The program
"Spread footing" must be installed for the button to
be active.
- 244 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- Do not compute ( pile
footing)
The foundation soil bearing capacity is not computed.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Bearing capacity"
Dimensioning
The frame "Dimensioning" allows for the design and verification of the reinforcement of the
structure concrete cover. The upper part of the frame serves to choose whether the vertical
or horizontal reinforcement and its location will be verified. The program then determines
internal forces developed on the selected section.
The table in the bottom part of the frame serves to specify locations for the verification of the
designed reinforcement depending on the inputted standard for dimensioning of
steel-reinforced concrete structures(the standard is specified in the frame "Project"). A cross-
section is loaded by the bending moment in a given point. An amount of the tensile
reinforcement in the cross-section is inputted. If the moment is negative, the designed
reinforcement is placed at the structure front face and if it is negative, then at the structure
back face.
- 245 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Dimensioning"
External stability
Pressing the "External stability" button launches the "Slope stability" program. This
program then allows us to check the overall stability of the analyzed structure. The button is
available only if the program "Slope stability" is installed.
After completing all analyses press the "OK" button to leave the program all data are then
carried over to the analysis protocol of the "Nailed slopes" program.
Frame "External stability"
- 246 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Program Ground Loss
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data and to specify the overall setting
of the analysis run.
The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic data about the
analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc. The "Proj ect" tab sheet
also allows the user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial).
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Project"
The tab sheet "Analyses" allows for selecting the method for determining subsidence trough
(Volume loss, Classical theories) and its shape (Gauss, Aversin). It also serves to input the
coefficient of calculation of inflection point, (for classical theories only), which influences the
shape of subsidence trough.
Frame "Project" - tab sheet "Analyses"
Buildings
The frame "Buildings " serves to input objects above excavation. An arbitrary number of
buildings can be specified both on a ground surface and at a given depth.
- 247 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Buildings"
Profile
The "Profile" frame contains a table with a list of inputted interfaces. After specifying
interfaces it is possible to edit thicknesses of individual layers with the help of active
dimensions. Adding (editing) layer is performed in the "Add ( edit) interface" dialogue
window. The z-coordinate measured from the top point of a structure is specified.
The program allows for raising or lowering the top point of a structure in the "Change
terrain elevation" dialogue window so that the whole interface can be translated while
keeping the thicknesses of individual layers. This function is important when copying the
profile from program "Terrain".
Inputting data in the frame is allowed providing the classical theory of analysis is selected
in the frame "Projekt".
- 248 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Profile"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of inputted soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame. Adding
(editing) a soil is performed in the "Add (edit) soil" dialogue window.
Inputting data in the frame is allowed providing the classical theory of analysis is selected
in the frame "Projekt".
Possible values of the angle of internal friction and cohesion are available in chapter "Rocks
parameters".
Frame "Soils"
- 249 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Assign
The "Assign" frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
Procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in details herein.
Inputting data in the frame is allowed providing the classical theory of analysis is selected
in the frame "Projekt".
Frame "Assign"
Geometry
The frame "Geometry" contains a table with a list of inputted excavations. The "New
excavation ( Edit excavation) " dialogue window serves to add (edit) excavations. The
inputted excavations can also be modified on the desktop with help of active objects.
Parameters of excavation differ depending on the analysis method selected in the frame "
Project". Each excavation can be specified either by the radius or the area of excavation.
Providing a sequential excavation is being inputted it is useful to specify the excavation area
and place a fictitious center of excavation to a center of gravity of this area.
Additional input parameters are explained in more details when describing individual analysis
methods (Volume loss, Classical theories).
- 250 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "New excavation"
Frame "Geometry"
Measurement
The frame "Measurement" contains a table with a list inputted measurements. The "New
measurement ( Edit measurement) " dialogue window serves to add (edit) measurements.
The inputted measurements can also be modified on the desktop with help of active objects.
Inputted measurements do not influence the actual analysis their introduction into the
program has resulted purely from designers needs. After excavating the first part of a
sequential tunnel it is useful to input the values measured in the construction site into the
program and subsequently to add the excavation input parameters such that the calculated
and measured values are the same. Practical experience shows that the values of input
parameters acquired from this procedure (e.g. coefficient of volume loss) are valid also for
subsequent stages.
- 251 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Measurement"
Settings
The frame "Settings" allows for introduction of boundaries of tensile and gradient damage.
These values serve to verify the building damage in the frame "Damages". The program
offers a default pre-setting (default setting for masonry buildings) and a user-defined
setting here it is possible to define arbitrary criteria recommended by standards or gained
from practical experience for arbitrary types of buildings.
The boundary values must be defined either in a descending or ascending order, respectively.
Providing we wish to define fewer regions than specified in the program it is possible to
characterize certain boundaries by the same value.
Frame "Settings"
Analysis
The frame "Analysis" provides the results from the analysis of subsidence trough. More than
one analysis at different depths below the terrain surface can be performed for a single task.
The computed values are displayed on a desktop and are continuously updated whenever a
certain change in the inputted data or setting in the frame is introduced.
For a quick switch between different styles of graphical presentation of results (subsidence
- 252 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
trough, distribution of values) the user may use the buttons in section "Visualization".
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Analysis" - "Settlement"
Frame "Analysis" - "Distributions"
Damages
The frame "Failures" provides the results of failure analysis of buildings. The program offers
- 253 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
four types of verifications
- verification of tensile cracks
- verification of gradient damage
- verification of relative deflection of buildings (Hogging, sagging)
- verification of the inputted section of a building
The program allows the user to perform an analysis for the current and all previous stages (
envelope from all stages) or it is possible to input individual stages and evaluate their
influence. Such a procedure makes possible to find, e.g. an optimal process of excavation of
sequantial tunnels.
Several analyses can be carried out for a single task. Visualization of results can be adjusted
in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
Frame "Damages" - visualization of tensile cracks
- 254 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Damages" - visualization of gradient damage
Program Rock slope
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data and to specify the overall setting
of the analysis run.
The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic data about the
analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc. The "Proj ect" tab sheet
also allows the user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial).
Frame Project tab sheet "Project"
The tab sheet "Analyses" serves to select the type of rock slope analysis. There are three
options available:
- 255 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- plane slip surface
- polygonal slip surface
- earth wedge
Content of the vertical tool bar depends on the selected type of analysis.
Frame Project tab sheet "Analyses"
Terrain
The frame "Terrain" contains a table with a list of defined sections of a rock slope.
The coordinates of the origin the first point of terrain followed by defined sections are
entered in the upper part of the frame. In the program the slope is always oriented from the
left to the right.
Adding (editing) section is performed in the "New section ( Edit section) " dialogue window.
These sections can also be edited on desktop with the help of active objects.
Each section can be defined by its dip, by the overall length of section, by the horizontal
length and height of section of a rock slope. Only two selected values are used while the
others are determined by the program automatically (if more than two entry fields are
checked than the input and computation are not carried out). Both vertical and horizontal
sections as well as overhangs can be represented.
In case of a proper input the program automatically plots the defined section on desktop
using dashed line, so that before accepting the defined section by pressing the "Add" button
it is possible to check, whether the section is correctly defined.
Frame "Terrain"
- 256 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Rock
The frame "Rock" allows for entering the material parameters of a rock slope (depending on
the type of shear strength) including the bulk weight of a rock. Three types of shear strengths
on a slip surface are available in the program:
- Mohr - Coulomb
- Barton - Bandis
- Hoek - Brown
Material parameters of rock are then entered based on the selected method.
Frame "Rock"
Slip surface plane
The frame "Slip surface" serves to specify the shape and parameters of a plane slip surface.
The slip surface is defined by a point in the rock body and by its gradient. The program
automatically determines intersections of the slip surface with terrain.
The program also allows for defining a tension crack with an arbitrary gradient (not
available for stepped slip surface). The crack is defined by a horizontal distance from the
origin and by its gradient.
The plane slip surface can further be labeled as smooth, undulated or stepped.
- 257 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Slip surface - plane"
Slip surface - polygonal
The frame "Slip surface" contains a table with a list of defined sections of a slip surface.
Adding (editing) section is performed in the "New section ( Edit section) " dialogue window.
These sections can also be edited on desktop with the help of active objects.
The coordinates of the slip surface origin a point on the slip surface followed by other
sections are entered in the upper part of the frame. This point can be found even out of the
soil body the program then automatically calculates the intersection of slip surface with
terrain.
Individual sections of the slip surface can be defined by their dip, by the overall length of
section, by the horizontal length and height of section of a rock slope. Only two selected
values are used while the others are determined by the program automatically (if more than
two entry fields are checked than the input and computation are not carried out). Both
vertical and horizontal sections as well as overhangs can be represented.
In case of a proper input the program automatically plots the defined section on desktop
using dashed line, so that before accepting the defined section by pressing the "Add" button
it is possible to check, whether the section is correctly defined.
- 258 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Slip surface - polygonal"
Parameters polygonal slip surface
The frame "Parameters" contains a table with a list of blocks, which are created by entering
a polygonal slip surface. Parameters of individual blocks are edited in the "Edit block"
dialogue window. Blocks can also be edited on desktop with the help of active objects.
The Mohr-Coulomb strength parameters on a slip surface and in the joints separating
individual blocks icluding the bulk weight of a rock are specified here.
This window also serves to introduce forces due to water in rock blocks.
- 259 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Parameters" polygonal slip surface
Dialogue window "Edit block" - vymnit!!!!!
Water plane slip surface
The "Water" allows, by pressing the button, for selecting the type of water. The selected type
together with a graphic hint ("Parameter chart") of inputted values is displayed in the left
part of the frame. Water parameters can be edited either in the frame by inserting values into
input fields, or on the desktop with the help of active dimensions.
Solution procedure when accounting for water is described in the theoretical part of the help "
Influence of water on slip surface"
Frame "Wster" - plane slip surface
- 260 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Surcharge plane and polygonal slip surface
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of inputted surcharges. Adding (editing)
surcharge is performed in the "New ( edit) surcharge" dialogue window. The inputted
surchages can be edited on the desktop with the help of active dimensions or active objects,
respectively.
Introducing surcharge forces into the analysis differs for a plane and a polygonal slip surface.
Frame "Surcharge" - plane and polygonal slip surface
Anchors plane and polygonal slip surface
The "Anchors" frame contains a table with a list of inputted anchors. Adding (editing)
anchors is performed in the "New anchor ( Modify anchor parameters) " dialogue window.
The inputted anchors can be edited on the desktop with the help of active objects.
The following is specified location (origin), depth, free length, anchor slope, spacing
between anchors and anchor force. The anchor origin can automatically be positioned on
terrain (by checking the particular entry field). All anchor parameters can be modified only in
the construction stage, where it was introduced. The subsequent stages allow only for
adjusting the anchor force (option "Post- stressing anchor").
The plane slip surface allows for defining active and passive anchors. Only active anchors are
allowed with the polygonal slip surface.
- 261 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Anchors" - plane and polygonal slip surface
Earthquake
The "Earthquake" frame serves to input earthquake parameters. Directions of inputted
earthquake effects are displayed on the desktop.
Rock slope analysis while accounting for earthquake is described in the theoretical part of the
hint in chapter "Influence earthquake".
Frame "Earthquake"
Setting
- 262 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The "Settings" frame contains basic settings to assess the slope stability. The program offers
pre-setting for different countries (Czech Republic, Germany, France,...) and "Standard
setting" recommended by the authors of the program for countries no included in the list.
While changing settings in the combo list the values of coefficients of reduction of soil
parameters in corresponding windows are changed.
An arbitrary analysis setting is available with the option "User setting".
Selecting the option "Safety factor" allows the user to specify in input field own value of the
factor of safety.
Selecting the option "Limit states" allows for specifying individual values of the coefficients of
reduction of soil parameters and coefficient of overall stability.
Frame "Settings" analysis according to factor of safety
Frame "Settings" analysis according to limit states
Analysis plane slip surface
The "Analysis" frame displays the analysis results. Several analyses can be performed for a
single task.
Verification of the rock slope can be carried out according to the factor of safety / theory
of limit states based on the input in the frame "Setting". The analysis results are displayed
in the frame in the bottom part of desktop.
In this frame the program makes possible to determine the anchor force needed for
obtaining the required safety factor. In such a case the "Compute required anchor force"
entry field must be checked and the slope of anchor force from horizontal must be entered.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
- 263 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Analysis" plane slip surface
Analysis polygonal slip surface
The "Analysis" frame displays the analysis results. Several analyses can be performed for a
single task.
Verification of the rock slope can be carried out according to the factor of safety / theory
of limit states based on the input in the frame "Setting". The analysis results are displayed
in the frame in the bottom part of desktop.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
- 264 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Analysis" polygonal slip surface
Geometry
The frame "Geometry" allows for entering the shape of a rock slope (earth wedge).
Geometry of earth wedge is defined by directions and gradients of fall lines of faces forming
the wedge. Geometry of earth wedge is displayed on desktop using a stereographic projection
.
The "3D view" button opens the dialogue window for viewing an earth wedge in space.
Frame "Geometry" input using directions and gradients of fall lines of faces
3D View
3D view allows for graphical check of defined values. The picture can be rotated,
translated, zoomed in and out and highlighted in a standard way. A direct print out of the
picture is not in this version allowed.
- 265 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "3D view"
Slip surface rock wedge
The frame "Slip surface" serves to enter the shape of a slip surface using directions and
gradients of fall lines of faces forming the wedge. A tension crack can also be defined.
Geometry of earth wedge is displayed on desktop using a stereographic projection.
The "3D view" button opens the dialogue window for viewing an earth wedge in space.
- 266 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Slip surface" - rock wedge
Parameters rock wedge
The frame "Parameters" serves to enter parameters of an earth wedge. The bulk weight of a
rock and the Mohr-Coulomb strength parameters of slip surfaces must be specified.
Frame "Parameters" - rock wedge
Surcharge rock wedge
The "Surcharge" frame contains a table with a list of inputted surcharges. Adding (editing)
surcharge is performed in the "New ( edit) surcharge" dialogue window.
- 267 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Surcharge forces are introduced into the stability analysis of earth wedge using resolution of
forces.
Frame "Surcharge" - rock wedge
Anchors rock wedge
The "Anchors" frame contains a table with a list of inputted anchors. Adding (editing)
anchors is performed in the "New anchor ( Modify anchor parameters) " dialogue window.
Anchor forces are introduced into the stability analysis of earth wedge using resolution acting
of forces.
- 268 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Anchors" - rock wedge
Water rock wedge
The frame "Water" allows for introducing water into analysis. If the influence of water is
taken into account then checking the respective entry field opens the field for entering the
height of GWT above the lowest point of an earth wedge.
Solution procedure when accounting for water is described in the theoretical part of the help "
Influence of ground water". The "3D view" button opens the dialogue window for viewing an
earth wedge in space.
Frame "Water" - rock wedge
Analysis rock wedge
The "Analysis" frame displays the analysis results. Several analyses can be performed for a
single task.
Verification of the rock slope can be carried out according to the factor of safety / theory
of limit states based on the input in the frame "Setting". The analysis results are displayed
in the frame in the bottom part of desktop.
In this frame the program makes possible to determine the anchor force needed for
obtaining the required safety factor. In such a case the "Compute required anchor force "
entry field must be checked and the slope of anchor force from horizontal and its direction
must be entered.
Visualization of results can be adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window.
- 269 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Rm "Vpoet" - horninov kln
Program Terrain
Proj ect
The "Proj ect" frame is used to input the basic project data.
The "Proj ect" tab sheet contains an input form to introduce the basic data about the
analyzed task, i.e. project information, project description, date, etc. The "Proj ect" tab sheet
also allows the user to switch analysis units (metric / imperial).
In this input regime the assumed setting can be modified only in the first construction stage.
Frame "Project"
Basic data
The frame "Basic data" serves to input basic parameters of the task.
The frame contains a table with a list of specified layers. Layers can be added, inserted or
- 270 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
removed using the buttons on the right from the table. The first layer can be neither
removed, nor can another layer be inserted in front of it.
The frame section "Basic setting" serves to define world dimensions of the task. When
increasing or decreasing these dimensions the program prompts possible consequences of
this action.
The section "I nputting grid" serves to define an origin and step of the grid in the X and Y
directions. The dialogue window, which allows for setting these parameters, is described in
the hint section "User- defined environment", chapter "Input".
Crossing the item "I nput in the global coordinate system" opens the way for introducing
the data in the global coordinate system (JTSK, Gauss-Kreger).
In this input regime the assumed setting can be modified only in the first construction stage.
Visualization of drawing on the desktop can be modified in any input regime based on the
setting adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window and with the help of
buttons on tool bars "3D visualization", "Scale and shift" and "Plot setting".
Frame "Basic data"
Global coordinate system
The "Coordinate systems" dialogue window allows for definig the type of the global
coordinate system.
Esential advantage is the possibility of specifying the coordinates of points and bore holes
both in the local and global coordinate systems and switching between the two systems.
Orientation of the global coordinate system with respect to the local one is defined using two
points, where one point is always introduced in the local coordinate system and its image in
the global coordinate system.
Direction and sign convention is displayed for each type of the global coordinate system in
the legend chart.
- 271 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "Coordinate system"
Soils
The "Soils" frame contains a table with a list of inputted soils. The table also provides
information about currently selected soil displayed in the right part of the frame.
Adding (editing) a soil is performed in the "Add (edit) soil" dialogue window. The program
Terrain calls only for specification of the coefficient of bulkage to compute yardage of
excavation pits or embankments. The remaining data are used only for possible export into
other GEO programs and have no effect on actual calculations performed in program Terrain.
Frame "Soils"
Assign
- 272 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The "Assign" frame contains a list of layers of profile and associated soils. The list of soils is
graphically represented using buttons in the bar above the table, or is accessible from a
combo list for each layer of the profile.
Procedure to assign soil into a layer is described in details herein.
In subsequent stages of construction the program automatically adds a new layer, to which a
soil adjacent to terrain is automatically assigned. In many cases (excavation pits) this layer
may have no volume its introduction is necessary providing the new terrain is found above
the terrain of the previous stage. The soil is always assigned, since it is not possible to a
priory estimate, whether some part of the terrain in the new stage will be located above the
original one.
Frame "Assign"
Points
The frame "Points" serves to define the coordinates of terrain points. There are two options
available to define coordinates of individual points:
With the help of table : points are defined in the table. Pressing the "Add" button opens the
"New point " dialogue window; coordinates of points are then specified and by pressing the "
Add" button added to the table. An arbitrary number of points can be defined in this way.
The "Cancel" button is used at last to close the window. These points can be further modified
(in the dialogue window) using the " Edit" button or removed with the help of "Remove"
button (more points can be marked in the table to remove them all at once before
removing, the selected points are displayed on the desktop in red). Each change is
immediately reflected on the desktop.
With the help of mouse: this inputting mode is turned on by pressing a respective button
on the horizontal bar. The following options are available:
- 273 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Add
- to input a point, click the left mouse button on the desktop (the
mouse cursor changes see picture) the program then opens
the "New point" dialogue window, which allows for modifying the
point coordinates, or to input its Z-coordinate after pressing the
"OK" button the program adds this point into the table. Providing
the point cannot be added (e.g. duplicity of coordinates) the
program prompts a warning message
- grid functions can also be used when specifying a point
Edit
- clicking an already existing point (see active objects) using the
left mouse button opens the "Edit point" dialogue window, which
allows for editing the point coordinates - in the dialogue window
the following buttons ("OK+ " a "OK+ ") can be used
Remove
- clicking the point using the left mouse button opens a dialogue
window, which requests to confirm deletion of the selected point
Select
- actives the regime of graphical selection of points (type of
selection is set in the tool bar "Selections")
The selected points can also be imported from files in formats TXT, Atlas DNT, respectively
DXF.
When defining points the program in some cases automatically calculates their Z-coordinates.
Only one point can be assigned to a single coordinate X, Y.
Visualization of drawing on the desktop can be modified in any input regime based on the
setting adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window and with the help of
buttons on tool bars "3D visualization", "Scale and shift", "Selections" and "Plot setting".
Frame "Points"
I mport of points
The program allows for data import in formats DXF, ATLAS DMT and TXT. When importing, all
- 274 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
old data are deleted and replaced by the new ones. The world dimensions are automatically
determined according to minimal and maximal values of coordinates x and y it is therefore
desirable to subsequently adjust the world dimensions in the frame " Basic data".
The program allows for importing TXT data from respective files . Each point is written on a
separate line of the file, coordinates are separated by comma. If the file contains for each
point first its name, it is necessary to check the item "Labeling of pints". In the dialogue
window is then necessary to specify the order of coordinates. If the data have an opposite
sign convention, it possible to multiply the corresponding line by the value -1. The data
import is performed after pressing the " I mport " button.
Dialogue window "I mport" format "TXT"
Dialogue window "I mport" format "Atlas"
Automatic calculation of height
When defining points, bore holes and points of ground water table the program in some cases
automatically calculates the point height (z-coordinate) and eventually the layer thickness.
This function is particularly valuable when editing terrain or layers.
The possibility of height calculation depends on the status of generated terrain:
- if no terrain is generated, the height is not calculated and the respective field
remains empty (blank)
- 275 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- if terrain is generated for the current data (displayed on the desktop in a
non-transparent mode and in regimes Generation, Point constructions, Line
constructions and Launching also in a color mode), the required values are then
automatically calculated from the model of terrain for a point it is the
Z-coordinate, for a bore hole the program further determines the layer thickness
and possibly also the depth of the ground water table when a point or a bore hole
is specified the status of generated terrain is changed and the drawing is switched
to a transparent mode (the terrain is generated for the original input, not for the
current input)
- when the terrain is generated, but it is not the current one, the Z-coordinates and
layers thicknesses are automatically calculated for the last generated terrain
I nformation regarding the terrain status (not generated, generated, generated for the
original data) are displayed on the vertical tool bar. The frame "Generate" allows for terrain
generating or removing the generated model.
Dialogue window add new point and calculate the Z-coordinate
Dialogue window add new bore hole and calculate the Z-coordinate, thickness of GWT and
layer thicknesses
Edges
The frame "Edges" serves to input edges connecting the terrain points. Two options are
- 276 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
available to define edges:
With the help of table : edges are defined in the table. Pressing the "Add" button opens the
"New edge" dialogue window; sequence numbers of the starting and end points are then
specified and by pressing the "Add" button added to the table. An arbitrary number of edges
can be defined in this way. The "Cancel" button is used at last to close the window. These
edges can be further modified (in the dialogue window) using the " Edit" button or removed
with the help of "Remove" button (more edges can be marked in the table to remove them
all at once before removing, the selected edges are displayed on the desktop in red). Each
change is immediately reflected on the desktop.
With the help of mouse: this inputting mode is turned on by pressing a respective button
on the horizontal bar. The following options are available:
Add
- to input an edge, click the starting and end points using the left
mouse button (the mouse cursor changes see picture) after
clicking the end point the program adds the corresponding edge
into the table and at the same time displays this edge on the
desktop. Providing the edge cannot be added (duplicity reason,
crossing, etc.) the program prompts a warning message
Edit
- clicking an already existing edge (see active objects) using the
left mouse button opens the "Edit edge" dialogue window, which
allows for editing the sequence numbers of the starting and end
points of the edge - in the dialogue window the following buttons
("OK+ " a "OK+ ") can be used
Remove
- clicking the edge using the left mouse button opens a dialogue
window, which requests to confirm deletion of the selected edge
Select
- actives the regime of graphical selection of edges (type of
selection is set in the bar "Selections")
Edges can intersect neither other edges nor earth grading. Only one edge can be defined
between two points.
Visualization of drawing on the desktop can be modified in any input regime based on the
setting adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window and with the help of
buttons on tool bars "3D visualization", "Scale and shift", "Selections" and "Plot setting".
- 277 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Edges"
Water
The frame "Water" serves to specify the ground water table (GWT). A combo list "Type of
water" contains the following items:
No water no water specified
Water specified by points the GWT points are defined in the table in the same way as
when defining terrain points. This approach is particularly suitable if having a horizontal
water table then it is sufficient to define only one point of a given coordinate Z and the
program automatically generates a horizontal line representing the GWT.
Water specified in bore holes Ground water is defined within bore holes. A particular
depth of GWT measured from terrain surface is specified. This approach is suitable when bore
holes with measured depths of GWT are available.
Visualization of drawing on the desktop can be modified in any input regime based on the
setting adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window and with the help of
buttons on tool bars "3D visualization", "Scale and shift" and "Plot setting".
- 278 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Water"
Bore holes
The frame "Bore holes" serves to define bore holes (both real and fictitious), which allow for
the modeling individual geological layers (depending on the setting in the frame "Basic data
") or ground water tables (depending on the setting in the frame "Water").
To input points that determine the location of individual bore holes proceed in the similar way
as when defining terrain points. Apart from coordinates it is necessary to enter the bore-hole
name and thicknesses of layers. The generated geological profile can be easily modified
exploiting the option of automatic calculation of height z from the thicknesses of individual
layers.
Bore holes can be defined only in the first stage of construction. The program automatically
assures that a lower layer always lies below an upper layer "Crossing of layers" is not
acceptable the dominant layer is always the upper layer.
Visualization of drawing on the desktop can be modified in any input regime based on the
setting adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window and with the help of
buttons on tool bars "3D visualization", "Scale and shift" and "Plot setting".
- 279 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Bore holes" input, edit
Frame "Bore holes" defined bore holes
Earth grading
The frame "Earth grading" serves to define terrain earth grading. The earth grading cannot
be defined in the first stage of construction.
The earth grading should considerably simplify an input of excavation pits or embankments.
The essential part of earth grading is the shape of bottom, form which the slopes of
excavations or embankments are directed towards the original terrain. The original terrain
- 280 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
points and edges, found in the region of earth grading, are during generation automatically
removed.
More than one earth grading can be defined within a single stage of constructions. They
must not, however, cross each other . If that happens, they need to be combined into a
single earth grading. No part of earth grading can also exceed the world dimensions in such
a case one should realize that faces of earth grading may exceed the world dimensions even
if the bottom is defined well inside.
The earth grading can be edited only in the stage, where it is defined. In to next stage of
construction, the earth grading is transferred in terms of terrain new points and edges.
With the help of table : earth grading is defined in the table. The "Add" button opens the "
New earth grading " dialogue window, which allows for specifying the name of earth grading
(by checking individual boxes it is possible to define a uniform depth of the bottom and a
uniform gradient of the slope). This dialogue window contains further a table to introduce
points, which define the ground plan (general polygon) of earth grading. To enter these
points, proceed in the similar way as when defining terrain points. Pressing the "Add" button
closes the dialogue window and the new earth grading is inserted into the table.
The earth grading can be further modified (in the dialogue window) using the " Edit" button or
removed with the help of "Remove" button (more than one earth grading can be marked in
the table to remove them all at once - before removing, the selected earth grading is
displayed on the desktop in red). Each change is immediately reflected on the desktop.
With the help of mouse: this inputting mode is turned on by pressing a respective button
on the horizontal bar. The following options are available:
Add earth
grading
- To input an earth grading, click the left mouse button on the desktop
to successively define individual points of the polygon, which
determines a ground plan of an earth grading the polygon must be
closed (the last clicked point serves as the first point of the polygon)
after closing the polygon the program opens the "New earth
grading" dialogue window; to continue follow the same steps as
when an input using the table is assumed - providing the earth
grading cannot be defined, or it overlays an already existing one, the
program prompts a warning message
Edit earth
grading
- clicking an already existing earth grading using the left mouse
button (see active objects) opens the "Edit earth grading" dialogue
window, which allows for editing the respective grading (is possible
use buttons in the dialogue window "OK+ " a "OK+ ")
Remove earth
grading
- clicking an earth grading using the left mouse button opens a
dialogue window, which requests to confirm deletion of the selected
earth grading
Visualization of drawing on the desktop can be modified in any input regime based on the
setting adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window and with the help of
buttons on tool bars "3D visualization", "Scale and shift" and "Plot setting".
- 281 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Earth grading" input, edit
Frame "Earth grading" defined earth grading
Generate
The frame "Generate" serves to generate a model of the terrain.
Parameters to generate the model, which are valid for all subsequent stages, are specified
in the first stage of construction.
These are
- model smoothing (none, medium, maximal)
- 282 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- active edge allows for modeling of terrain along
edges
The frame further serves to define drawing parameters (grid step, contour line step).
The actual model is generated by pressing the "Generate" button. The generated model can
be canceled by pressing the "Cancel model" button this can be useful to enhance clarity of
input.
Selecting the option "Compute yardage" allows for yardage calculation (in a combo list it is
possible input the construction stage number for which the calculation should be carried
out).
Visualization of drawing on the desktop can be modified in any input regime based on the
setting adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window and with the help of
buttons on tool bars "3D visualization", "Scale and shift" and "Plot setting".
Frame "Generate"
Modeling terrain on edges
A special attention has to be given to boundary condition to correctly create a digital model
of terrain heights of points in corners and boundaries (edges) of the world (world
dimensions).
The corner points can be either entered or they are inserted automatically during the first
stage of construction. When automatically generated, the corner point receives the same
height as has the closest point or bore hole already defined.
When generating terrain the corner points are connected by an edge . In some cases
(slopes) we wish the edges to model the overall shape and inclination of terrain . In such
cases an active edge option can be used. An active edge is introduced as a percentage
fraction of the world dimensions . All points found on an active edge are, during
generation, automatically projected in the normal direction on to an edge new points are
then created at the same locations (on edge) having the same z-coordinate. The new points
are stored in data associated with the next stage of construction.
Subsequent layers of the terrain model behave the same way. The thicknesses of these layers
on edges are calculated according to thicknesses of layers of the closest bore holes.
The role of an active edge is evident from the following figure.
- 283 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Terrain generated without and with an active edge
Point constructions
The frame "Line constructions" serves to introduce line constructions into the terrain.
To input points that determine the location of individual point constructions proceed in the
similar way as when defining terrain points (using either table or mouse). The "New point
construction" ("Edit point construction") dialogue window allows also for specifying the
name of the program to analyze the corresponding construction. The frame "Launch" is then
used to run the calculation program and to transfer thicknesses of layers and assignment of
soils into the program.
Point constructions can be defined only if a correct model of the terrain is generated.
Visualization of drawing on the desktop can be modified in any input regime based on the
setting adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window and with the help of
buttons on tool bars "3D visualization", "Scale and shift" and "Plot setting".
- 284 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Point constructions" input, edit
Frame "Point constructions" defined constructions
Line constructions
The frame "Line constructions" serves to introduce line constructions into the terrain.
To input lines that determine the location of individual line constructions proceed in the
similar way as when defining terrain edges (using either table or mouse). The "New line
construction" ("Edit line construction") dialogue window allows for specifying the name
and type of a construction line:
"Longitudinal line construction" is defined by coordinates of the starting and end points
(the table is a part of the dialogue window). A combo list serves to select a particular
calculation program (Settlement, Slope stability, FEM). To run the program, use the frame "
Launch". Terrain shape and interfaces are transferred in the same way as when assigning
soils to layers.
"Line with points" is defined by coordinates of a broken line and can be used to specify new
point construction. Point constructions are defined in the table "Point constructions on line
", which is a part of the "New line construction" dialogue window. The frame "Launch" is
then used to run the calculation program and to transfer thicknesses of layers and
assignment of soils into the program.
Line constructions can be defined only if a correct model of the terrain is generated.
Visualization of drawing on the desktop can be modified in any input regime based on the
setting adjusted in the "Setting visualization style" dialogue window and with the help of
buttons on tool bars "3D visualization", "Scale and shift" "Plot setting".
- 285 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Frame "Line constructions" input, edit
Frame "Line constructions" defined constructions
Launching
The frame "Launching" contains a table with a list of defined point or line constructions.
Based on the selection in the table and after pressing the "Launch" button the program
- 286 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
associated with a particular task is launched (the corresponding calculation module must be
purchased). The required data are transferred into the program. The program then allows for
performing the specific calculations and verifications. If the program is not purchased, the
launching button is not accessible.
When all calculations are completed the program is exited by pressing the "OK" button the
results and defined pictures are transferred back into a corresponding calculation protocol in
program "Terrain".

Frame "Launching"

Launching program "Spread footing" from program "Terrain"
- 287 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Outputs
The program contains three basic output options:
- Print and export document
- Print and export picture
- Copy to clipboard
Adding picture
The program allows for storing the current picture irrespectively of the program regime. To
that end, press the "Add picture" button on the vertical tool bar. The button opens the "New
picture" dialogue window and inserts the current view on the desktop view in the window.
The picture is always linked to a certain input regime or analysis. (The current regime is
displayed next to the picture name). When printing document the picture is automatically
added to a specific regime in the tree.
The program allows for defining the picture either for a specific stage of construction (or for
the current analysis) or adjusting the setting such that the picture is added to the document
in all stages of construction (or all analyses). The latter option is assumed when selecting "all
" in the "Stages" combo list (or "Analysis" list).
Warning: All inputted pictures are automatically regenerated whenever modifying
data.
The picture view can be adjusted with the help of vertical tool bar in the left part of the
window (edit size and location). See "Tool bar - scale and shift" section for more details on
individual buttons. The last button on the bar allows for adjusting the picture page ratio. The
"Picture setting" frame in bottom part of the dialogue window further allows for adjusting
colors and style of line (object) drawing see "Setting visualization style".
The "OK" button stores the picture into the "Picture list". It can be then opened and modified
at any time.
The picture can be also printed out from this window pressing the "Print" button opens the
dialogue window for printing and exporting pictures. If the picture is active over all stages (or
all analyses), then all possible combinations of pictures are printed all at once (each picture
on a separate page).
- 288 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "New picture"
Picture list
Pictures stored with the help of the "New picture" dialogue window are ordered in the table in
"Picture list". The "Picture list" dialogue window is opened using the button on the vertical
tool bar. The table of list of pictures contains the picture name and description, the regime in
which it was created and stage of construction or the analysis number.
Individual pictures can be edited using the "Modify" button, which opens the "Picture
modification" dialogue window (this window corresponds to the "New picture" dialogue
window both in the way it looks and in the way it functions).
These pictures can be printed out from the window by pressing the "Print" button that opens
the dialogue window for printing and exporting the picture. Providing the picture is active
over all stages of construction (over all analyses, respectively) then the program prints all
possible combinations of the picture (each picture on a separate page). Providing more
pictures are selected then all selected pictures are printed out.
- 289 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "Picture list"
Print and export document
The "Print and export document" dialogue window can be opened either from the control
menu (items "Files", "Print document") or using the "Files" button on the horizontal tool
bar. The page print preview with a generated text appears in the window.
This window generates output document including pictures stored in the "Picture list". This
window allows either for printing the created protocol or exporting it for further use. The
document is always up to date the program creates the document again based on
inputted data (even with regenerated pictures) whenever opening this window.
Only specific parts of the document including pictures can be generated by checking the
corresponding "tree" item in the left part of the window. Selecting or deselecting an arbitrary
item prompts the program to regenerate the document automatically.
The dialogue window contains its own "Control menu" and "Tool bar" for finalizing the page
face (header and footer definition, page size and edges definition and definition page
numbering).
A mouse ball or scroll bar can be also used to view the document.
The button part of the dialogue window displays current information (defined page size,
current document page and the total number of pages).
- 290 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "Print and export document"
Print and export picture
This window serves to print or export one or more pictures. Three options are available to
open this window:
- using the control menu (items "Files", "Print view") or the "
Files" button on the tool bar to print data from the desktop.
- using the "New picture" dialogue window by pressing the "
Print" button
- using the "Picture list" dialogue window by pressing the "
Print" button
The window may contain more than one picture at the same time (when printing more
construction stages or analyses) when printing more pictures from the list. Each pictured is
printed on a separate page. The picture preview can be adjusted using buttons on the tool
bar or a mouse ball.
The dialogue window contains its own "Control menu" and "Tool bar" for finalizing the page
face (header and footer definition, page size and edges definition and definition page
numbering).
The button part of the dialogue window displays current information (defined page size,
current document page and the total number of pages).
- 291 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "Documents" print and export current picture (view)
Control menu - Print and export
The control menu of the "Print and export document" and "Print and export pictures" dialogue
windows contains the following items:
Document
Save as
- opens the "Save as" dialogue window that allows for
saving the file in format *.PDF, or *.RTF
Send
- opens the dialogue window for mail client an adds the
picture as an attachement in format *.PDF
Open for edit
- opens text editor (associated in the Windows system
with *.RTF extenison) that allows for editing the page
manulally
Page properties
- opens the "Page properties" dialogue window that
allows for specifying the page style (size, edges,
layout)
Header and footer
- opens the "Header and footer" dialogue window that
allows for inputting the document headers and footers
Print
- opens the system window for "Print"
Close
- closes the dialogue window
Edit
- 292 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Copy
- copies the selected picture (text) to clipboard
parameters are set in the "Options" dialogue window
tab sheet "Copy to clipboard"
Sellect all
- marks all on page (on document) into block
Unsellect all
- cancels entire selection (picture, text)
View
Full page
- modifies the page size such that the entire page in the
dialogue window is visible
Page width
- fits the page to a maximum width of the document
dialogue window
Page (this item appers in the menu only if the document has more than one page)
First page
- shows the document first page
Previous page
- shows the previous page
Following page
- shows the following page
Last page
- shows the document last page
Tool bar "Print and export"
The tool bar of the "Print and export document" and "Print and export picture" dialogue
windows contains the following buttons:
Tool bar "Print and export"
Individual buttons function as follows:
Save as
- opens the "Save as" dialogue window that
allows for saving the file in format *.PDF, or
*.RTF
Print
- opens the system window for "Print"
Page properties
- opens the "Page properties" dialogue window
that allows for specifying the page style (size,
edges, orientation)
Header and
footer
- opens the "Header and footer" dialogue window
that allows for inputting the document headers
and footers
Color style
- determines the style of picture view (color,
gray scale, black & white)
Copy
- copies the selected picture (text) to clipboard
parameters are set in the "Options" dialogue
window tab sheet "Copy to clipboard"
First page
- shows the document first page
Previous page
- shows the previous page
Next page
- shows the following page
Last page
- shows the document last page
- 293 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Move
- moves the current view in an arbitrary
direction to proceed move mouse in the
desired location while keeping the left mouse
button pressed
Zoom in
- scales up the desktop view while keeping
location of the point under the axis cross
unchanged this action is repeated using the
left mouse button, the right button leaves the
zooming mode
Zoom out
- scales down the desktop view while keeping
location of the point under the axis cross
unchanged this action is repeated using the
left mouse button, the right mouse button
leaves the zooming mode
Text selection
- allows for selecting the text under the axis
cross - to proceed move mouse over the
desired text while keeping the left mouse
button pressed
Full page
- modifies the page size such that the entire
page in the dialogue window is visible
Page width
- fits the page to maximum width of the
document dialogue window
Setting header and footer
The dialogue window serves to define properties of the document header and footer. The "
print header ( footer) " check box determines whether to print the document header
(footer).
Header and footer lines may contain an arbitrary text and inserted objects implicitly defined
by the program. These objects receive program information such as:
- from the "Company data" dialogue window (company name, logo,
address)
- from the "Proj ect" frame (name and task description, author)
- from the document system data (date, time, page numbering)
Objects can be introduced using the "I nsert" button (the button opens a list of objects). The
button is active only if the cursor is found in one of the line that allows for inserting text
(object). Inserted objects are written in an internal format different from other text and
placed in curly brackets.
The program allows for defining various headers for the first page or odd and even pages,
respectively. Individual headers are in such a case defined in separate tab sheets.
The "use as default" option sets the inputted header and footer parameters as default for
the newly created data. The assumed default setting is common for all GEO programs.
Different computer users may use different settings.
Writing format and the resulting view are evident from the following pictures.
- 294 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "Header and footer"
View of document header and footer
Page properties
The dialogue window allows for setting the page layout (paper format, print orientation and
edges).
The "use as default" option sets the inputted page properties as default for the newly
created data. The assumed default setting is common for all GEO programs. Different
computer users may use different settings.
- 295 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "Page properties"
Page numbering
This dialogue window allows the user to set page numbering. The combo list serves to define
the numbering style (Arabic digits, roman digits, with the help of symbols). A constant text
can be placed both in front and behind the page number. The "Numbering from" option
allows for starting the page numbering from an arbitrary number. The "use as default"
option sets the inputted page numbering properties as default for the newly created data. The
assumed default setting is common for all GEO programs. Different computer users may use
different settings.
Dialogue window "Page numbering"
About company
The dialogue window is launched from the managing menu (items "Setting", "Company").
The "Basic data" tab sheet serves to specify the basic information about company. The
inputted data are used by the program when printing and exporting documents (pictures), in
the document header or footer.
The "Company logo" tab sheet allows the user to load the company logo. The "Load" button
opens the dialogue window which allows for opening the picture in various formats (*.JPG,
*.JPEG, *.JPE, *.BMP, *.ICO, *.EMF, *.WMF).
The "Employees" tab sheep allows for inputting the list of program users (employees). When
filling the name list it is no longer necessary fill the author's name in the frame "Project".
- 296 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "About company" tab sheet "Basic data"
Dialogue window "About company" tab sheet "Company logo"
- 297 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dialogue window "About company" tab sheet "Employees"
Theory
Stress in a soil body
Geostatic stress, uplift pressure
Stress analysis is based on existence of soil layers specified by the user during input. The
program further inserts fictitious layers at the locations where the stress and lateral pressure
(GWT, points of construction, etc.) change. The normal stress in the i
th
layer is computed
according to:
where: h
i
- thickness of the i
th
layer

i
- unit weight of soil
If the layer is found below the ground water table, the unit weight of soil below the water
table is specified with the help of inputted parameters of the soil as follows:
- for option "Standard" from expression:
where:

sat
- saturated unit weight of soil

w
- unit weight of water
- for option "Compute from porosity" from expression:
- 298 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where: n - porosity

s
- specific weight of soil

w
- unit weight of water
where: V - volume of soil
V
p
- volume of voids

d
- dry unit weight of soil
Unit weight of water is assumed in the program equal to 10 kN/ m
3
or 0,00625 ksi.
Assuming inclined ground behind the structure (| = 0)and layered subsoil the angle |, when
computing the coefficient of earth pressure K, is reduced in the i
th
layer using the following
expression:
where:

- unit weight of the soil in the first layer under ground

i
- unit weight of the soil in the i
th
layer under ground
|
- slope inclination behind the structure
Effective/ total stress in soil
Vertical normal stress o
z
is defined as:
where:
o
z
- vertical normal total stress

ef
- submerged unit weight of soil
z - depth bellow the ground surface

w
- unit weight of water
This expression in its generalized form describes so called concept of effective stress:
where:
o
- total stress (overall)
o
ef
- effective stress (active)
u - neutral stress (pore water pressure)
- 299 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Total, effective and neutral stress in the soil
Effective stress concept is valid only for the normal stress

o, since the shear stress t is not

transferred by the water so that it is effective. The total stress is determined using the basic
tools of theoretical mechanics, the effective stress is then determined as a difference between
the total stress and neutral (pore) pressure (i.e. always by calculation, it can never be
measured). Pore pressures are determined using laboratory or in-situ testing or by
calculation. To decide whether to use the total or effective stresses is no simple. The following
table may provide some general recommendations valid for majority of cases. We should
realize that the total stress depends on the way the soil is loaded by its self weight and
external effects. As for the pore pressure we assume that for flowing pore water the pore
equals to hydrodynamic pressure and to hydrostatic pressure otherwise. For partial saturated
soils with higher degree of it is necessary to account for the fact that the pore pressure
evolves both in water and air bubbles.
Assume conditions Drained layer Undrained layer
short term effective stress total stress
long term effective stress effective stress
In layered subsoil with different unit weight of soils in individual horizontal layers the vertical
total stress is determined as a sum of weight of all layers above the investigated point and
the pore pressure:
where:
o
z
- vertical normal total stress

- unit weight of soil

- unit weight of soil in natural state for soils above the GWT and dry layers

- unit weight of soil below water in other cases
d - depth of the ground water table below the ground surface
z - depth bellow the ground surface

w
- unit weight of water
I ncrement of earth pressure due to surcharge
Earth pressure increment in a soil or rock body due to surcharge is computed using the
theory of elastic subspace (Bousinesque).
Earth pressure increment in the point inside the soil or rock body due to an infinite strip
- 300 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
surcharge is obtained from the following scheme:
Computation of earth pressure due to infinite strip surcharge
A trapezoidal surcharge is automatically subdivided in the program into ten segments.
Individual segments are treated as strip surcharges. The resulting earth pressure is a sum of
partial surcharges from individual segments.
Stress increment due to concentrated surcharge is computed as follows:
Surcharge related to point "O"
where:
I ncrement of earth pressure under footing
In the program "Spread footing" the stress distribution below foundation is determined by
- 301 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
combining the basic loading diagrams:

Chart of foundation loading
Chart of foudation loading

Chart of foudation loading

- 302 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Earth pressure
Program system GEO5 considers the following earth pressures categories:
- active earth pressure
- passive earth pressure
- earth pressure at rest
When computing earth pressures the program GEO5 allows for distinguishing between the
effective and total stress state and for establishing several ways of calculation of uplift
pressure. In addition it is possible to account for the following effects having on the earth
pressure magnitude:
- influence of loading
- influence of water pressure
- influence of broken terrain
- friction between soil and back of structure
- wall adhesion
- influence of earth wedge at cantilever jumps
- influence of earthquake
The following sign convention is used in the program, text and presented expressions.
When specifying rocks it is also necessary to input both the cohesion of rock c and the angle
of internal friction of rock . These values can be otained either from the geological survey or
from the table of recommended values.
Sign convention
The following sign convention is used in the program, text and presented expressions.
Sign convention for calculation of earth pressures
- inclination of the ground surface | is positive, when the ground rises upwards from the
wall
- inclination of the back of structure o is possitive, when the toe of the wall (at the back
face) is placed in the direction of the soil body when measured from the vertical line
constructed from the upper point of the structure
- friction between the soil and back of structure o is positive, if the resultant of earth
- 303 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
pressure (thus also earth pressure) and normal to the back of structure form an angle
measured in the clockwise direction
Active earth pressure
Active earth pressure is the smallest limiting lateral pressure developed at the onset of shear
failure by wall moving away from the soil in the direction of the acting earth pressure
(minimal wall rotation necessary for the evolution of active earth pressure is about 2mrad,
i.e. 2mm/ m of the wall height).
The following theories and approaches are implemented for the computation of active earth
pressure assuming effective stress state:
The Mazindrani theory
The Coulomb theory
The Mller-Breslau theory
The Caqouot theory
The Absi theory
For cohesive soils the tension cutoff condition is accepted, i.e. if due to cohesion the negative
value of active earth pressure is developed or, according to more strict requirements, the
value of "minimal dimension pressure" is exceeded, the value of active earth pressure drops
down to zero or set equal to the "minimal dimensioning pressure".
The program also allows for running the analysis in total stresses.
Active earth pressure the Mazindrani theory
Active earth pressure is given by the following formula:
where:
o
z
- vertical geostatic stress
K
a
- coefficient of active earth pressure due to Rankin
|
- slope inclination

- weight of soil
z - assumed depth
- coefficient of active earth pressure due to Mazindrani
where:
|
- slope inclination

- angle of internal friction of soil
c - cohesion of soil
Assuming cohesionless soils (c = 0) and horizontal ground surface (| = 0) yields the Rankin
solution, for which the active earth pressure is provided by:
- 304 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
and the coefficient of active earth pressure becomes:
where:

- angle of internal friction of soil
Horizontal and vertical components of the active earth pressure become:
where:
o
a
- active earth pressure
o
- angle of friction structure - soil
o
- back face inclination of the structure
Active earth pressure - the Coulomb theory
Active earth pressure is given by the following formula:
where:
o
z
- vertical geostatic stress
c
ef
- effective cohesion of soil
K
a
- coefficient of active earth pressure
K
ac
- coefficient of active earth pressure due to cohesion
The coefficient of active earth pressure K
a
is given by:
The coefficient of active earth pressure K
ac
is given by:
for:
for:
where:

- angle of internal friction of soil
o
- angle of friction structure - soil
|
- slope inclination
o
- back face inclination of the structure
Horizontal and vertical components of the active earth pressure become:
- 305 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where:
o
a
- active earth pressure
o
- angle of friction structure - soil
o
- back face inclination of the structure
Active earth pressure - the Mller- Breslau theory
Active earth pressure is given by the following formula:
where:
o
z
- vertical geostatic stress
c
ef
- effective cohesion of soil
K
a
- coefficient of active earth pressure
K
ac
- coefficient of active earth pressure due to cohesion
The coefficient of active earth pressure K
a
is given by:
where:

- angle of internal friction of soil
o
- angle of friction structure - soil
|
- slope inclination
o
- back face inclination of the structure
The coefficient of active earth pressure K
ac
is given by:
for:
for:
where:

- angle of internal friction of soil
o
- angle of friction structure - soil
|
- slope inclination
o
- back face inclination of the structure
- 306 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Horizontal and vertical components of the active earth pressure become:
where:
o
a
- active earth pressure
o
- angle of friction structure - soil
o
- back face inclination of the structure
Active earth pressure - the Caquot theory
Active earth pressure is given by the following formula:
where:
o
z
- vertical geostatic stress
c
ef
- effective cohesion of soil
K
a
- coefficient of active earth pressure
K
ac
- coefficient of active earth pressure due to cohesion
The following analytical solution (Boussinesque, Caqouot) is implemented in GEO5 to
compute the coefficient of active earth pressure K
a
:
where: K
a
- coefficient of active earth pressure due to Caquot
K
a
Coulomb
- coefficient of active earth pressure due to Coulomb

- conversion coefficient see further
where:
|
- slope inclination behind the structure

- angle of internal friction of soil

o
- angle of friction structure - soil
The coefficient of active earth pressure K
ac
is given by:
for:
- 307 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
for:
where:

- angle of internal friction of soil
o
- angle of friction structure - soil
|
- slope inclination behind the structure
o
- back face inclination of the structure
Horizontal and vertical components of the active earth pressure become:
where:
o
a
- active earth pressure
o
- angle of friction structure - soil
o
- back face inclination of the structure
Active earth pressure - the Absi theory
Active earth pressure is given by the following formula:
where:
o
z
- vertical geostatic stress
c
ef
- effective cohesion of soil
K
a
- coefficient of active earth pressure
K
ac
- coefficient of active earth pressure due to cohesion
The program takes values of the coefficient of active earth pressure K
a
from a database, built
upon the values published in the book: Krisel, Absi: Active and passive earth Pressure
Tables, 3rd Ed. A.A. Balkema, 1990 ISBN 90 6191886 3.

The coefficient of active earth pressure K
ac
is given by:
for:
for:
- 308 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where:

- angle of internal friction of soil
o
- angle of friction structure - soil
|
- slope inclination
o
- back face inclination of the structure
Horizontal and vertical components of the active earth pressure become:
where:
o
a
- active earth pressure
o
- angle of friction structure - soil
o
- back face inclination of the structure
Active earth pressure total stress
When determining the active earth pressure in cohesive fully saturated soils, in which case
the consolidation is usually prevented (undrained conditions), the horizontal normal total
stress o
x
receives the form:
where:
o
x
- horizontal total stress (normal)
o
z
- vertical normal total stress
K
uc
- coefficient of earth pressure
c
u
- total cohesion of soil
The coefficient of earth pressure K
uc
is given by:
where: K
uc
- coefficient of earth pressure
c
u
- total cohesion of soil
a
u
- total adhesion of soil to the structure
Passive earth pressure
Passive earth pressure is the highest limiting lateral pressure developed at the onset of shear
failure by wall moving (penetrating) in the direction opposite to the direction of acting earth
pressure (minimal wall rotation necessary for the evolution of passive earth pressure is about
10mrad, i.e. 10mm/ m of the wall height). In most expressions used to compute the passive
earth pressure the sign convention is assumed such that the usual values of o corresponding
to vertical direction of the friction resultant are negative. The program, however, assumes
these values to be positive. A seldom variant with friction acting upwards is not considered in
the program.
The following theories and approaches are implemented for the computation of passive earth
pressure assuming effective stress state:
- 309 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The Rankin and Mazindrani theory
The Coulomb theory
The Caquot Krisel theory
The Mller Breslau theory
The Absi theory
The Sokolovski theory
The program also allows for running the analysis in total stresses.
Passive earth pressure - the Rankin and Mazindrani theory
Passive earth pressure follows from the following formula:
where:
o
z
- vertical geostatic stress
K
p
- coefficient of passive earth pressure due to Rankin
|
- slope inclination

- weight of soil
z - assumed depth
- coefficient of passive earth pressure due to Mazindrani
The coefficient of passive earth pressure K
p
is given by:
where:
|
- slope inclination

- angle of internal friction of soil
c - cohesion of soil
If there is no friction (o = 0) between the structure and cohesionless soils (c = 0), the ground
surface is horizontal (| = 0) and the resulting slip surafce is also plane with the slope:
,
the Mazindrani theory then reduces to the Rankin theory. The coefficient of passive earth
pressure is then provided by:
where:

- angle of internal friction of soil
Passive earth pressure o
p

by Rankin for cohesionless soils is given:
- 310 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where:

- unit weight of soil
z - assumed depth
K
p
- coefficient of passive earth pressure due to Rankin
Passive earth pressure - the Coulomb theory
Passive earth pressure follows from the following formula:
where:
o
z
- effective vertical geostatic stress
K
p
- coefficient of passive earth pressure due to Coulomb
c - cohesion of soil
The coefficient of passive earth pressure K
p
is given by:
where:

- angle of internal friction of soil
o
- angle of friction structure - soil
|
- slope inclination
o
- back face inclination of the structure
The vertical o
pv
and horizontal o
ph
components of passive earth pressure are given by:
where:
o
- angle of friction structure - soil
o
- back face inclination of the structure
Passive earth pressure - the Caquot Krisel theory
Passive earth pressure follows from the following formula:
where
:
K
p
-
coefficient of passive earth pressure for o = -, see the table

-
reduction coefficient for |o|<, see the table
c - cohesion of soil
o
z
- vertical geostatic stress
The vertical o
pv
and horizontal o
ph
components of passive earth pressure are given by:
- 311 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where:
o
- angle of friction structure - soil
o
- back face inclination of the structure
Coefficient of passive earth pressure Kp
Coefficient of passive earth pressure K
p
for o = -
o [] []
K
p
when |
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
10 1,17 1,41 1,53
15 1,30 1,70 1,92 2,08
20 1,71 2,08 2,42 2,71 2,92
25 2,14 2,81 2,98 3,88 4,22 4,43
-30 30 2,78 3,42 4,18 5,01 5,98 8,94 7,40
35 3,75 4,73 5,87 7,21 8,78
10,8
0
12,50 13,80
40 5,31 8,87 8,77 11,00 13,70
17,2
0
24,80 25,40
28,4
0
45 8,05 10,70 14,20 18,40 23,80
90,6
0
38.90 49,10
60,7
0
69,10
10 1,36 1,58 1,70
15 1,68 1,97 2,20 2,38
20 2,13 2,52 2,92 3,22 3,51
25 2,78 3,34 3,99 4,80 5,29 5,57
-20 30 3,78 4,81 8,58 8,81 7,84 9,12 9,77
35 5,38 8,89 8,28 10,10 12,20
14,8
0
17,40 19,00
40 8,07 10,40 12,00 18,50 20,00
25,5
0
38,50 37,80
42,2
0
45 13,2 17,50 22,90 29,80 38,30
48,9
0
82,30 78,80
97,3
0
111,0
4
10 1,52 1,72 1,83 .
15 1,95 2,23 2,57 2,88
20 2,57 2,98 3,42 3,75 4,09
25 3,50 4,14 4,90 5,82 8,45 8,81
-10 30 4,98 8,01 7,19 8,51 10,10
11,7
0
12,80
35 7,47 9,24 11,30 13,80 18,70
20,1
0
23,70 2,00
- 312 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
40 12,0 15,40 19,40 24,10 29,80
37,1
0
53,20 55,10
61,8
0
45 21,2 27,90 38,50 47,20 80,80
77,3
0
908,2
0
124,00
153,
00
178,0
0
10 1,84 1,81 1,93
15 2,19 2,46 2,73 2,91
20 3,01 3,44 3,91 4,42 4,66
25 4,28 5,02 5,81 8,72 7,71 8,16
0 30 8,42 7,69 9,19 10,80 12,70
14,8
0
15,90
35 10,2 12,60 15,30 18,80 22,30
28,9
0
31,70 34,90
40 17,5 22,30 28,00 34,80 42,90
53,3
0
78,40 79,10
88,7
0
45 33,5 44,10 57,40 74,10 94,70
120,
00
153,0
0
174,00
240,
00
275,0
0
10 1,73 1,87 1,98
15 2,40 2,65 2,93 3,12
20 3,45 3,90 4,40 4,96 5,23
10 25 5,17 5,99 6,90 7,95 9,11 9,67
30 8,17 9,69 11,40 13,50 15,90 18,5
0
19,90
35 13,8 16,90 20,50 24,80 29,80 35,8
0
42,30 46,60
40 25,5 32,20 40,40 49,90 61,70 76,4
0
110,0
0
113,00 127
,00
45 52,9 69,40 90,90 116,0
0
148,00 i88,0
0
239,0
0
303,00 375
,00
431,00
10 1,78 1,89 I 2,01
15 2,58 2,821 3,11 3,30
20 3,90 4,38 4,92 5,53 5,83
20 25 6,18 7,12 8,17 9,39 10,70 11,4
0
30 10,4 12,30 14,40 16,90 20,00 23,2
0
25,00
35 18,7 22,80 27,60 33,30 40,00 48,0
0
56,80 62,50
40 37,2 46,90 58,60 72,50 89,30 111,
00
158,0
0
164,00 185
,00
45 84,0 110,0
0
143,0
0
184,0
0
234,00 297,
00
378,0
0
478,00 592
,00
680,00
- 313 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Reduction coefficient of passive earth pressure
Reduction coefficient for |o|<
[] for |o|<
1,0 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,0
10 1,00 0,999 0,962 0,929 0,898 0,864
15 1,00 0,979 0,934 0,881 0,830 0,775
20 1,00 0,968 0,901 0,824 0,752 0,678
25 1,00 0,954 0,860 0,759 0,666 0,574
30 1,00 0,937 0,811 0,686 0,574 0,467
35 1,00 0,916 0,752 0,603 0,475 0,362
40 1,00 0,886 0,682 0,512 0,375 0,262
45 1,00 0,848 0,600 0,414 0,276 0,174
Passive earth pressure - the Mller Breslau theory
Passive earth pressure follows from the following formula:
where: K
p
- coefficient of passive earth pressure
c - cohesion of soil
o
z
- vertical normal total stress
The coefficient of passive earth pressure K
p
is given by:
where:

- angle of internal friction of soil
o
- angle of friction structure - soil
|
- slope inclination
o
- back face inclination of the structure
The vertical o
pv
and horizontal o
ph
components of passive earth pressure are given by:
where:
o
- angle of friction structure - soil
o
- back face inclination of the structure
- 314 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Passive earth pressure - the Absi theory
Passive earth pressure follows from the following formula:
where: K
p
- coefficient of passive earth pressure
c - cohesion of soil
o
z
- vertical normal total stress
The program takes values of the coefficient K
p
from a database, built upon the tabulated
values published in the book: Krisel, Absi: Active and passive earth Pressure Tables, 3rd Ed.
A.A. Balkema, 1990 ISBN 90 6191886 3.

The vertical o
pv
and horizontal o
ph
components of passive earth pressure are given by:
where:
o
- angle of friction structure - soil
o
- back face inclination of the structure
Passive earth pressure - the Sokolovski theory
Passive earth pressure follows from the following formula:
where: K
pg
- passive earth pressure coefficient for cohesionless soils
K
pc
- passive earth pressure coefficient due to cohesion
K
pg
- passive earth pressure coefficient due to surcharge
o
z
- vertical normal total stress
Individual expressions for determining the magnitude of passive earth pressure and slip
surface are introduced in the sequel; the meaning of individual variables is evident from Fig.:
Passive eart pressure slip surface after Sokolovski
Angles describing the slip surface:
- 315 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008

,
where:

- angle of internal friction of soil
o
p
- angle of friction structure - soil
|
- slope inclination
Slip surafce radius vector:
Provided that e < 0 the both straight edges of the zone r
1
and r
2
numerically overlap and
resulting in the plane slip surface developed in the overlapping region. The coefficients of
passive earth pressure K
pg
, K
pp
, K
pc
then follow from:
where:

- angle of internal friction of soil
o
p
- angle of friction structure - soil
o
- back face inclination of the structure
Auxiliary variables: i
pg
, i
pp
, i
pc
, g
pg
, g
pp
, g
pc
, t
pg
, t
pp
, t
pc
for:
- 316 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where:
For soils with zero value for the angle of internal friction the following expressions are
employed to determine the coefficients of passive earth pressure:
where:
Passive earth pressure total stress
When determining the passive earth pressure in cohesive fully saturated soils, in which case
the consolidation is usually prevented (undrained conditions), the horizontal normal total
stress o
x
receives the form:
where:
o
x
- horizontal total stress (normal)
o
z
- vertical normal total stress
K
uc
- coefficient of earth pressure
c
u
- total cohesion of soil
The coefficient of earth pressure K
uc
is given by:
where: K
uc
- coefficient of earth pressure
c
u
- total cohesion of soil
a
u
- total adhesion of soil to the structure
Earth pressure at rest
Earth pressure at rest is the horizontal pressure acting on the rigid structure. It is usually
assumed in cases, when it is necessary to minimize the lateral and horizontal deformation of
the sheeted soil (e.g. when laterally supporting a structure in the excavation pit up to depth
below the current foundation or in general when casing soil with structures sensitive to
non-uniform settlement), or when structures loaded by earth pressures are due to some
technological reasons extremely rigid and do not allow for deformation in the direction of
loading necessary to mobilize the active earth pressure.
Earth pressure at rest is given by:
- 317 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
For cohesive soils the Terzaghi formula for computing K
r
is implemented in the program:
where:
v
- Poisson ratio
For cohesionless soils the Jky expression is used:
where:

- angle of internal friction of soil
When computing the pressure at rest for cohesive soils o
0
using the Jky formula for the
determination of coefficient of earth pressure at rest K
0
, it is recommended to use the
alternate angle of internal friction
n
.
The way of computing the earth pressure at rest can be therefore influenced by the selection
of the type of soil (cohesive, cohesionless) when inputting its parameters. Even typically
cohesionless soil (sand, gravel) must be introduced as cohesive if we wish to compute the
pressure at rest with the help of the Poisson ratio and vice versa.
For overconsolidated soils the expression proposed by Schmertmann to compute the
coefficient of earth pressure at rest K
r
is used:
where: K
r
- coefficient of earth pressure at rest
OC
R
- overconsolidation ratio
The value of the coefficient of earth pressure at rest can be inputted also directly.
I nfluence of the inclined ground surface at the back of structure on earth pressure
at rest is described here.
Earth pressure at rest for inclined ground surface at the
back of structure
For inclined ground surface behind the structure (0< | s ) the earth pressure at rest
assumes the form:
where:

- angle of internal friction of soil
|
- slope inclination
o
z
- vertical geostatic stress
K
r
- coefficient of earth pressure at rest
For inclined back of wall the values of earth pressure at rest are derived from:
- 318 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where:
o
- back face inclination of the structure
o
z
- vertical geostatic stress
K
r
- coefficient of earth pressure at rest
Normal and tangential components are given by:
where:
o
- back face inclination of the structure
o
z
- vertical geostatic stress
K
r
- coefficient of earth pressure at rest
The deviation angle from the normal line to the wall o reads:
where:
o
- back face inclination of the structure
K
r
- coefficient of earth pressure at rest
Recommended design coefficients according to EC7- 1

m
- reduces the angle of internal friction (CSN) or its tangent (EC7-1) based on the
selection from the last column of block of coefficients (in right bottom section of
subform)

mc
- reduces the cohesion of soil

mv
- reduces the Poisson ratio (for the calculation of horizontal pressure at rest from
the theory of elasticity)

m
- reduces the unit weight of soil both in front of and behind the structure. When
performing the analysis with the help of limit state theory the unit weight of
embankments and backfills with unfavorable influence is increased, and with
favorable influence decreased. For soils in natural deposit we have
m
= 1,00.
In case of variable unit weight of soil it is more suitable to introduce a weighted
average of the unit weight or to use a qualified estimate accounting for its
effects.
Recommended design coefficients for ultimate limit state of permanent or temporary
design situations according to EC7-1
Case
1) Unfavorable
permanent
load
Favorable
permanent
load
Unfavorable
live load
tg
c
ef
i
A 1,0 0,95 1,5 1,1 1,3 1,2
B 1,35 1,0 1,5 1,0 1,0 1,0
C 1,0 1,0 1,3 1,25 1,6 1,4
1)
The design must be checked for each of the three cases A, B, C separately.
- 319 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Alternate angel of internal friction of soil
In some cases it appears more suitable for the analysis of earth pressures to introduce for
cohesive soils an alternate angle of internal friction
n
that also accounts for the influence of
cohesive soil in conjunction with the normal stress developed in the soil. The magnitude of
the normal stress for determining the value of alternate angle of internal friction depends on
the type of geotechnical problem, foundation conditions, etc. For deep seated foundation pits
or constructions in homogeneous or relatively simple environment the normal stress is
introduced in the centroid of the loading mass. In case of shallow pits or complex
environment the normal stress is assumed in the heel of the loading diagram see figure:
Determination of normal stress for alternate angle of internal friction of soil
n
The alternate angle of internal friction of soil is given by:
where:
o
z
- vertical geostatic stress

- angle of internal friction of soil

c - cohesion of soil
When computing the pressure at rest for cohesive soils o
r
using the Jky formula for the
determination of coefficient of earth pressure at rest K
0
, it is recommended to use the
alternate angel of internal friction
n
.

Determination of alternate angel of internal friction of cohesive soil
Distribution of earth pressures in case of broken terrain
Figures show the procedure of earth pressure analysis in the case of sloping terrain. The
resulting shape of earth pressure distribution acting on the construction is obtained from the
- 320 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
sum of triangular distributions developed by individual effects acting on the construction.
Principle of the earth pressure computation in the case of broken terrain
Principle of the earth pressure computation in the case of broken terrain for | >
I nfluence of water
The influence of ground water can be reflected using one of the following variants:
Without ground water, water is not considered
Hydrostatic pressure, ground water behind structure
Hydrostatic pressure, ground water behind and in
front of structure
- 321 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Hydrodynamic pressure
Special distribution of water pressure
Without ground water, water is not considered
Without ground water, water is not considered
In this option the influence of ground water is not considered.
Complementary information:
If there are fine soils at and below the level of GWT, one should carefully assess an influence
of full saturation in the region of capillary attraction. The capillary attraction is in the analysis
reflected only by increased degree of saturation, and therefore the value of
sat
is inserted
into parameters of soils.
To distinguish regions with different degree of saturation, one may insert several layers of the
same soil with different unit weights. Negative pore pressures are not considered. However,
for layers with different degree of saturation it is possible to use different values of shear
resistance influenced by suction (difference in pore pressure of water and gas u
a
- u
w
).
Hydrostatic pressure, ground water behind structure
Hydrostatic pressure, ground water behind structure
The heel of a structure is sunk into impermeable subsoil so that the water flow below the
structure is prevented. Water is found behind the back of structure only. There is no water
acting on the front face. Such a case may occur when water in front of structure flow freely
due to gravity or deep drainage is used. The back of structure is loaded by the hydrostatic
pressure:
where:

w
- unit weight of water
h
w
- water tables difference
- 322 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Action of hydrostatic pressure
Hydrostatic pressure, ground water behind and in front of
structure
Hydrostatic pressure, ground water behind and in front of
structure
The heel of a structure is sunk into impermeable subsoil so that the water flow below the
structure is prevented. The loading due water is assumed both in front of and behind the
structure. The water in front of structure is removed either with the help of gravity effects or
is shallowly lowered by pumping. Both the face and back of structure is loaded by hydrostatic
pressure due to difference in water tables (h
1
and h
2
). The dimension h
w
represents the
difference in water tables at the back and in front of structure - see figure:
Action of hydrostatic pressure
- 323 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Hydrodynamic pressure
Hydrodynamic pressure
The heel of a structure is sunk into permeable subsoil, which allows free water flow below the
structure see figure. The unit weight of soil lifted by uplift pressure
su
is modified to
account for flow pressure. These modifications then depend on the direction of water flow.
Action of hydrodynamic pressure
When computing the earth pressure in the area of descending flow the program introduces
the following value of the unit weight of soil:
and in the area of ascending flow the following value:
where:

su
- unit weight of submerged soil
A
- alteration of unit weight of soil
i - an average seepage gradient

w
- unit weight of water
An average hydraulic slope is given:
where: i - an average seepage gradient
h
w
- water tables difference
d
d
- seepage path downwards
- 324 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
d
u
- seepage path upwards
If the change of unit weight of soil A provided by:
where: i - an average seepage gradient

w
- unit weight of water
is greater than the unit weight of saturated soil
su
, then the leaching appears in front of
structure - as a consequence of water flow the soil behaves as weightless and thus cannot
transmit any loading. The program then prompts a warning message and further assumes the
value of = 0. The result therefore no longer corresponds to the original input is safer.
Special distribution of water pressure
Special distribution of water pressure
This option allows an independent (manual) input of distribution of loading due to water at
the back and in front of structure using ordinates of pore pressure at different depths. The
variation of pressure between individual values is linear. At the same time it is necessary to
input levels of tables of full saturation of a soil at the back h
1
and in front h
2
of structure
including possible decrease of unit weight o
y
in front of structure due to water flow.
Example: Two separated horizon lines of ground water.
There are two permeable layers (sand or gravel) with one impermeable layer of clay in
between, which causes separation of two hydraulic horizon lines see figure:
- 325 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Example of pore pressure distribution
The variation of pore pressure above the clay layer is driven by free ground water table GWT
1
.
The distribution of pore pressure below the clay layer results from ratio in the lower
separated ground water table GWT
2
, where the ground water is stressed. The pore pressure
distribution in clay is approximately linear.
The capillary attraction is in the analysis reflected only by increased degree of saturation, and
therefore the value of
sat
is inserted into parameters of soils.
To distinguish regions with different degree of saturation, one may insert several layers of the
same soil with different unit weights. Negative pore pressures are not considered. However,
for layers with different degree of saturation it is possible to introduce values of shear
resistance influenced by suction.
Uplift pressure in footing bottom
The variation of uplift pressure in the footing bottom due to difference in water tables is
assumed according to expected effect linear, parabolic or is not taken into account.
- 326 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Uplift pressure in footing bottom
I nfluence of tensile cracks
The program makes possible to account for the influence of tensile surface cracks filled with
water. The analysis procedure is evident from the figure. The depth of tensile cracks is the
only input parameter.
I nfluence of tensile cracks
Minimal dimensioning pressure
When determining the magnitude and distribution of earth pressures it is very difficult to
qualify proportions of individual effects. This situation leads to uncertainty in the
determination of earth pressure loading diagram. In reality we have to use in the design the
most adverse distribution in favor of the safety of structure. For example, in case of braced
structures in cohesive soils when using reasonable values of strength parameters of soil along
the entire structure we may encounter tensile stresses in the upper part of the structure see
figure. Such tensile stresses, however, cannot be exerted on the sheeting structure
(consequence of separation of soil due to technology of construction, isolation and drainage
layer). In favor of the safe design of sheeting structure particularly in subsurface regions,
where tensile stresses are developed during computation of the active earth pressure, the
program offers the possibility to call the option "Minimal dimensioning pressure" in the
analysis.
To determine the minimal dimensioning pressure the program employs for layers of cohesive
soils as the minimal value of the coefficient of active earth pressure an alternate coefficient K
a
= 0,2. Therefore it is ensured that the value of the computed active earth pressure will not
drop below 20% of the vertical pressure (K
a
> 0,2) see figure. Application of the minimal
dimensioning pressure assumes for example the possibility of increasing the lateral pressure
due to filling of joint behind the sheeting structure with rain water. If the option of minimal
dimensioning pressure is not selected the program simply assumes tension cutoff (K
a
> 0,0).

- 327 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Minimal dimensioning pressure
Earth - pressure wedge
Providing a structure with a cantilever jump (foundation slab of cantilever wall, modification
for reduction of earth pressures) is considered when computing earth pressures it is possible
to compute earth pressures acting either on the real back of structure with the inputted angle
of friction o s 2/3 or on an alternate back of structure. The alternate back of sheeting
structure replaces the real broken one by a slip plane passing from the upper point of the
back of wall towards the outer upper point of the jump and forms an earth wedge see
figure. A fully mobilized angle of friction o = is assumed along this plane. The weight of
earth wedge created under this alternate back further contributes to loading applied to the
structure. To introduce the alternate back of structure into the analysis it is necessary to
select in the program GEO5 Earth pressures the option "Consider developing of
earth- pressure wedge". In other programs the earth wedge is introduced automatically.
Calculation with and without earthpressure wedge
- 328 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Determination of earthpressure wedge in case of active earth pressure
The slip plane of the earthpressure wedge is inclined from the horizontal line by angle u
a

given by:
where:

- angle of internal friction of soil
|
- slope inclination
o
- angle of friction structure - soil

- unit weight of soil

o
- back face inclination of the structure
h - height of earth wedge
The shape of the earth wedge in the layered subsoil is determined such that for individual
layers of soil above the wall foundation the program computes the angle u
a
, which then
serves to determine the angle u
as
. Next, the program determines an intersection of the line
drawn under the angle u
as
from the upper right point of the foundation block with the next
layer. The procedure continues by drawing another line starting from the previously
determined intersection and inclined by the angle u
as
. The procedure is terminated when the
line intersects the terrain or wall surface, respectively. The wedge shape is further assumed
in the form of triangle (intersection with wall) or rectangle (intersection with terrain).
I nfluence of surcharge on earth pressures
The following types of surcharges are implemented in the GEO5 program:
- 329 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Active earth pressure Surface surcharge
Strip surcharge
Trapezoidal surcharge
Concentrated surcharge
Line surcharge
Earth pressure at rest
Surface surcharge
Strip surcharge
Trapezoidal surcharge
Concentrated surcharge
Passive earth pressure Surface surcharge
I nfluence of surface surcharge on active earth pressure
The increment of active earth pressure at rest due to surface surcharge is given by:
where: p - vertical uniform loading
K
a
- coefficient of active earth pressure
The vertical uniform loading p applied to the ground surface induces therefore over the entire
height of the structure a constant increment of active earth pressure see figure:
- 330 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
I ncrement of active earth pressure due to vertical
uniform ground surface surcharge
I nfluence of strip surcharge on active earth pressure
For vertical strip loading f
a
acting parallel with structure on the ground surface along an
infinitely long strip the trapezoidal increment of active earth pressure applied to the structure
over a given segment h
f
is assumed see figure.
Diagram of increment of active earth pressure due to strip loading f
a
This segment is determined by intersection of the structure and lines drawn from the edge
points of the strip loading having slopes associated with angles and 0
a
. The angle 0
a
corresponding to critical slip plane follows from:
The formula is described in details in section "Active earth pressure line surcharge".
Variation of pressure increment is trapezoidal; the larger intensity of Ao
fs
is applied at the
- 331 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
upper end while the smaller intensity of Ao
fi
at the bottom end. The two increments are given
by:
where: f
a
- magnitude of strip surcharge
b - width of the strip surcharge acting normal to the structure
h
f
- section loaded by active earth pressure increment
where:
0
a
- angle of critical slip plane

- angle of internal friction of soil

o
- angle of friction structure - soil
The resultant of the increment of active earth pressure due to strip loading f
a
is provided by:
where:
0
a
- angle of critical slip plane

- angle of internal friction of soil

o
- angle of friction structure - soil
f
a
- magnitude of strip surcharge
b - width of the strip surcharge
For non-homogeneous soils the program proceeds as follows.
I nfluence of trapezoidal surcharge on active earth pressure
The trapezoidal surcharge is subdivided in the program in ten segments. Individual segments
are treated as strip loadings. The resulting earth pressure is a sum of partial surcharges
derived from individual segments.
I nfluence of concentrated surcharge and limited surface
loading on active earth pressure
The concentrated load (resultant F due to surface or concentrated load see figure) is
transformed into a line load with a limited length. If the width of surface loading b is smaller
than the distance a from the back of wall (see figure) the alternate line loading f having
length 1+2(a+b) receives the form:
- 332 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where: F - resultant due to surface or concentrated load
a - distance of loading from the back of wall
l - length of load
b - width of surface loading
If the width b of surface loading is greater than the distance a from the back of wall (see
figure) the alternate line loadingf having length 1+2(a+b) and width

(a+b)reads:
where: F - resultant due to surface or concentrated load
a - distance of loading from the back of wall
l - length of load
b - width of surface loading
Alternate loading for calculation of increment of active earth pressure
For non-homogeneous soils the program proceeds as follows.
I nfluence of line surcharge on active earth pressure
Vertical infinitely long line loading f acting on the ground surface parallel with structure leads
to a triangular increment of active earth pressure applied to the structure over a given
segment h
f
see figure:
- 333 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Diagram of increment of active earth pressure due to vertical
line loading acting on ground surface
Action of the line surcharge is deterimened such that two lines are drawn from the point of
application following angles and 0
a
(corresponding to the critical slip surface), which is
provided by:
where:

- angle of internal friction of soil
c
- angle derived from the following formulas
where:
|
- slope inclination

- angle of internal friction of soil

o
- angle of friction structure - soil
o
- back face inclination of the structure
c - cohesion of soil

- unit weight of soil

- 334 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
h - assumed depth
For non-homogeneous soil and inclination of ground surface

|

smaller than the angle of
internal friction of the soil the value of the angle c is given by:
where:
|
- slope inclination

- angle of internal friction of soil

o
- angle of friction structure - soil
o
- back face inclination of the structure
The resultant of the increment of active earth pressure due to line loading f is provided by:
where:
0
a
- angle of critical slip plane

- angle of internal friction of soil

o
- angle of friction structure - soil
f - magnitude of line surcharge
For non-homogeneous soils the program proceeds as follows.
I nfluence of surface surcharge in non- homogeneous soil on
active earth pressure
For non-homogeneous soil we proceed as follows:
compute the angle u
a
for a given soil layer
determine the corresponding magnitude of force S
a
and size of the
corresponding pressure diagram
determine the magnitude of earth pressure acting below the bottom edge of a
given layer, and its ratio with respect to the overall pressure magnitude
the surcharge is reduced using the above ratio, then the location of this
surcharge on the upper edge of the subsequent layer is determined
compute again the angle u
a
for the next layer and repeat the previous steps
until the bottom of a structure is reached or the surcharge is completely
exhausted
I nfluence of surface surcharge on pressure at rest
An increment of uniformly distributed earth pressure at rest Ao
r
caused by the vertical
surface loading applied on the ground surface behind the structure is computed using the
following formula:
- 335 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where: f - magnitude of surface surcharge
K
r
- coefficient of earth pressure at rest
Diagram of increment of earth pressure at rest due to vertical
uniform loading acting on ground surface
I nfluence of strip surcharge on pressure at rest
Uniform strip loading f
a
acting on the ground surface behind the structure parallel with
vertical structure (see figure) creates an increment of earth pressure at rest Ao
r
having the
magnitude given by:
where: f
a
- vertical strip surcharge
o,o
1
,o
2
,
- evident from figure
- 336 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
I ncrement of earth pressure due to vertical strip surcharge
I nfluence of trapezoidal surcharge on pressure at rest
The trapezoidal surcharge is subdivided in the program in five segments. Individual segments
are treated as strip loadings. The resulting earth pressure is a sum of partial surcharges
derived from individual segments.
I nfluence of concentrated surcharge and limited surface
loading on pressure at rest
Application of concentrated load yields an increment of earth pressure at rest Ao
r
acting on
the vertical structure and having the magnitude of:
where: F - concentrated force acting on ground surface
x,z - coordinates evident from figure
- 337 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
I ncrement of earth pressure at rest due to vertical concentrated force
I nfluence of surface surcharge on passive earth pressure
For passive earth pressure only an increment due to vertical uniform loading f
a
is determined
using the formula:
where: f
a
- vertical surface surcharge
K
p
- coefficient of passive earth pressure
The vertical uniform loading q acting on the ground surface therefore results in a constant
increment of passive pressure applied over the whole length of wall - see figure.
I ncrement of the passive earth pressure
I nfluence of earthquake on earth pressures
Earthquake increases the effect of active pressure and reduces the effect of passive pressure.
The theories used in GEO5 (Mononobe-Okabe, Arrango) are derived assuming cohesionless
soils without influence of water. Therefore, all inputted soils are assumed cohesionless when
employing these theories to address the earthquake effects. Earthquake effects due to
- 338 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
surcharge are not considered in the program the user may introduce these effects
(depending on the type of surcharge) as "I nputted forces"
The coefficient k
h
is assumed always positive and such that its effect is always unfavorable.
The coefficient k
v
may receive both positive and negative value. If the equivalent acceleration
a
v
acts downwards (from the ground surface) the inertia forces k
v
W
s
will be exerted on the
soil wedge in the opposite direction (lifting the wedge up). The values of equivalent
acceleration a
v
(and thus also the coefficient k
v
) and inertia forces k
v
W
s
are assumed as
positive. It is clearly evident that the inertia forces act in the direction opposite to
acceleration (if the acceleration is assumed upwards

a
v
= -
k
v
*
g then the inertia force presses
the soil wedge downwards: -k
v
W
s
. The direction with most unfavorable effects on a structure
is assumed when examining the seismic effects.
For sheeting structures it is possible to neglect the effect of vertical equivalent acceleration k
v
W
s
and input k
v
= 0.
Sign convention
The seismic angle of inertia is determined from the coefficients k
h
and k
v
(i.e. angle between
the resultant of inertia forces and the vertical line) using the formula:
where: k
v
- seismic coefficient of vertical acceleration
k
h
- seismic coefficient of horizontal acceleration
Pressure from seismic effects
Increment of active earth pressure due to seismic effects (computed from the structure
bottom) follows from:
where:

i
-
unit weight of soil in the i
th
layer
- 339 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
K
ae,i
-
coefficient of active earth pressure (static and seismic) in the i
th
layer
K
a
-
magnitude of earth pressure in the i
th
layer due to Coulomb
h
i
-
thickness of the i
th
layer
k
v
- seismic coefficient of vertical acceleration
Reduction of passive pressure due to seismic loading (computed from the structure bottom) is
provided by:
where:

i
-
unit weight of soil in the i
th
layer
K
pe,i
-
coefficient of active earth pressure (static and seismic) in the i
th
layer
K
p
-
magnitude of earth pressure in the i
th
layer due to Coulomb
h
i
-
thickness of the i
th
layer
k
v
- seismic coefficient of vertical acceleration
Active earth pressure coefficients K
ae,i

and K
pe,i
are computed using the Mononobe-Okabe
theory or the Arrango theory. If there is ground water in the soil body the program takes that
into account.
The basic assumption in the program when computing earthquake is a flat ground surface
behind structure with inclination |. If that is not the case the program approximates the
shape of terrain by a flat surface as evident from figure:
Terrain shape approximation
Point of application of resultant force
The resultant force is automatically positioned by the program into the centre of the stress
diagram. Various theories recommend, however, different locations of the resultant force
owing to that it is possible to select the point of application of the resultant force in the range
of 0,33 - 0,7 H (H is the structure height). Recommended (implicit) value is 0,66 H. Having the
resultant force the program determines the trapezoidal shape of stress keeping both the
- 340 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
inputted point of application of the resultant force and its magnitude.
I nfluence of earthquake the Mononobe- Okabe theory
The coefficient K
ae
for active earth pressure is given by:
The coefficient K
pe
for passive earth pressure is given by:
where:

- unit weight of soil
H - height of the structure

- angle of friction structure - soil

o
- soil - structure angle of friction
o
- back face inclination of the structure
|
- slope inclination
k
v
- seismic coefficient of vertical acceleration
k
h
- seismic coefficient of horizontal acceleration

- seismic inertia angle

Deviation of seismic forces must be for active earth pressure always less or equal to the
difference of the angle of internal friction and the ground surface inclination (i.e. |). If
the values of is greater the program assumes the value = |. In case of passive earth
pressure the value of deviation of seismic forces must be always less or equal to the sum of
the angle of internal friction and the ground surface inclination (i.e. + |). The values of
computed and modified angle can be visualized in the output in latter case the word
MODI FI ED is also displayed.
Example of the program output
I nfluence of earthquake the Arrango theory
The program follows the Coulomb theory to compute the values of K
a
and K
p
while taking
- 341 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
into account the dynamic values (o
*
, |
*
).
For active earth pressure:
For passive earth pressure:
where:
|
- slope inclination
o
- back face inclination of the structure

- seismic forces inclination

The coefficients of earth pressures K
ae
and K
pe
are found by multiplying the coefficients F
ae
and F
pe
by the values of K
a
and K
p
, respectively.
where:
o
- back face inclination of the structure

- seismic forces inclination

If the value of the angle |
*
becomes larger than the program assumes the value (|
*
= ).
The values of computed and modified angle |
*
can be visualized in the output in latter case
the word MODI FI ED is also displayed. It is the user's responsibility to check in such case
whether the obtained results are realistic.
Example of the program output
I nfluence of earthquake water effects
When examining the influence of ground water on the magnitudes of earth pressure the
program GEO5 differentiates between restricted water and free water.
- Restricted water
This type is used in soils with lower permeability app. below the value of k = 1x10
-3
cm/s. In
such soils the water flow is influenced, e.g. by actual grains (by their shape and roughness)
or by resistance of fraction of adhesive water. General formulas proposed by
Mononobe-Okabe or Arrango are used to analyze seismic effects. The only difference appears
in substituting the value of the seismic angle

by
*
:
- 342 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where:

sat
- unit weight of fully saturated soil

su
- unit weight of submerged soil
k
h
- seismic coefficient of horizontal acceleration
k
v
- seismic coefficient of vertical acceleration
- Free water
This type is used in soils with lower permeability app. above the value of k > 1x10
-1

cm/s. In
such soils it is assumed that water flow in pores is more or less independent of soil grains
(e.g. turbulent flow in coarse grain soils). General formulas proposed by Mononobe-Okabe or
Arrango are used to analyze seismic effects. The only difference appears in substituting the
value of the seismic angle
e

by
e
+
:
where:

d
- unit weight of dry soil

su
- unit weight of submerged soil
k
h
- seismic coefficient of horizontal acceleration
k
v
- seismic coefficient of vertical acceleration
G
S
- specific gravity of soil particles
where:

S
- density of the soil solids

w
- density of water
Apart from dynamic pressure the structure is also loaded by hydrodynamic pressure caused
by free water manifested by dynamic pressure applied to the structures. The actual parabolic
distribution is in the program approximated by the trapezoidal distribution.
The resultant of hydrodynamic pressure P
wd
is distant by y
wd
from the heel of structure:
where: H - height of the structure
and its magnitude follows from:
- 343 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where:

w
- unit weight of water
k
h
- seismic coefficient of horizontal acceleration
H - height of the structure
I nfluence of friction between soil and back of structure
The magnitude of active or passive earth pressure, respectively, depends not only on the
selected solution theory but also on friction between the soil and the back of wall and by the
adhesion of soil to the structure face represented by the angle o. If o = 0 then the pressure o
acts in the direction normal to the back of wall and the resultant of earth pressure P is also
directed in normal to the back of wall see figure:
Distribution of earth pressure along structure for o = 0
Providing the friction between the soil and the back of wall is considered in the analysis of
earth pressures, the earth pressure o and also its resultant P are inclined from the back of
wall by the angle o. Orientation of friction angles o from normal to the back of wall must be
introduced in accord with the mutual movement of structure and soil. With increasing value of
o the value of active earth pressure decreases, i.e. the resultant force of active earth
pressure deviates from the normal direction see figure:

Distribution of earth pressure along structure for o = 0
The magnitude o can be usually found in the range of o s 1/3 to o = 2/3 . The values of
- 344 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
orientation of the friction angle o between the soil and the structure are stored in table of
values of o for various interfaces and in table of recommended values for ,o, / . The value of
o s 1/3 can be used if assuming smooth treatment of the back of sheeting structure (foil
and coating against ground water). For untreated face it is not reasonable to exceed the
value of o = 2/3 . When selecting the value of o it is necessary to reflect also other
conditions, particularly the force equation of equilibrium in the vertical direction. One should
decide whether the structure is capable of transmitting the vertical surcharge due to friction
on its back without excessive vertical deformation. Otherwise it is necessary to reduce the
value of o, since only partial mobilization of friction on the back of wall may occur. In case of
uncertainty it is always safer to assume smaller vale of o.
Table of ultimate friction factors for dissimilar materials
Values of the angle o for different interfaces (after NAVFAC)
Interface material Friction factor
tg(o)
Friction angel
o
Mass concrete on the following foundation
materials:

Clean sound rock 0,7 35
Clean gravel, gravel-sand mixtures, coarse sand 0,55 to 0,6 29 to 31
Clean fine to medium sand, silty medium to coarse sand,
silty or clayey gravel
0,45 to 0,55
Clean fine sand, silty or clayey fine to medium sand 0,35 to 0,45 19 to 24
Fine sandy silt, nonplastic silt 0,30 to 0,30 17 to 19
Very stiff and hard residual or preconsolidated clay 0,40 to 0,50 22 to26
Medium stiff and stiff clay and silty clay 0,30 to 0,35 17 to 19
Steel sheet piles against the following soils:
Clean gravel, gravel-sand mixtures, well-graded
rock fill with spalls
0,4 22
Clean sand, silty sand-gravel mixture, single size
hard rock fill
0,3 17
Silty sand, gravel or sand mixed with silt or clay 0,25 14
Fine sandy silt, nonplastic silt 0,20 11
Formed concrete or concrete sheet piling against the
following soils:

Clean gravel, gravel-sand mixture, well-graded
rock fill with spalls
0,40 to 0,50 22 to26
Clean sand, silty sand-gravel mixture, single size
hard rock fill
0,3 to 0,4 17 to 22
Silty sand, gravel or sand mixed with silt or clay 0,3 17
Fine sandy silt, nonplastic silt 0,25 14
Various structural materials:
Dressed soft rock on dressed soft rock 0,7 35
- 345 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dressed hard rock on dressed soft rock 0,65 33
Dressed hard rock on dressed hard rock 0,55 29
Masonry on wood (Gross grain) 0,5 26
Steel on steel at sheet pile interlocks 0,3 17

Friction between soil and the back of construction

Recommended values ,o, /
Material Concrete Steel Wood
Surface Smooth Roug
h
Smooth Rough Smoot
h
Rough
Loose noncohesive soil 0,85 0,9 0,7 0,8 0,75 0,8
Firm noncohesive soil 0,8 0,8 0,6 0,7 0,7 0,7
Dense noncohesive
soil
0,7 0,7 0,5 0,7 0,65 0,65
Silt 0,8 0,9 0,6 0,8 0,8 0,9
Clayey soil 0,8 0,9 0,5 0,7 0,7 0,8
Clay 0,8 0,9 0,5 0,6 0,6 0,7
Adhesion of soil
When performing the analysis in the total stress state it is necessary not only to use the total
shear strength parameters of soil
u
, c
u
but also to know the adhesion a of soil to the
structure face. The value of adhesion a is usually considered as a fraction of the soil cohesion
c. The typical values of a for a given range of the cohesion c are listed in the following table.

Common values of the adhesion of soil a
Soil Cohesion c [kPa] Adhesion a [kPa]
Soft and very soft cohesive
soil
0 - 12 0 12
Cohesive soil with medium
consistency
12 - 24 12 24
Stiff cohesive soil 24 - 48 24 - 36
Hard cohesive soil 48 - 96 36 46
- 346 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Parameters of rocks
Rock parameters of orientation with respect to strength of rock in pure compression
Compressive
strength of
rock
o
ci
[MPa]
Strength parameter of rock
after Hoek
m
i
[-]
GSI
[-]
Cohesion of rock
c
[kPa]
Angle of internal friction
of rock

[]
150 25 75 7000 - 13000 46 - 68
80 12 50 3000 - 4000 30 - 65
50 16 75 2000 - 4000 40 - 60
30 15 65 1000 - 2000 40 - 60
20 8 30 400 - 600 20 - 44
15 10 24 300 - 500 24 - 38
5 10 20 90 - 100 23 - 28
Unlike soils (both cohesive and cohesionless) the magnitude of the angle of internal friction
(sometimes refer to as the angle of shear strength) varies and depends on the current state
of stress in the rock body. Graphically it is represented by the angle of the tangent to the
envelope of Mohr circles constructed for the ultimate stress state. The value of gradually
decreases with the increasing value of stress o. If the elastic regime is exceeded (onset of
plastic deformation) we set = 0. As a representative value of the angle of internal friction
we denote the value
0
associated with the stress o = 0. In practical applications the part of
the Mohr envelope between tensile R
t
and compressive R
d
circles is usually replaced by the
tangent to both circles (see Fig.) The magnitude of the angle of internal friction then follows
from:
Determination
0
fromMohr circle
The angle of internal friction can be estimated by measuring angles of slip planes on
remaining parts of tested specimens together with the following formula:
Some values of orientation:
weathered sand conglomerate, lowly cracked 35 44
unweathered clay slate, medium cracked 30 - 40
unweathered tuff, medium cracked 33 42
- 347 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
unweathered diabase 39 50
unweathered phantanite, lowly cracked 45 52
Nailed slopes
The program "Nailed slopes" allows for the following verifications:
- verification of structure internal stability
- verification fictitious wall - the same as gravity wall
- verification of structure concrete cover
- verification nails bearing capacity
- verification of overall stability using the program "Slope stability"
Analysis of nails bearing capacity
For each nail the following bearing capacities are either computed or inputted:
R
f
nail cap bearing capacity
R
t
nail strength against breaking
T
p
pull-out nail bearing capacity
Strength characteristics of a nail represent the basic parameters to compute the actual
force in a nail.
The tensile strength of the nail follows from:
where: R
t
- strength against breaking
d
s
- nail diameter
f
y
- strength of nail material
SB
T
- factor of safety against breaking
The pull- out resistance is provided by:
where: T
p
- pull-out nail bearing capacity
d - hole diameter
a - ultimate bond strength
SB
p
- factor of safety against pull-out
The nail head strength is given by:
where: l - nail length
S
max
- maximum spacing of nails in a structure
R
t
- nail strength against breaking
T
p
- pull-out nail bearing capacity
Providing the nail is not anchored to the structure cap, it is possible set the nail cap bearing
- 348 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
capacity to zero.
Estimated bond strength
Estimated bond strength of soil nails in soil and rock (source: Elias a Juran, 1991)
Material Construction
method
Soil / rock type Ultimate bond
strength q
s
[kPa]
Rock Rotary drilled Marl / limestone 300 - 400
Phyllite 100 - 300
Chalk 500 - 600
Soft dolomite 400 - 600
Fissured dolomite 600 - 1000
Weathered sandstone 200 - 300
Weathered shale 100 - 150
Weathered schist 100 - 175
Basalt 500 - 600
Slate / hard shale 300 - 400
Cohesionless soils Rotary drilled Sand / gravel 100 - 180
Silty sand 100 - 150
Silt 40 - 120
Piedmont residual 40 - 120
Fine colluvium 75 - 150
Driven casing Sand / gravel
low
overburden
high
overburden
190 - 240
280 - 430
Dense moraine 380 - 480
Colluvium 100 - 180
Augered Silty sand fill 20 - 40
Silty fine sand 55 - 90
Silty clayey sand 60 - 140
Jet grouted Sand 380
Sand gravel 700
Fine - grained soils Rotary drilled Silty clay 35 - 50
Driven casing Clayey silt 90 - 140
Augered Loess 25 - 75
Soft clay 20 - 30
- 349 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Stiff clay 40 - 60
Stiff clayey silt 40 - 100
Calcareous sandy
clay
90 - 140
Note: Convert values in kPa to psf by multiplying by 20.9
Convert values in kPa to psi by multiplying by 0.145
Analysis of internal stability
An internal stability of a structure is checked assuming two types of a slip surface:
- plane slip surface:
Plane slip surface
- broken slip surface:
Broken slip surface
In both cases a specific slip surface is examined for a variation of angle .
When running an optimization analysis the calculation is carried out for all benches with a
variation of the angle of slip surface changing from 1 up to 89 degrees with a one degree
step.
A verification analysis of internal stability can be performed using either the factor of safety of
the theory of limit states depending on the setting in the frame "Setting".
The analysis checks whether a ratio of resisting and shear (driving) forces acting on a slip
surface is greater than the inputted factor of safety. The following forces are employed:
Shear forces:
- component of gravity force parallel to slip surface
- in case of broken slip surface component of active earth pressure
acting on vertical part of structure and parallel to slip surface
(pressure is determined without reduction of input parameters)
- horizontal forces due to earthquake
Resisting forces:
- soil friction and cohesion along slip surface
- sum of forces of transmitted by nails
- 350 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Force of transmitted by nails
The nail force is determined based on the location of its intersection with a slip surface. If a
nail is found completely in front of the slip surface, then it does not enter the calculation. If a
nail crosses the slip surface, then its force is determined as:
where: x - nail length behind slip surface in direction of soil body
y - nail length in front of slip surface
R
f
- nail cap bearing capacity
R
t
- strength of nail against breaking
T
p
- pull-out nail bearing capacity
Distribution of tensile force along nail
Factor of safety
The analysis checks whether a ratio of resisting and shear (driving) forces acting on a slip
surface is greater than the inputted factor of safety.
A factor of safety on the inputted slips forces is thus provided by:
- 351 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where: G - gravity force
S
a,sv
- vertical component of active pressure
S
a,vod
- horizontal component of active pressure
d
i
- length of i
th
section slip surface
d - length of slip surface
F
h,n
- bearing capacity of n
th
nail behind slip surface per 1m run
c
i
- cohesion of i
th
soil layer
|
i
- angle o internal friction of i
th
layer
u
- inclination of slip surface
o
- inclination of nails from horizontal direction
Theory of limit states
The analysis checks whether passive (resisting) forces F
p
acting on a slip surface are
greater than the active (shear) forces F
a
:

where: G - gravity force
S
a,sv
- vertical component of active pressure
S
a,vod
- horizontal component of active pressure
d
i
- length of i
th
section slip surface
d - length of slip surface
F
h,n
- bearing capacity of n
th
nail behind slip surface per 1m run
c
i
- cohesion of i
th
soil layer
|
i
- angle o internal friction of i
th
layer
u
- inclination of slip surface
o
- inclination of nails from horizontal direction
- 352 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Verification of bearing capacity of nails
This verification is required only in certain countries and is performed only when checked in
the frame "Setting". The magnitude of active earth pressure is reduced using a coefficient
K
n
, which can also be introduced in the frame "Setting". The recommended (experimentally
determined) value is K
n
= 0,85.
Forces transmitted by individual nails are determined such that a particular portion of the
calculated earth pressure is assigned to a given bench. Each nail is then loaded by the
corresponding portion of the active earth pressure.
Forces transmitted by individual nails
The nail force is provided by:
where: b - nail spacing
o
- nail inclination
K
n
- reduction coefficient
T
a,vod
- active earth pressure acting on a given bench
Dimensioning of concrete cover
The concrete cover of a nailed slope is designed to sustain an active earth pressure. To
that end, the structure is assumed to be subdivided into individual intermediate design strips.

In the vertical direction the nail cap is modeled as a support and joint between benches as
an internal hinge.
In the horizontal direction the program generates (by default) a structure with five
supports uniformly loaded by the magnitude of active pressure up to a depth of the nail cap.
The program further allows for the verification of concrete cover reinfocement of a structure
loaded by the bending moment.
A scheme of constructing a design model including loading is evident from figure:
- 353 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dimensioning of concrete cover
Analysis of walls
Verification analysis of walls can be performed with the help of:
- theory of limit states
- factor of safety
In addition, the bearing capacity of foundation soil is examined for both cases.
Following forces are used in the verification:
- weight of wall depends on the shape and unit weight of wall (for input use the "
Material" dialogue window) uplift pressure is introduced for walls found below the
ground water table
- resistance on front face when inputting the resistance on front face the corresponding
force acts as the pressure at rest, or passive pressure or reduced passive pressure
- gravity forces of earth wedges an arbitrary number of these forces may occur depending
on the shape of structure
- active earth pressure or pressure at rest acting on the structure the basic loading of
structure due earth pressures - depending on the selected option in the frame "Settings"
the pressure is computed either with or without reduction of input soil parameters.
- force due to water effects or pore pressure, respectively
- forces due to surcharge a single force corresponds to each inputted surcharge. If the
magnitude of force due to surcharge is equal to zero (the surcharge has no effect on a
structure) then it does not appear in the picture but only in the table listing.
- inputted forces forces entering the analysis are displayed
- forces due to earthquake several forces enter the analysis due to earthquake
increase of earth pressure acting on a structure, reduction of passive pressure on the front
face of a structure, or force due to free water behind structure
- 354 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- mesh overhangs and geo-reinforcements are displayed and included providing they
appear in the analysis
- base anchorage of wall
Geo- reinforcements, mesh overhangs
If mesh overhangs or geo-reinforcements are specified either for structure or blocks the
anchor forces are introduced in the analysis. Graphical representation of anchorage system is
evident from figure:
Scheme of application of mesh overhangs
Computation of the angle u
a
is described in chapter earth wedge.
Forces due to anchorage assume the form:
where: l
i
- length of mesh behind the slip surface to soil mass
T
pi
- bearing capacity per one meter run of mesh against pullout
from the soil
The program also makes sure that the force F
i
will not exceed the allowable tensile
strength of mesh (the default value for gabions is 40 kN/ m) or tensile strength of
georeinforcement R
T
, respectively. Strength R
T
is specified per 1m run of a wall (kN/m).
Hint: If a georeinforcement is rigidly fixed to an anchorage block, then the pull-out strength T
p
can be assumed as a large number the georeinforcement bearing capacity is then
controled by the tensile strength R
T
.
Base anchorage
An anchorage of wall footing can be specified for cantilever walls. It is necessary to specify an
anchor location, dimensions of a drill hole, and spacing of anchors.
Two limit states of bearing capacity are defined for an anchor bearing capacity against
pulling- out R
e
(kN/m) and strength of anchor R
t
(kN). Final force is determine as
minimum of these forces.
- 355 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Base anchorage
Bearing capacities can be either input or computed from the input values using the following
expressions:
where: T
p
- pull-out resistance
d - drill hole diameter
a - ultimate bond
FS
p
- safety factor against pulling-out
where: R
T
- strength of anchor
d
s
- anchor diameter
f
y
- yield strength of anchor
FS
T
- safety factor against pulling-apart
Approximate values of bearing capacity against pulling-out
Material Ultimate
bond
[N/ mm
2
]
Ultimate strength for nominated hole dia [kN/ m]
65 mm 75 mm 90 mm 100 mm 150 mm
Soft shale 0,21 - 0,83 42 - 169 49 - 195 59 - 234 65 - 260 98 - 391
Sandstone 0,83 - 1,73 169 - 350 195 - 407 234 - 486 260 - 543 391 - 562
Slate, Hard
Shale
0,86 - 1,38 175 - 281 202 - 325 243 - 390 270 - 433 405 - 562
Soft Limestone 1,00 - 1,52 204 - 310 235 - 358 282 - 429 314 - 477 471 - 562
Granite, Basalt 1,72 - 3,10 351 - 562 405 - 562 486 - 562 540 - 562 562 - 562
Concrete 1,38 - 2,76 281 - 562 325 - 562 390 - 562 433 - 562 562 - 562
- 356 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Verification limit states
After computing forces acting on the structure the program determines the overall vertical
and horizontal forces F
v
and F
h
, computes the forces acting in the footing bottom (normal
force N and tangent force T):
Forces acting in the footing bottom
Next the program performs verification for overturning stability and translation. For walls with
a flat footing bottom and specified jump it is possible to account for the wall jump either in
the form of pressure acting on the front face or by considering a wall with an inclined footing
bottom.

Check for overturning stability (the moment rotates around the point B of the wall - see
picture):
where: M
ovr
- overturning moment

s
- coefficient of overall stability of structure
M
res
- resisting moment
Check for slip:
where: N - normal force acting in the footing bottom

d
- design angle of friction structure-soil
c
d
- design cohesion structure-soil
d - width of wall heel
e - eccentricity

s
- coefficient of overall stability of structure
T - tangent force acting in the footing bottom
where eccentricity e:
- 357 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where: M
ovr
- overturning moment
M
res
- resisting moment
N - normal force acting in the footing bottom
d - width of wall heel
Verification - factor of safety
After computing forces acting on the structure the program determines the overall vertical
and horizontal forces F
v
and F
h
, computes the forces acting in the footing bottom (normal
force N and tangent force T):
Forces acting at the footing bottom
Next the program performs verification for overturning stability and translation. For walls with
a flat footing bottom and specified jump it is possible to account for the wall jump either in
the form of pressure acting on the front facel or by considering a wall with an inclined footing
bottom.
Check for overturning stability: (the moment rotates around the point B of the wall - see
picture)
where: M
ovr
- overturning moment
M
res
- resisting moment
FS - factor of safety against overturning
Check for slip:
where: N - normal force acting in the footing bottom

- angle of friction soil - structure

c - cohesion structure-soil
d - width of wall heel
- 358 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
e - eccentricity
T
- coefficient of overall stability of structure
FS - factor of safety against translation
where eccentricity e:
where: M
ovr
- overturning moment
M
res
- resisting moment
N - normal force acting in the footing bottom
d - width of wall heel
The "Settings" dialogue window serves to assign the factors of safety FS (standard values
are set to 1,5).
Accounting for wall j ump
Two options are available to account for the foundation wall jump in the analysis as shown in
the figure.
Options to account for wall jump
If the jump is assumed as an inclined footing bottom, then a new shape of the footing
bottom is considered and the structure front face resistance is included only up to a depth of
the wall front face.
If the jump influence is considered as a front face resistance the analysis assumes a flat
footing bottom (as if there was no jump), but the structure front face resistance included up
to a depth of jump. In such a case computation of the structure front face resistance must
also be inputted otherwise the jump influence is neglected.
The jump introduced below the wall foundation is always considered as a structure front face
resistance.
- 359 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Assuming wall jump in the middle
Dimensioning of masonry wall
Reinforced masonry is verified for loading due to bending moment, shear force and
combination of compressive normal force and bending moment. When loading due normal
force is considered, it is necessary to specify also the slenderness ratio S
r
.
Design for members in compression and bending
where: F
d
- the design compression force acting on the cross-section
|
- the capacity reduction factor - 0,75
k
s
- a reduction factor taken as 1,18 - 0,03 S
r
but not greater than 1,0
f
uc
- the characteristic uncofined compressive strength of masonry
f
m
- the characteristic compressive strength of masonry
A
b
- the bedded area of the masonry cross-section
f
sy
- the design yield strength of reinforcement
A
s
- the total cross-sectional area of main reinforcement
Design for members in bending
where: M
d
- the design bending moment acting on the cross-section of member
|
- the capacity reduction factor - 0,75
- 360 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
f
sy
- the design yield strength of reinforcement
A
sd
- the portion of the cross-sectional area of the main tensile
reinforcement used for design purposes in a reinforced masonry
member
the lesser of and A
st
f
m
- the characteristic compressive strength of masonry
d - the effective depth of the reinforced masonry member
f
uc
- the characteristic uncofined compressive strength of masonry
Out- of- plane shear in wall
A reinforced wall subject to out-of-plane shear shall be such that:
but not more than:
where: V
d
- the design shear force acting on the cross-section of the masonry
wall
|
- the capacity reduction factor - 0,75
f
vm
- the characteristic shear strength of reinforced masonry - 0,35 Mpa
d - the effective depth of the reinforced masonry wall
f
vs
- the design shear strength of main reinforcement - 17,5 Mpa
f
sy
- the design yield strength of reinforcement
A
st
- the cross-sectional area of fully anchored longitudinal reinforcement
in the tension zone of the cross-section
Bearing capacity of foundation soil
Verification analysis of the bearing capacity of foundation soil takes into account forces
obtained from all already performed verifications of the overall stability of structure (limit
states, factor of safety). To that end, the following relationships are used:
where: N - normal force acting in the footing bottom
d - width of wall heel
R
d
- bearing capacity of foundation soil
e - eccentricity
e
alw
- allowable eccentricity
- 361 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Wall dimensioning
After computing forces acting on the structure the program determines all internal forces in
the verified cross-section (normal force N, shear force Q and moment M) and then verifies
the cross-section bearing capacity employing one of the standards selected in the Frame "
Proj ect".
Only the forces found above the verified joint (see figure) are assumed for dimensioning.
These forces are not multiplied by any design coefficients.
Forces entering the analysis
The front j ump of wall as well as the back jusmp of wall is verified against the loading
caused by the bending moment and shear force. Stress in the footing bottom can be assumed
either constant (CSN) or linear (EC).
Assuming linear variation of stress in the footing bottom the distribution of stress is
provided by:
or when excluding tension:
where: e - eccentricity of normal force N
d - width of wall foundation
N - normal force acting in the footing bottom (see verification according
to limit states or factor of safety, respectively)
Bending moment and shear force are determined as reaction developed on the cantilever
beam as shown in figure:
I nternal forces acting on wall jump
Internal forces corresponding to constant distribution of stress in the cross-section are
- 362 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
provided by:
where:
o
- maximum stress in the footing bottom
d
v
- jump length
e - eccentricity of normal force N
d - width of wall foundation
N - normal force acting in the footing bottom (see verification according
to limit states or factor of safety, respectively)
Verification of the back j ump of wall (top tensile reinforcement in the wall jump,
respectively) is performed only in some countries and usually is not required. The programs
"Cantilever wall" and "Reinforced wall" allow in version 5.5 for designing the reinforcement in
the back jump of wall. The cross-section is then assumed to be loaded by the self weight of
structure, earth wedge, surcharge, anchorage force and the force associated with contact
pressure in the soil. Forces due to pressure are accounted for only if having a negative
impact. Forces introduced by the user are not reflected at all.
The cross-section is checked against the loading caused by the bending moment and shear
force.
I nternal stability of gabion
The internal stability of gabion wall can be examined with the help of:
- the theory of limit states
- factor of safety
Verification of joints between individual blocks is performed in the "Dimensioning" dialogue
window. The structure above the block is loaded by active pressure and corresponding forces
are determined in the same way as for the verification of the entire wall. A loose filling is
used in the analysis not hand-placed rockfill but its effect can be simulated using a very
high angle of internal friction. It can be assumed that after some time due to action of filling
aggregate the stress in meshes will drop down. Individual sections of the gabion wall are
checked for the maximum normal and shear stress. With the help of these variables it is
possible to modify the slope of structure face by creating terraces or by increasing the slope
of face of wall o.
Assuming loading applied to the bottom block is schematically represented as:
- 363 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Loading on the bottom block
Normal stress in the center of the bottom block is given by:
where: N - normal resultant of loading acting on the bottom block
B - width of upper block
e - eccentricity
M - moment acting on the bottom block
h - height of bottom block

- unit weight of the bottom block material

o
- gabion slope
Pressure acting on the wall of the bottom block is determined an increased active
pressure:
where:

d

- design angle of internal friction of the bottom block material
c
d
- design cohesion of the bottom block material

- unit weight of material of the bottom block

h - height of bottom block
- 364 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
B - width of upper block
o
- gabion slope
T - average value of pressure acting on face of the bottom block
o
- maximal normal stress acting on the bottom block
Widths of meshes of the bottom block per one meter run of the gabion wall are:
where: D
hor
- width of upper mesh between blocks loaded in tension
D
celk
- overall width of meshes loaded in compression T
v - spacing of vertical meshes
h - height of bottom block
The program allows for analysis of gabions with both simple and double mesh placed between
blocks. For double meshes the inputted tensile strength of mesh (the "Edit material"
dialogue window) should be twice as large as the value assumed for simple meshes.
Geometry of gabions
I nternal stability of gabion wall limit states
Reduced parameters of the gabion material, which depend on the coefficients set in the "
Settings" dialogue window, are used in the verification analysis.
a) Check for overturning stability:
where: M
ovr
- overturning moment
- 365 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
M
res
- resisting moment
b) Check for slip:
where: N - normal force acting on the upper joint of the bottom block

d
- design angle of internal friction of the bottom block material
B - width of upper block
c
d
- design cohesion of the bottom block material
Q - shear force
c) Check for bearing capacity with respect to the lateral pressure:
where: T - average value of pressure acting on the face of bottom block
S - force per one meter run joint
S
u
- joint bearing capacity (for input use the "Material" dialogue window)
b - width = 1m
d) Check for bearing capacity of j oint between blocks:
where: N
d
- tensile force per one meter run of the upper joint of the bottom block
N
u
- strength of mesh (for input use the "Material" dialogue window)
Q
tr
- shear force transmitted by friction and cohesion between blocks
K
t
- coefficient of reduction of friction between blocks (for input use the "
Setting" dialogue window default value is 0,66)
I nternal stability of gabion wall factor of safety
The following cases are assumed when examining the internal stability of the gabion wall
using the concept of factor of safety:
a) Check for overturning stability:
where: M
ovr
- overturning moment
M
res
- resisting moment
FS
ovr
- factor of safety against overturning
b) Check for slip:
- 366 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
c) Check for bearing capacity with respect to the lateral pressure:
where: T - average value of pressure acting on face of the bottom block
S - force per one meter run joint
S
u
- joint bearing capacity (for input use the "Material" dialogue window)
FS
mesh
- factor of safet y of st ressed mesh (for input use the "Settings"
dialogue window default value is 1.5)
b - width = 1m
d) Check for bearing capacity of j oint between blocks:
. .
t r t
Q k N t g c B = +
where: N
d
- tensile force per one meter run of the upper joint
N
u
- strength of mesh (for input use the "Material" dialogue window)
FS
mesh

- factor of safet y of st ressed mesh (for input use the "Settings"
dialogue window default value is 1.5)
Q
tr
- shear force transmitted by friction and cohesion between blocks
k
t
- coefficient of reduction of friction between blocks (for input use the "
Setting" dialogue window default value is 0,66)
Calculating abutment forces
OpraAn abutment is analyzed per 1m (1ft) run. All forces entering the analysis are therefore
adjusted in the program as follows:
the abutment self weight, assumed per 1m (1ft) run, is calculated from the inputted
transverse cross-section
reactions inserted by the bridge and the approach slab are inputted in kN (kpi)
using the values for the whole abutment, these values are in the analysis divided by
the abutment length
soil pressure is determined per 1m (1ft) run and then reduced by the ratio length of
load due to soil / abutment length,
weight of soil wedges is determined per 1m (1ft) run and then reduced by the ratio
length of load due to soil / abutment length,
surcharge is determined per 1m (1ft) run and then reduced by the ratio length of
load due to soil / abutment length,
- 367 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
inputted forces and front face resistance are assumed per 1m run without
reduction
wing walls the wing walls self-weight is computed from their geometry; before
introduced in the stem design and foundation verification it is divided by the
abutment length (it is the user responsibility to either include or exclude the effect
of wing walls in from the analysis).
Computation of individual abutment forces is described in more details in chapter " Wall
analyses".
All forces acting in the foundation joint that are introduced in the verification analysis (except
for the front face resistance) are reduced by the ratio abutment length / foundation
length.
Geometriy of bridge abutment
Sheeting design
Analyses in the program "Sheeting design" can be divided into three groups:
- analysis of anchor free walls (e.g. sheet pile wall)
- analysis of anchored walls fixed in heel
- analysis of anchored walls simply supported at heel
Analysis of braced sheeting is also available in the program.
Analysis of sheet pile wall
A sheet pile wall is analyzed using standard approach that account for effect of earth
pressures (in general, the active earth pressure develops behind the structure while the
passive earth pressure appears in front of the structure).
Based on the theory of limit states the program searches in an iterative way a point on the
wall to satisfy the moment equation of equilibrium in the form:
M
overturning
=M
resisting
Once this is accomplished, the program continues by determining the wall heel location for
which the equilibrium of shear forces is fulfilled (computation of depth of fixed end). This way
is found the overall length of the analyzed structure.
When applying approach based on the factor of safety the program searches in an iterative
- 368 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
way a point to get:
It is obvious that the distribution of internal forces resulting from this approach is not very
realistic. In some countries, however, this approach is required.
The computation can be driven either by choosing a minimal dimensioning pressure or by
reduction of passive pressure. Assuming the actual magnitude of the passive earth pressure
provides deformations of the analyzed structure, which cannot usually occur. The actual
passive pressure can attain for walls free of deformation the value of pressure at rest as well
as all intermediate values up to the value of passive pressure for fully deformed wall (rotation
app. 10 mRad i.e. deformation 10 mm per 1m of structure height). Therefore it is
reasonable to consider reduced values of the passive earth pressure setting the value of the "
Coefficient of reduction of passive pressure" to less than or equal to one. The following
values are recommended:
0,67 reduces deformations app. by one half,
0,5 approximately corresponds to deformation of structure loaded by increased active earth
pressure,
0,33 approximately corresponds to deformation of structure loaded the pressure at rest,
structure reaches app. 20 percent of its original deformations.
Analysis of anchored wall fixed in heel
Anchored wall fixed in heel is analyzed as a continuous beam using the deformation variant of
the finite element method such as to comply with the assumption of heel fixed in the soil. The
actual analysis is preceded by the determination of load due to earth pressure applied to the
structure. The pressure acting on the back of a structure is assumed as active pressure, while
the front face is loaded by passive pressure.
The passive pressure can be reduced with the help of the coefficient of reduction of
passive pressure. Assuming the actual magnitude of the passive earth pressure provides
deformations of the analyzed structure, which cannot usually occur. The actual passive
pressure can attain for walls free of deformation the value of pressure at rest as well as all
intermediate values up to the value of passive pressure for fully deformed wall (rotation app.
10 mRad i.e. deformation 10 mm per 1m of structure height). Therefore it is reasonable to
consider reduced values of the passive earth pressure setting the value of the "Coefficient of
reduction of passive pressure" to less than or equal to one. The following values are
recommended:
0,67 reduces deformations app. by one half,
0,33 deformations attain approximately twenty percent of their original values.
The program offers two options to determine active pressure:
- calculation from inputted soil parameters, water, surcharge, terrain including introduction
of the minimal dimensioning pressure
- inputting an arbitrary distribution of earth pressure up to the depth of zero point (this way
it is possible to introduce an arbitrary redistribution of earth pressure)
Zero-value point, i.e. the point at which the overall pressure equals zero is determined by the
following expression:
where: u - depth of zero-value point
o
a
- magnitude of active pressure behind structure at the ditch bottom
K - coefficient of overall pressure
- 369 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008

- unit weight of soil below the ditch bottom

The analysis of structure fixed at heel assumes that the point of zero loading N (at depth u) is
identical with the point of zero moment. For the actual analysis the structure is divided into
two parts an upper part (upper beam) up to zero-value point and a lower beam:
Analysis of anchored wall fixed in heel
The upper beam is analyzed first together with evaluation of anchor forces F and the reaction
force R at the zero-value point. Then, the lower beam length x is determined such that the
moment equilibrium condition with respect to the heel is satisfied (the beam is loaded by the
reaction R and by the difference of earth pressures). To satisfy the shear force equilibrium the
computed length of fixed end is extended by the value Ax as shown in figure:
Determination of the extension of the length of wall by Ax
Analysis of anchored wall simply supported at heel
Anchored wall fixed in heel is analyzed as a continuous beam using the deformation variant of
the finite element method such as to comply with the assumption of simply supported
structure at heel. The actual analysis is preceded by the determination of load due to earth
pressure applied to the structure. The pressure acting on the back of a structure is assumed
as active presure, while the front face is loaded by passive pressure.
The passive pressure can be reduced with the help of the coefficient of reduction of
passive pressure. Assuming the actual magnitude of the passive earth pressure provides
deformations of the analyzed structure, which cannot usually occur. The actual passive
pressure can attain for walls free of deformation the value of pressure at rest as well as all
intermediate values up to the value of passive pressure for fully deformed wall (rotation app.
10 mRad i.e. deformation 10 mm per 1m of structure height). Therefore it is reasonable to
- 370 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
consider reduced values of the passive earth pressure setting the value of the "Coefficient of
reduction of passive pressure" to less than or equal to one. The following values are
recommended:
0,67 reduces deformations app. by one half,
0,33 deformations attain approximately twenty percent of their original values.
The program offers two options to determine active pressure:
- calculation from inputted soil parameters, water, surcharge, terrain including introduction of
the minimal dimensioning pressure
- inputting an arbitrary distribution of earth pressure up to the depth of zero point (this way it
is possible to introduce an arbitrary redistribution of earth pressure).
Zero-value point, i.e. the point at which the overall pressure equals zero is determined by the
following expression:
where: u - depth of zero-value point
o
a
- magnitude of active pressure behind structure at the ditch bottom
K - coefficient of overall pressure

- unit weight of soil below the ditch bottom

For simply supported structures it is assumed that the moment and shear force are zero at
the heel. The program first places the end of a structure into the zero-value point, and then it
looks for the end beam location x, where the above condition is fulfilled (see Fig.). Solution
procedure for multiplied anchored walls is identical.
Analysis of anchored wall simply supported at heel
Sheeting check
The program evaluates the inputted structure using the method of dependent pressures. The
loading applied to the structure is derived from its deformation, which allows for realistic
modeling of its behavior and provides cost effective designs. The analysis correctly accounts
for the construction process such as individual stages of progressive construction of the
wall (stages of constructions) including gradual evolution of deformations and
post-stressing of anchors, makes possible to model braced sheeting.
The use of the method of dependent pressures requires determination of the modulus of
subsoil reaction, which is assumed either linear or nonlinear.
The program also allows the user to check internal stability of the anchorage system.
The actual analysis is carried out using the deformation variant of the finite element method.
- 371 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Displacements, internal forces and the modulus of subsoil reaction are evaluated at individual
nodes.
The following procedure for dividing the structure into finite elements is assumed:
- first, the nodes are inserted into all topological points of a structure (starting and end
points, points of location of anchors, points of soil removal, points of changes of
cross-sectional parameters),
- based on selected subdivision the program computes the remaining nodes such that all
elements attain approximately the same size.
A value of the modulus of subsoil reaction is assigned to each element it is considered as
the Winkler spring of the elastic subsoil. Supports are placed onto already deformed structure
each support then represents a forced displacement applied to the structure. Anchors, in
the load case at which they were introduced or post-stressed, are considered as forces
(variant I in Fig). In other load cases, the anchors are modeled as forces and springs of
stiffness k (variant II. in Fig):
Braced sheeting
The change of anchor force due to deformation is provided by:
where: v - horizontal distance between anchors
Aw
- increment of deformation at the point of anchor application
E - anchor Youngs modulus
A - anchor cross-sectional area
l - anchor length
k - anchor stiffness
o
- anchor inclination
Method of dependent pressures
The basic assumption of the method is that the soil or rock in the vicinity of wall behaves as
ideally elastic-plastic Winkler material. This material is determined by the modulus of subsoil
- 372 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
reaction k
h
, which characterizes the deformation in the elastic region and by additional
limiting deformations. When exceeding these deformations the material behaves as ideally
plastic.
The following assumptions are used:
the pressure acting on a wall may attain an arbitrary value between active and passive
pressure but it cannot fall outside of these bounds,
the pressure at rest acts on an undeformed structure (w=0).
The pressure acting on a deformed structure is given by:


where:
o
r
- pressure at rest
k
h
- modulus of subsoil reaction
w - deformation of structure
o
a
- active earth pressure
o
p
- passive earth pressure
The computational procedure is as follows:
- the modulus of subsoil reaction k
h
is assigned to all elements and the structure is loaded
by the pressure at rest see figure:
Scheme of structure before first iteration
- the analysis is carried out and the condition for allowable magnitudes of pressures acting
on the wall is checked. In locations at which these conditions are violated the program
assigns the value of k
h
=0 and the wall is loaded by active or passive pressure,
respectively see figure:
- 373 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Scheme of structure during the process of iteration
The above iteration procedure continues until all required conditions are satisfied.
In analyses of subsequent stages of construction the program accounts for plastic
deformation of the wall. This is also the reason for specifying individual stages of
construction that comply with the actual construction process.
Modulus of subsoil reaction
The following options are available in the program to introduce the modulus of subsoil
reactions:
- in the form of distribution (the assumed distribution of the modulus of subsoil reaction in
front and behind the structure is inputted)
- as a soil parameter with a respective value (either linear or nonlinear)
- according to Schmitt
- according to CUR166
- according to Mnard
- according to Chadeisson
- iterate using deformation characteristics of soils
The modulus of horizontal reaction of a soil body generally corresponds to spring stiffness in
the Winkler model describing the relation between load applied to a rigid plate and the
resulting soil deformation in the form:
where:
p
- load acting along plate-soil interface
k
- stiffness of Winkler spring
y - translation of plate into subsoil

- 374 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Definition of the modulus of subsoil reaction
Modulus of subsoil reaction according to CUR 166
The following table stores the values of the modulus of subsoil reaction derived from
experimental measurements carried out in Nederland (described in CUR 166). The table offers
secant modules, which are in the program directly transformed into secant modules of subsoil
reaction see nonlinear modulus of subsoil reaction.
k
h,1
(kN/m
3
)
p
0
< p
h
< 0,5 p
pas
k
h,2
(kN/m
3
)
0,5 p
pas
p
h
0,8 p
pas
k
h,3
(kN/m
3
)
0,5 p
pas
p
h
1,0
Sand
loose
medium dense
dense
12000 - 27000
20000 - 45000
40000 - 90000
6000 - 13500
10000 - 22500
20000 - 45000
3000 - 6750
5000 - 11250
10000 - 22500
Clay
soft
stiff
very stiff
2000 - 4500
4000 - 9000
6000 - 13500
800 - 1800
2000 - 4500
4000 - 9000
500 - 1125
800 - 1800
2000 - 4500
Peat
soft
stiff
1000 - 2250
2000 - 4500
500 - 1125
800 - 1800
250 - 560
500 - 1125
where:
p
0

- value ofpore pressure at rest in kN/ m
2
p
pas
- passive pore pressure inkN/ m
2
p
h
- horizontal pressure in kN/ m
2
corresponding to a given shift of a structure
- 375 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Diagram of determination of the modulus of subsoil reaction
Modulus of subsoil reaction according to Schmitt
This analysis draws on the relation between oedometric modulus and stiffness of the structure
introduced by Schmitt in Revue Francaise de Gotechnique n
o
71 and 74:
where: EI - structure stiffness
E
oed
- oedometric modulus
Modulus of subsoil reaction according to Mnard
Based on the results from experimental measurements (presiometer) of soil response loaded
by rigid plate Mnard derived the following expression:
where:
E
M
- presiometric modulus, if necessary it can be substituted by oedometric
modulus of soil
a
- characteristic length depending on a depth of fixed-end structure,
according to Mnard assumed at a depth of 2/3 of length of fixed-end
structure below final depth of sheeted ditch
o
- rheological coefficient of soil
Values of rheological coefficient of soil o:
Clay Silt Sand Gravel
Overconsolidated 1 2/3 1/2 1/3
Normally
consolidated
2/3 1/2 1/3 1/4
Non-consolidated 1/2 1/2 1/3 1/4
- 376 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Modulus of subsoil reaction according to Chadeisson
Based on measurements on sheeting structures in different soils and computation of a shift of
structure needed to mobilize the limit value of passive pressure R. Chadeisson derived
expression for the determination of the modulus of subsoil reaction in the form:
where:
EI
- structure stiffness

- unit weight of soil

K
p

- coefficient of passive pressure
K
0
- coefficient of soil pressure at rest
c

- effective cohesion
A
p
- coefficient of influence of cohesion (1 - 15)










Modulus of subsoil reaction derived from iterations
The program allows for automatic calculation of the modulus of subsoil reaction from
deformational characteristics of soil from iteration process. The procedure builds on the
assumption that deformation of the elastic subspace characterized by the deformation
modulus Edef [MPa] when changing the stress state associated with the change of earth
pressures is the same as deformation of the underground wall.
The goal therefore is to find such values of k
h
[MN/ m3] so that the continuity of deformations
of wall and adjacent soil is maintained. Plastic deformation of structure is not
considered when performing analysis with k
h
iteration. This approach is schematically
cleared by computing the modulus of subsoil reaction of the i
th
segment of wall free of anchor,
see figure:
- 377 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008

Determination of modulus of subsoil reaction of i
th
segment
For change of stress o
r
-o the program determines uniform loading o
ol
[MPa] of individual
segments of a structure. Next, the overall change of stress passing the i
th
segment (o
i
*l [
MPa*m]) is computed. This change is caused by additional loading of the soil body due to
segments 1 to n (o
ol,1
- o
ol,n
). The overall change of stress Ao
i
is reduced by structural
strength m
i
o
or,i
[MPa]. The new value of the spring stiffness then follows from:
where: Edef - deformation modulus of elastic subspace
o
ol
- uniform load applied to segments of structure
o
i
l
- overall change of stress behind i
th
segment of structure
The change of stress inside the soil body is determined according to Boussinesque. Inserting
the new value of k directly into the next calculation would cause instable iteration therefore
the value of k that is introduced into the next analysis of the wall is determined from the
original value of k
p
and the new value of k
n
of the modulus of subsoil reaction.
where: k
p
- original value of modulus of subsoil reaction
k
n
- new value of modulus of subsoil reaction
Maximum modulus of the subsoil reaction of the i
th
layer is limited by the value:
where: E
def,i
- deformation modulus of i
th
layer
The iterative procedure used when computing the modulus of subsoil reaction is as follows:
1) Determine the matrix of influence values for deriving change of stress in a depth of the soil
body passing the i
th
segment of a structure due to surcharge caused by the change of stress
in other segments.
2) The first approximation of the modulus k
h
in front of the wall is introduced a triangular
distribution of values at the wall heel k
h
= 10 MN/ m
3
is assumed.
- 378 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
3) Perform analysis of the wall.
4) Compute new values of k
h
and determine new values for the next analysis.
5) The dialogue window to check iteration appears and the program resumes till the next
command. If the next n iterations are selected, the steps 3 and 4 are repeated ntimes to
arrive again at the step No. 5. The analysis is terminated in this dialogue window by pressing
the "Stop" button.
This iterative process is controlled by the user her or she has to decide whether the results
make sense.
Verification of internal stability of structure
The internal stability of an anchorage system of sheeting is determined for each layer
independently. The verification analysis determines an anchor force, which equilibrates the
system of forces acting on a block of soil. The block is outlined by sheeting, terrain, line
connecting the heel of sheeting with anchor root and by a vertical line passing through the
center of anchor root and terrain. The analysis is performed per one meter run of a sheeting
structure. Anchor forces are therefore computed with respect to their spacing in individual
layers.
Analysis of internal stability
Scheme for verification of the i
th
layer of anchors is shown in figure. The force equilibrium for
the block ABCD is being determined. The following forces enter the analysis:
E
A
- resultant of active earth pressure acting on sheeting (on line AD)
E
Ai
- resultant of active earth pressure above the root of verified anchor (on line BC)
G
i
- weight of the soil block ABCD; in addition, this value incorporates the surcharge
p applied on the ground surface providing the slope q of slip surface AB is greater
than an average value of the angle of internal friction on this surface; in case of a
smaller slope of slip surface AB the ground surchage is not considered
- 379 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
C
i
- resultant of soil cohesion on slip surface AB
F
j
, F
k
,

- forces developed in other anchors; only some of them enter the equilibrium
analysis of the i
th
layer, whether a given anchor (say the m
th
one) will enter the
equilibrium of the i
th
block is determined as follows:
from two anchors m, i select the lower one, a plane slip surface, inclined
by 45
o
-
n
/2 from a vertical line, is placed in a body such that it passes
through the center of the selected anchor (lines ab and Bc in figure),
n
is
an average value of the angle of internal friction above the root of lower
anchor location of the root of anchor found above the inserted slip
surface is then decisive, if the i
th
root is found above the m
th
one and the i
th
root is located outside the block cut by the slip surface, then the m
th
anchor force is included into the analysis and vice versa, figure shows an
example in which the force F
j
is included while the force F
k
is excluded
from the stability analysis of the i
th
block
Q
i
- reaction on slip surface AB
F
i
force in the analyzed anchor, the maximum allowable magnitude of this force is
the result of the equilibrium analysis carried out for the i
th
block
Solution of the equilibrium problem for a given block requires writing down vertical and
horizontal force equations of equilibrium. These represent a system of two equations to be
solved for the unknown subsoil reaction Q
i
and the maximum allowable magnitude of the
anchor force F
i
. The stability analysis then provides a factor of safety for each layer of
anchors. The factor of safety for the i
th
layer of anchors is found as a ratio of the allowable
force in the i
th
anchor (derived from the equilibrium condition written for the i
th
block) and
the actual force in the i
th
anchor.
Braced sheeting
When analyzing braced sheeting the following approach is adopted to determine earth
pressures:
Up to depth of ditch the pressures are determined with respect to one meter run of the
structure width. Below the ditch bottom the earth pressures are multiplied by the coefficient
of reduction k (the "Coeff. of reduction of pressures below ditch bottom" can be
inputted in the frame "Geometry" as a parameter of the section of a structure) the
pressures are determined with respect to a reduced structure width k*b. In case of continuous
wall the coefficient is set to one and no reduction of pressures is assumed. If "Landing of
soil" above the ditch ("Excavation" dialog window) is inputted, then the pressures within
this section are computed with respect to the whole width of wall (k=1).
- 380 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Braced sheeting
The coefficient kcan be approximatelly determined (for safer design) according to:
where: m - longitudinal spacing of soldier
beams
t - width of soldier beam
Nonlinear modulus of subsoil reaction
Nonlinear model describes dependence of the modulus of subsoil reaction k
h
i.e. change of k
h
in between the threshold values corresponding to failure due to passive earth pressure T
p
and active earth pressure T
a
see figure (the modulus of subsoil reaction is given by slope of
the curve; for pore pressure at rest acting on a structure it is possible to consider the value
of k
h1
). This model also accounts for spring supports and forced deflections of the structure,
various boundary conditions, application of struts and anchors, etc.
- 381 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
I nteraction model to determine k
h
The values of the modulus of subsoil reaction can be derived subsequently from the values of
secant modules of subsoil reaction (CUR 166) see figure:
I nteraction model to determine k
h
- CUR 166

Slope stability analysis
The slope stability problem is solved in a two dimensional environment. The soil in a slope
body can be found below the ground water table, water can also exceed the slope ground,
which can be either partially or completely flooded. The slope can be loaded by a surcharge of
a general shape either on the ground or inside the soil body. The analysis allows for including
the effect of anchors expected to support the slope or for introduction of horizontal reinforcing
elements geo-reinforcements. An earthquake can also be accounted for in the analysis.
Two types of approaches to the stability analysis are implemented in the program classical
analysis according to the factor of safety and the analysis following the theory of limit states.
The slip surface can be modeled in two different ways. Either as a circular one, then the
user may choose either from the Bishop or the Petterson method, or as a polygonal one, in
which case the program exploits the Sarma method.
Soil body
The soil body is formed by a layered profile. An arbitrary number of layers can be used.
- 382 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Each layer is defined by its geometry and material. The material of a layer is usually
represented by a soil with specified properties. The geostatic stress in a soil body is
determined during the analysis.
A layer can be specified also as a rigid body. Such layer then represents bedrock or a
sheeting wall. The slip surface can never pass through the rigid body. When the Sarma
method is employed, it is not possible to specify a point of a slip surface below the rigid body
in such a case the program prompts an error message.
I nfluence of water
Ground water can be assigned to the slope plane section using one of the four options:
1. Ground water table
The ground water table is specified as a polygon. It can be arbitrarily curved, placed totally
within the soil body or introduced partially above the ground surface.
When using the circular slip surface the water influence is accounted for through the pore
pressure acting within a soil and reducing its shear bearing capacity. The pore pressure is
considered as the hydrostatic pressure. Assuming inclined slip surface the pore pressure is
determined by taking into account the actual shape of phreatic line. Below the ground water
table the analysis proceeds using the unit weight of saturated soil
sat
and uplift pressure;
above the ground water table the analysis assumes the inputted unit weight of soil . The
shear forces along the slip surface are provided by:
where: T - shear force along slip surface segment
N - normal force along slip surface segment
U - pore pressure resultant along slip surface segment

- angle of internal friction

c - cohesion
d - length of slip surface segment
When selecting the polygonal slip surface the unit weight of soil under water
su
is considered
and the corresponding equations of equilibrium are modified by adding the flow pressure J
written as:
where: A - block area

w
- unit weight of water
o
- inclination of section along given block
2. Ground water table including suction
Suction table can be introduced above the inputted ground water table. A negative value of
pore pressure U is then assumed with the region separated by the two tables. Suction
increases as negative hydrostatic pressure from the ground water table towards the suction
table.
3. Coefficient of pore pressure r
u
The coefficient of pore pressure r
u
represents the ratio between the pore pressure and
hydrostatic pressure in a soil body. The inputted unit weight of soil is used within the entire
slope regardless of the magnitudes of inputted coefficients r
u
. ..
The values of r
u
are introduced with the help of isolines connecting points with the same
value of r
u
. Linear interpolation is assumed to obtain intermediate values. Computation of
shear forces is then influenced in the following way:
- 383 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where: T - shear force along slip surface segment
N - normal force along slip surface segment
G - resultant of geostatic stress along slip surface segment

- angle of internal friction

c - cohesion
d - length of slip surface segment
4. Pore pressure values
Ground water can be introduced directly through the pore pressure values with the plane
section of a soil body.
The inputted unit weight of soil is used within the entire slope regardless of the magnitudes
of inputted pore pressure values.
The pore pressure values are introduced with the help of isolines connecting points with the
same value of pore pressure. Linear interpolation is assumed to obtain intermediate values.
The magnitudes of resultants of pore pressure are then derived from the values of pore
pressure obtained in specific points within the slope plane section.
Surcharge
The slope stability analysis takes into account even the surcharge caused by neighboring
structures. The surcharge can be introduced either as a concentrated force or distributed load
acting either on the ground surface or inside the soil body.
Since it is usually assumed that the surcharge is caused by the weight of objects found on the
slope body, the vertical component of surcharge having the direction of weight is added to
the weight of blocks (slices). It means that if the earthquake effects are included this
component is also multiplied by the factor of horizontal acceleration or vertical earthquake.
The components that do not act in the direction of weight are assumed in equations of
equilibrium written for a given block (slice) as weightless thus do not contribute to inertia
effects of the earthquake.
The surcharge is always considered in the analysis with respect to one meter run. Providing
the surcharge, essentially acting over the area b x l, is introduced as a concentrated force it is
transformed before running the analysis into a surface loading spread up to a depth of slip
surface along the slope 2: 1 as displayed in figure.
Scheme of spreading the concentrated load on the slip surface
The analysis then proceeds with the resultant of surface load p having the value:

Anchors
Anchor is specified by two points and a force. The first point is always located on the ground
- 384 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
surface; the force always acts in the direction of a soil body. The anchor force when
computing equilibrium on a given block (slice) is added to the weightless surcharge of the
slope.
Two options are available to account for anchors:
- Compute anchor forces analysis assumes infinite lengths of anchors (anchors are
always included in the analysis) and computes the required lengths of links anchors
(distance between the anchor head and intersection of anchor with the slip surface)
subsequently. The anchor root is then placed behind the slip surface. This approach is
used whenever we wish the anchor to be always active and thus contribute to increase
the slope stability and we need to know its minimum distance.
- Analysis with specified lengths of anchors the analysis takes into account only
those anchors that have their end points (center of roots) behind the slip surface. This
approach is used always whenever we wish to evaluate the current state of slope with
already existing anchors, since it may happen that some of the anchors may prove to
be short to intersect the critical slip surface so that they do not contribute to increase
the slope stability.
Georeinforcements
Georeinforcements are horizontal reinforcing elements placed in a soil body, which contribute
to increase the slope stability through their tensile strength. They have their exact location,
length and allowable tensile force. Providing a georeinforcement intersects the slip surface
the equations of equilibrium written for a given slice are modified by including the force
acting in the georeinforcement. No action is taken otherwise.
Scheme to account for georeinforcements
Forces due to anchorage assume the form:
where: l
i
- length of mesh behind the slip surface to soil mass
T
pi
- strength of one meter run of georeinforcement againts pull-out
The program further ensures the condition that the force F
i
cannot exceed the maximum
strength of the georeinforcement R
T
.
Earthquake effect
The program allows for computing the earthquake effects with the help of two variables
factor of horizontal acceleration K
h
or the coefficient of vertical earthquake K
v
.
Coefficient of vertical earthquake K
v
The coefficient of vertical earthquake either increases (K
v
> 0) or decreases (K
v
< 0) the unit
weight of a soil, water in a soil and surcharge by multiplying the respective values by 1+K
v
. It
- 385 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
is worth to note that the coefficient K
v
may receive both positive and negative value and in
case of sufficiently large coefficient of horizontal acceleration the slope relieve (K
v
< 0) is
more unfavorable than the surcharge.
Factor of horizontal acceleration K
h
In a general case the computation is carried out assuming a zero value of the factor K
h
. This
constant, however, can be exploited to simulate the effect of earthquake by setting a
non-zero value. This value represents a ratio between horizontal and gravity accelerations.
Increasing the factor K
h
results in a corresponding decrease of the factor of safety F
S
. The
coefficient of horizontal acceleration introduces into the analysis an additional horizontal force
acting in the center of gravity of a respective slice with the magnitude K
h
*W
i
, where W
i
is the
slice overall weight including the gravity component of the slope surcharge.
The following table lists the values of the factor K
h
that correspond to different degrees of
earthquake based on M-C-S scale.
M-C-S degree Horizontal acceleration Factor of horizontal
acceleration
(MSK-64) [mm/s
2
] K
h
1 0,0 - 2,5 0,0 - 0.00025
2 2,5 - 5,0 0,00025 - 0.0005
3 5,0 - 10,0 0,0005 - 0.001
4 10,0 - 25,0 0,001 - 0.0025
5 25,0 - 50,0 0,0025 - 0.005
6 50,0 - 100,0 0,005 - 0.01
7 100,0 - 250,0 0,01 - 0.025
8 250,0 - 500,0 0,025 - 0.05
9 500,0 - 1000,0 0,05 - 0.1
10 1000,0 - 2500,0 0,1 - 0.25
11 2500,0 - 5000,0 0,25 - 0.5
12 > 5000,0 > 0.5
Analysis according to the theory of limit states / factor of
safety
The verification analysis can be carried out according to the theory of limit states:
where: M
ovr
- overturning moment

s
- coefficient of overall stability of structure
M
res
- resisting moment
Soil parameteres (angle of internal friction, cohesion) are in this case reduced using the
design coefficients introduced in the frame "Settings".
When selecting the Sarma method (polygonal slip surface) the program computes the value
of utilization V
u
, which is then compared with the value of 100%. The value of utilization is
given by:
where: F
S
- factor of slope stability computed with reduced soil parameters
- 386 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008

s
- coefficient of overall stability of structure
The second option offers the verification analysis using the factor of safety:
where: M
ovr
- overturning moment
M
res
- resisting moment
FS - factor of safety for overturning
When using the Sarma method (polygonal slip surface) the factor of safety F
S
is computed
directly. Verification formula than receives the form:
where: F
S
- computed factor of safety
FS - required factor of safety
Polygonal slip surface - Sarma
The Sarma method falls within a category of general sliced methods of limit states. It is
based on fulfilling the force and moment equilibrium conditions on individual slices. The slices
are created by dividing the soil region above the potential slip surface by planes, which may
in general experience a different inclination. Forces acting on individual slices are displayed in
figure.
Static scheme Sarma method
Here, E
i
, X
i
represent the normal and shear forces between slices. N
i
,T
i
are normal and
shear forces on segments of a slip surface. W
i
is the slice weight and K*W
i
is the horizontal
force that is used to achieve in the Sarma method the limit state. Generally inclined
surcharge can be introduced in each block. This surcharge is included in the analysis together
with the surcharge due to water having a free water table above the terrain, with forces in
anchors. All these forces are projected along the horizontal and vertical directions, which are
then summed up into components Fx
i
and Fy
i
*K is a constant named the factor of horizontal
acceleration and is introduced into the analysis in order to satisfy the equilibrium on
individual slices. There is a relationship between K and the factor of slope stability F
S

allowing for its computation. In ordinary cases the analysis proceeds with the value of K
- 387 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
equal to zero. A non-zero value of K is used to simulate the horizontal surcharge, e.g. due to
earthquake (see below).
Analysis process
Computation of limit equilibrium
The computation of limit equilibrium requires the solution of 6n-1 unknowns, where n stands
for the number of slices dividing the soil region above the potential slip surface. These are:
E - forces developed between slices
N - normal forces acting on slip surface
T - shear forces acting on a slip surface
X - shear forces developed between slices
z - locations of points of applications of forces
l
i
- locations of points of applications of forces
K - factor of horizontal acceleration
5n-1 equations are available for the required unknowns. In particular, we have:
a) horizontal force equations of equilibrium on slices:
b) vertical force equations of equilibrium on slices:
c) moment equations of equilibrium on slices:
where r
x
i
and r
y
i
are arms of forces F
x
i
and F
y
d) relationship between the normal and shear forces according to the Mohr-Coulomb theory:
It is evident that n-1 must be selected (estimated) a priory. Relatively small error is received
when estimating the points of application of forces E
i
. The problem then becomes statically
determined. Solving the resulting system of equations finally provides the values of all
remaining unknowns. The principal result of this analysis is the determination of the factor of
horizontal acceleration K.
Computation of factor of slope stability F
S
The factor of slope stability F
S
is introduced in the analysis such as to reduce the soil strength
parameters c and tg. Equilibrium analysis is then performed for the reduced parameters to
arrive at the factor of horizontal acceleration K pertinent to a given factor of slope stability F
S
. This iteration is repeated until the factor K reaches either zero or a specified value.
I nfluence of external loading
The analyzed slope can be loaded on its ground by inclined loading having general trapezoidal
shape. This loading enters the analysis such that its vertical component (if having the
direction of weight) is added to the weight of a corresponding slice. This results in change of
both the slice weight and its center of gravity. Providing the vertical component acts against
the direction of gravity it is added to force F
y
i
. The horizontal component is added to force F
x
i
.
The load centroid is always assumed on the ground.
Optimization of polygonal slip surface
The slip surface optimization proceeds such that the program changes subsequently locations
- 388 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
of individual points of this surface and checks, which change of location of a given point
results in the maximal reduction of the factor of slope stability F
S
. The end points of the
optimized slip surface are moved on the ground surface, internal points are moved in the
vertical and horizontal directions. The step size is initially selected as one tenth of the
smallest distance of neighboring points along the slip surface. With every new run the step
size is reduced by one half. Location of points of slip surface is optimized subsequently from
the left to the right and it is completed when there was no point moved in the last run.
When optimizing the polygonal slip surface the iteration process may suffer from falling into
the local minimum (with respect to gradual evolution of locations of nodal points) so not
always the process is terminated by locating the critical slip surface. Especially in case of
complex slope profile it is therefore advantageous to introduce several locations of the initial
slip surface. Combination with the approach used for circular slip surfaces is also
recommended. Therefore, the critical slip surface assuming circular shape is found first and
the result is then used to define the initial polygonal slip surface.
The optimization process can be restricted by various constraints. This becomes
advantageous especially if we wish the searched slip to pass through a certain region or to
bypass this region. The restriction on optimization process can be performed in two different
ways:
1. Optimization constrains are specified as a set of segments in a soil body. The
optimized slip surface is then forced to bypass these segments during optimization.
2. Another way of constraining the optimization process is to fix location of selected
points along the optimized slip surface or allow for moving these point only in one
of two directions, either vertically or horizontally.
Changing inclination of dividing planes
It is evident from figure that the planes dividing individual slices do not have to be vertical
and not even mutually parallel. In the first stage of analysis when the optimization procedure
moves points along the slip surface assumes vertical alignment of dividing planes. To arrive
at even smaller value of the slope stability it is possible to change the mutual alignment of
dividing planes. This process is again performed in several runs with limited value of rotation
step and this step is again reduced in the course of optimization. This stage of optimization is
terminated once the rotation step drops below the value of 1
o
and no change of rotation
occurred during the last optimization run.
Static scheme Sarma method
- 389 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Foliation
Soils can be introduced with foliation. It means that along an angle specified in terms of a
certain interval, which in turn is introduced as one of the soil parameters <Starting Slope ;
End Slope> the soil experiences significantly different (usually worth) parameters (c a ).
If the slope of a slip surface segment or the slope of interface between blocks is assumed
within the interval <Starting Slope ; End Slope>, the analysis proceeds with the modified
parameters of c and .
Circular slip surface - Petterson, Bishop
The Bishop method is one of the classical methods based on the theory of limit states. It
draws on the assumption of circular slip surface. The method is based on fulfilling the
moment equation of equilibrium and the force equation of equilibrium written in vertical
direction. Planes dividing the region above the circular slip surface are always vertical. Forces
acting on a given slice are plotted in figure.
Static scheme - Bishop method
Here, X
i
are the shear forces acting between individual slices, N
i
are normal forces on
individual segments the slip surface. W
i
are weights of individual slices.
The Bishop method builds on the Petterson method, in which the factor of slope stability F
s
is
derived from:
where: u
i
- pore pressure within slice
c
i
,
i
- effective values of soil parameters
In addition, the Bishop method satisfies also the vertical equation of equilibrium.
It serves to determine the normal force acting on the slip surface:
Introducing this expression into equation due to Petterson provides more accurate expression
for the determination of the factor of safety F
S
:
- 390 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
In the Bishop method the difference between forces X
i

X
i+1

is neglected as it does not
significantly affect the result. The resulting expression for the evaluation of the factor of
safety assumes the form:
Ground water specified within the slope body (using one of the four options) influences the
analysis in two different ways. First when computing the weight of a soil block and second
when determining the shear forces. Note that the effective soil parameters are used to relate
the normal and shear forces.
I ntroducing anchor forces and water above the ground surface into the analysis
Anchor forces are considered as external loading applied to the slope. They are taken with
respect to one meter run [kN/ m] and introduced into the moment equation of equilibrium.
These forces should contribute to additional stability, if that cannot be achieved in a different
way. There is no limitation to the magnitudes of anchor forces and therefore it is necessary to
work with realistic values.
Influence of water above the ground surface is considered as a set forces acting on the
ground surface together with pore pressure along the slip surface, which is derived depending
on the depth of slip surface measured from the ground water table. The forces acting on the
ground surface enter the moment equation of equilibrium as forces acting on respective arms
measured towards the center of the slip surface.
The factor of safety F
S
is determined through the already introduced iteration process.
Optimization of circular slip surface
The goal of the optimization process is to locate a slip surface with the smallest factor of
slope stability F
S
. The circular slip surface is specified in terms of 3 points: two points on the
ground surface and one inside the soil body. Each point on the surface has one degree of
freedom while the internal point has two degrees of freedom. The slip surface is defined in
terms of four independent parameters. Searching for such a set of parameters that yields the
most critical results requires sensitivity analysis resulting in a matrix of changes of
parameters that allows for fast and reliable optimization procedure. The slip surface that
gives the smallest factor of slope stability is taken as the critical one.
This approach usually succeeds in finding the critical slip surface without encountering the
problem of falling into a local minimum during iteration. It therefore appears as a suitable
starting point when optimizing general slip surfaces such as the polygonal slip surface.
The optimization process can be restricted by various constraints. This becomes
advantageous especially if we wish the searched slip surface to pass through a certain region
or to bypass this region. Optimization constrains are specified as a set of segments in a soil
body. The optimized slip surface is then forced to bypass these segments during optimization.
I nfluence of tensile cracks
The program makes possible to account for the influence of tensile that appear on terrain
surface and are filled with water h. The only input parameter is the depth of tensile cracks.
The effect of cracks is incorporated when calculating normal and shear forces in sections of a
slip surface containing cracks in a section with tensile cracks the shear strength parameters
are set to zero (c = 0, = 0). Next, a horizontal force F due to presence water in a tensile
- 391 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
crack is introduced in the analysis (see figure):
Vliv tahovch trhlin
Analysis of bearing capacity of foundation
The vertical bearing capacity of foundation soil is verified according to the theory of limit
states using the following inequality:

or based on the factor of safety as:
where:
o -
extreme design contact stress in the footing bottom
R
d
-
design bearing capacity of foundation soil

RV

-
coefficient of vertical bearing capacity of foundation (for input use the
frame "Settings")
FS -
inputted factor of safety
Extreme design contact stress in the footing bottom is assumed the form:
where: V
de
- extreme design vertical force
A
ef
- effective area of foundation
The vertical bearing capacity of foundation soil R
d
is determined for three basic types of
foundation conditions:
- drained subsoil
- undrained subsoil
- bedrock
The above computations are applicable only for the homogeneous soil. If there is a
non-homogeneous soil under the footing bottom (or there is ground water present), then the
inserted profile is transformed into a homogeneous one.
Bearing capacity on drained subsoil
One of the following approaches is available to assess the horizontal bearing capacity of a
foundation if drained conditions are assumed:
- standard analysis
- according to CSN 731001 "Zkladov pda pod plonmi zklady" approved 8.6. 1987
- according to Polish standard PN-81 B - 03020 "Grunty budowiane, Posudowienie
- 392 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
bezporednie budowli, Obliczenia statyczne i projekktowanie" from year 1982
- according to Indian standard IS:6403-1981 "Code of Practice for Determination of Bearing
Capacity of Shallow Foundations" from year 1981
- according to EC 7-1 (EN 1997-1:2003) "Design of geotechnical structures Part 1: General
rules"
- according to NCMA Segmental retaining walls manual, second edition.
All approaches incorporate coefficients due to Brinch Hansen (see standard analysis) to
account for inclined ground surface and inclined footing bottom.
Assuming drained conditions during construction the soil below spread footing deforms
including both shear and volumetric deformations. In such a case the strength of soil is
assumed in terms of effective values of the angle of internal friction
ef
and the effective
cohesion c
ef
. It is also assumed that there is an effective stress in the soil equal to the total
stress (consolidated state). Effective parameters
ef
, c
ef
represent the peak strength
parameters.
Owing to the fact that the choice of drained conditions depends on a number of factors (rate
of loading, soil permeability, degree of saturations and degree of overconsolidation) it is the
designer's responsibility to decide, depending on the actual problem being solved, if the
effective parameters should be used.
Standard analysis of bearing capacity of foundation on
drained subsoil
By default the solution proposed by J. Brinch Hansena is used, where the bearing capacity
of foundation soil follows from:
where:
coefficients of bearing capacity:
for: > 0
for: = 0
coefficients of shape of foundation:
coefficients of influence of depth of foundation:
- 393 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
coefficients of slope of loading:
coefficients of slope of footing bottom:
coefficients of influence of slope of terrain:
Notation of angels and coefficients b,g
where: c - cohesion of soil
q
0
- equivalent uniform loading accounting for the influence of
foundation depth
d - depth of footing bottom

- unit weight of soil above the footing bottom

b - width of foundation

- objemov tha zeminy

N
c
,N
d
,N
b
- coefficient of bearing capacity
s
c
,s
d
,s
b
- coefficients of shape of foundation
d
c
,d
d
,d
b
- coefficients of influence of depth of foundation
i
c
,i
d
,i
b
- coefficients of influence of slope of loading
g
c
,g
d
,g
b
- coefficients of influence of slope of terrain

- angle of internal friction of soil

l - length of foundation
o
- angle of deviation of the resultant force from the vertical
direction
|
- slope of terrain
o
- slope of footing bottom
Bearing capacity on undrained subsoil
One of the following approaches is available to assess the horizontal bearing capacity of a
foundation if undrained conditions are assumed:
- standard analysis
- according to CSN 731001 "Zkladov pda pod plonmi zklady" approved 8.6. 1987
- according to Indian standard IS:6403-1981 "Code of Practice for Determination of Bearing
- 394 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Capacity of Shallow Foundations" from year 1981
- according to EC 7-1 (EN 1997-1:2003) "Design of geotechnical structures Part 1: General
rules"
In addition the coefficients due to Brinch Hansen are used to account for inclined footing
bottom (see standard analysis).
In case of undrained conditions it is assumed that during construction the spread footing
undergoes an instantaneous settlement accompanied by shear deformations of soil in absence
of volumetric changes. When the structure is completed the soil experiences both primary
and secondary consolidation accompanied by volumetric changes. The influence of neutral
stress appears in the reduction of soil strength. The strength of soil is then presented in
terms of total values of the angle of internal friction
u
and the total cohesion c
u
(these
parameters can be considered as the minimal ones). Depending on the degree of
consolidation the value of the total angle of internal friction
u
ranges from 0 to
ef
, the total
cohesion c
u
is greater than c
ef
. Owing to the fact that the choice of undrained conditions
depends on a number of factors (rate of loading, soil permeability, degree of saturations and
degree of overconsolidation) it is the designer's responsibility to decide, depending on the
actual problem being solved, if the effective parameters should be used. Nevertheless, the
total parameters are generally used for fine-grained soil.
Standard analysis of bearing capacity of foundation on
undrained subsoil
The following formula is used by default:
with dimensionless coefficients:
where: c
u
- total cohesion of soil
b - width of foundation
l - length of foundation
d - depth of foundation
o
- angle of deviation of the resultant force from the vertical
direction
o
- slope of footing bottom from horizontal direction
Bearing capacity of foundation on bedrock
The following methods can be used to compute the design bearing capacity R
d
of foundation
with a horizontal footing bottom providing the rock mass composed of rocks or weak rocks:
Standard approach
Solution according to CSN 73 1001
Solution according to EC7
- 395 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Standard analysis of bearing capacity of foundation on
bedrock
The bearing capacity of foundation soil composed of rocks or weak rocks is found from the
expression proposed by Xiao-Li Yang and Jian-Hua Yin
1
:
where:
where: s - nonlinear parameter depending on rock properties (according to
Hoek and Brown)
GSI - Geological Strength Index
D - coefficient reflecting damage of a rock mass
N
s
,N
q
,N

- coefficients of bearing capacity depending on the angle of internal
friction
N
s
- coefficient of strength of a rock depending on GSI and strength
parameter m
i

- angle of internal friction of rock
o
c
- uniaxial compressive strength of rock > 0,5 MPa
q
0
- equivalent uniform loading accounting for the influence of
foundation depth

2

- unit weight of soil above the footing bottom
b - width of foundation
1
Xiao-Li Yang, Jian-Hua Yin: Upper bound solution for ultimate bearing capacity with a
modified HoekBrown failure criterion, International Journal of Rock Mechanics & Mining
Sciences 42 (2005),str. 550560
Analysis of bearing capacity of foundation on bedrock
according to CSN 73 1001
The bearing capacity of foundation soil composed of rocks or weak rocks follows from articles
97 99 of standard CSN 73 1001 "Foundation soil below spread footing" approved 8.6.
1987.
As input parameters the analysis requires the unit weight of soil , uniaxial compression
strength o
c
, Poisson's ratio v and deformation modulus E
def
.
Analysis of bearing capacity of foundation on bedrock
according to EC 7- 1
The bearing capacity of the foundation R
d
with a horizontal footing bottom is determined
- 396 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
according to a design method for the derivation of expected bearing capacity of spread
footings resting on a bedrock outlined in a supplement G (informative) EC 7-1 (EN
1997-1:2003) "Design of geotechnical structures Part 1: General rules". For low strength or
damaged rocks with closed discontinuities including chalks with low porosity less than 35%
the derivation of expected bearing capacity follows classification of rocks into groups of rocks
stored in the table below. The analysis further requires an input of discontinuity spacing S
d
,
unit weight of rock , Poisson's ratio v and uniaxial compressive strength o
c
. It is assumed
that the structure is able to transmit a settlement equal to 0,5 %of the foundation width.
The expected values of bearing capacity for other settlements can be estimated using direct
proportion. For weak and broken rocks with opened or filled discontinuities it is recommended
to use lower values than the expected ones.
Rock groups
Group Type of rock
1 Pure limestones and dolomites
Carbonate sandstones of low porosity
2 Igneous
Oolitic and marly limestones
Well cemented sandstones
Indurated carbonate mudstones
Metamorphic rocks, including slates and schist (flat
cleavage / foliation)
3 Very marly limestones
Poorly cemented sandstones
Slates and schist (steep cleavage / foliation)
4 Uncemented mudstones and shales
Parameters to compute foundation bearing capacity
Parameters to compute vertical bearing capacity of a fondation resting on bedrock
The following parameters are used in program GEO5 to compute the foundation vertical
bearing capacity:
- values of coefficient D reflecting a state of damage of a rock mass
- values of strength parameter m
i

- strength of rocks in simple compression o
c
- Poisson's ration of rocks v
- bulk weight of rocks
Estimating disturbance coefficient D
Description of rock mass Suggested value of D
Rock mass, intact strong rock, excavation by
blasting or by open TBM
0
Rock mass, poor quality rock, mechanical
excavation with minimal disturbance
0
- 397 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Rock mass, poor rock, mechanical excavation,
significant floor heave, temporary invert or
horizontal geometry of excavation sequence
0,5
Rock mass,very poor rock often very altered,
rock very , local damage of surrounding rock
(app. 3 m )
0,8
Rock slope or rock outcrop, modification with
controled blasting
0,7
Rock slope or rock outcrop, modification with
blasting results to the some disturbance
1,0
Open pit mines, excavatin with blasting 1,0
Open pit mines, mechanical excavation 0,7
Values of strength parameter m
i

Type of rock Representatiiv rocks m
i
[-]
Carbonate rocks with well
developed cleavage
Dolomite, limestone and
marble
~ 7
Lithified argillaceous rocks Mudstone, siltsone shale,
slate
~ 10
Arenaceous rock with
strong crystal and poorly
developed crystal cleavage
Sandstone and qurtzite ~ 15
Fine grained polyminerallic
igneous crystalline rocks
Andesite, dolerite, diabase,
ryolite
~ 17
Coarse grained
polyminerallic igneous and
metamorphic rocks
Amphibolite, gabbro,
gneiss, granite and quartz
diorite
~ 25
Uniaxial compressive strength o
c ,
Poisson number v and Unit weight of rock
Strength
of rocks
Types of rock (examples) Uniaxial
compr.
strength

o
c
[MPa]
Poisson
number
v
Unit weight of rock

[kN/m
3
]0
Extremly
hard
rock
Very hard, intact rock strong
and solid quartzite, basalt
and other extremely hard
rock
>150 0,1 28,00 - 30,00
Very
hard
rock
Very hard granite, quartz
porphyry, quartz slate, very
hard sandstones and
limestones
100 -
150
0,15 26,00 - 27,00
- 398 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Hard
rock
Solid and compact granite,
very hard sandstone and
limestone, silicious iron veis,
hard pudding stones, very
hard iron ores hard calcite,
not very hard granite, hard
sandstone, marble,
dolomite, pyrite
80 - 100 0,20 25,00 - 26,00
Fairly
hard
rock
Normal sandstone, medium
hard iron ore, sandy shale,
flagstone
50 - 80 0,25 24,00
Medium
hard
rock
Hard mudstones, not very
hard sandstones and calcite,
soft flagstone, not very hard
shales, dense marl
20 - 50 0,25
0,30
23 - 24,00
Fairly
weak
rock
Soft schist, soft limestones,
chalk, rock salt, frost soils,
anthracite, normal marl,
disturbed sandstones, soft
flagstones and soils with
aggregates
5 - 20 0,3
0,35
22,00 26,00
Weak
rock
Compact clay, hard soil
(eluvium with soil texture)
0,5 - 5 0,35
0,40
22,00 - 18,0
Horizontal bearing capacity of foundation
The foundation horizontal bearing capacity is verified according to the theory of limit states
using the following inequality:
or based on the factor of safety as:
where:
where:

d
- angle of internal friction between foundation and soil
a
d
- cohesion between foundation and soil
A
ef
- effective area of foundation
S
pd
- earth resistance
H
x
,H
y
- components of horizontal force
Q - extreme design vertical force

RH
- coefficient of horizontal bearing capacity of foundation (for input use
the frame "Settings"
FS - factor of safety
The analysis depends on the design angle of internal friction below the footing bottom
d
, the
- 399 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
design value of cohesion below the footing bottom c
d
and the design value of earth resistance
S
pd
. If the soil-footing frictional angle and the soil-footing cohesion are less than the values
of soil below the footing bottom, then it is necessary to use those values.
The earth resistance is assumed as displayed in figure:
Earth resistance
The earth resistance S
pd
is found with the help of the reduction of passive earth pressure or
pressure at rest employing influence coefficients:
where: S
p
- passive earth pressure, pressure at rest or reduced passive pressure

mR
- coefficient of reduction of earth resistance (for input used the frame "
Settings") - for the analysis according to CSN it assumes the value
mR

= 1,5 for passive pressure,
mR
= 1,3 for pressure at rest
Coefficients of earth pressures are found from the following formulas:
for passive pressure:
for pressure at rest in drained soils:
for pressure at rest in other soils:
When determining the reduced passive pressure, the resultant force includes contributions
due to the passive pressure and pressure at rest.
The passive pressure can be considered, if the deformation needed for its activation do not
cause unallowable stresses or deformations in upper structure.
Homogenization of layered subsoil
If the soil below the footing bottom is inhomogeneous (or if there is ground water present)
then the inputted profile is transformed into a homogeneous soil based on the Prandtl slip
surface (see Fig.), which represents the type and location of failure of the foundation.
- 400 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The Prandtl slip surface
Determination of equivalent values of (angle of internal friction), c (cohesion of soil) (unit
weight of soil below footing bottom) is evident from the following and subsequent formulas.
The unit weight of soil above foundation is derived in the same way.
Procedure for computation of auxiliary values
Effective area
When solving the problem of eccentrically loaded foundations the program GEO5 offers two
options to deal with an effective dimension of the foundation area:
- 401 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- a rectangular shape of effective area is assumed
- general shape of effective area is assumed
Rectangular shape
A simplified solution is used in such cases. In case of axial eccentricity (bending moment acts
in one plane only) the analysis assumes a uniform distribution of contact stress o applied
only over a portion of the foundation l
1
, which is less by twice the eccentricity e compared to
the total length l.
Determination of effective area in case of axial eccentricity
An effective area (b * l
1
) is assumed to compute the contact stress, so that we have:
In case of a general eccentric loading (foundation is loaded by the vertical force V and by
bending moments M1 and M2 the loading is replaced by a single force with given
eccentricities:
The size of effective area follows from the condition that the force V must act eccentrically:
General shape of contact stress
In case of an eccentric loading the effective area is determined from the assumption that the
resultant force V must act in the center of gravity of the compressive area. The theoretically
correct solution appears in Fig.
- 402 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Determination of contact stress for general eccentricity general shape
Owing to a considerable complexity in determining the exact location of the neutral axis,
which in turn is decisive when computing the effective area, the program GEO 5 follows the
solution proposed by Highter a Anders
1)
, where the effective areas are derived with help of
graphs.
1)
Highter, W.H. Anders,J.C.: Dimensioning Footings Subjected to Eccentric Loads Journal of
Geotechnical Engineering. ASCE, Vol. 111, No GT5, pp 659 - 665
Determination of cross- sectional internal forces
Longitudinal reinforcement of a foundation is checked for the loading due to bending
moment and shear force. The stress in the footing bottom is assumed either as uniform
(CSN) or linear (EC). Stresses in individual directions x, y are determined independently.
When the linear distribution of stress in the footing bottom is considered the distribution
of stress over the cross-section is provided by:
or when excluding tension:
where: e - eccentricity of normal force N
d - width of foundation
N - normal force acting in the footing bottom
Bending moment and shear force are determined as reaction developed on the cantilever
beam as shown in figure:
I nternal forces acting on wall jump
Internal forces in the cross-section corresponding to constant distribution of stress are
provided by:
- 403 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where:
o
- maximal stress in the footing bottom
d
v
- length of jump
e - eccentricity of normal force N
d - width of wall foundation
N - normal force acting in the footing bottom
Pile analysis
Analyses available in the program " Pile" can be divided into three main groups:
- analysis of vertical bearing capacity according to CSN
- analysis of vertical bearing capacity using the finite element method
- analysis of horizontal bearing capacity of a pile
Vertical bearing capacity analysis according to CSN
There are three methods implemented in the program to compute the vertical bearing
capacity of a pile following the Commentary to the standard CSN 73 1002 "Pilotov zklady":
- analysis according to the theory of the 1st group of limit states
The solution procedure is described in the Commentary to the standard CSN 73 1002
"Pilotov zklady" in Chapter 3 "Design" part B general solution according to the theory of
the 1st group of limit states (pp. 15). All computational approaches are based on formulas
presented therein. The original geostatic stress o
or
is assumed from the finished grade. The
coefficient of conditions of the behavior of foundation soil is considered for the depth z
(measured from the finished grade).
The effective pile length used for the computation of skin bearing capacity is reduced by a
segment:
where: d - pile diameter
- analysis of pile driven into compressible subsoil limit loading curve
The solution procedure for the computation of limit loading curve is based on part G
Analysis of vertical bearing capacity U
vd
according to CSN 73 1004 - Commentary to CSN 73
1002 "Pilotov zklady". The description begins in page 29 titled "Piles driven into
compressible subsoil". The procedure used in the program is identical. Coefficients I
1
, R
k
, R
h
are in the program interpolated from the built in values corresponding to Figs. 6-8. Table 17
containing regression coefficients for various types of soils or rocks is also built in the
program and appears as a help when introducing these parameters into individual layers of
soils or rocks. The secant modulus E
s
is interpolated depending on the location of a layer and
a width of the pile from the built in Tables 18-20.
- analysis of pile resting on incompressible subsoil
- 404 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Analysis of a pile resting on incompressible subsoil (rocks class R1, R2) is based on part G -
Analysis of vertical bearing capacity U
vd
according to CSN 73 1004 - Commentary to CSN 73
1002 "Pilotov zklady". The description begins in page 27 titled "Piles resting on
incompressible subsoil". The solution procedures used in the program are identical. The
influence coefficient of settlement I
wp
is interpolated from Table 16, which is also built in the
program.
Vertical bearing capacity - FEM
The program module "Pile FEM" is part of the program "Pile". It serves to compute the
vertical bearing capacity of a pile placed in generally layered subsoil. As a result the analysis
provides the limit loading curve and distributions of forces and displacements developed
along the pile.
The main advantage of this module is availability of the required input parameters of soils
around the pile the user is asked to specify the angle of internal friction, cohesion, unit
weight and deformation modulus of a given soil.
The solution procedure in the module "Pile FEM" is based on a semi-analytical approach. The
pile is represented by standard beam elements. The response of surrounding soil follows from
the well known solution of layered subsoil as a generalization of the Winkler-Pasternak model.
The elastic rigid plastic response in shear is assumed along the pile-soil interface in view of
the Mohr-Coulomb failure criterion. The normal stress acting on the pile is determined from
the geostatic stress and soil (concrete mixture) pressure at rest.
The influence of water in the vicinity of pile is not only introduced into the shear bearing
capacity of the pile skin, but also affects the depth of influence zone below the pile heel.
The pile may reach incompressible subsoil, which substantially influences its response. This
effect is also taken into account in the program. The pile settlement can also be influenced by
the settlement of the surrounding terrain. In particular, settlement of soil may reduce the pile
bearing capacity. The pile settlement increases without increasing load. This phenomenon is
modeled in the program as so called negative skin friction.

The analysis may also account for the influence of technological process of pile construction
on the stiffness of pile foundation.
The solution procedure consists of several steps:
1) The pile is represented as a member composed of several beams. Subdivision
into individual element complies with the condition that the ratio between the
pile length and its diameter should be approximately equal to 2,5. The
minimum number of beams, however, is 10.
2) Each element is supported at its bottom node by a spring. The spring stiffness
serves to model both the shear resistance of skin and at the pile heel the
stiffness of soil below the pile heel.
3) For each element the limit value of shear force transmitted by skin T
lim
is
determined.
4) The pile is loaded at its top end by increments of the vertical load. For each
load increment the magnitude of spring force for each element is determined.
This value is then compared with the value of T
lim
for a given element. If a
certain spring force exceeds the value of T
lim
its magnitude is set equal to T
lim
.
Analysis for this load increment is then repeated so that the force is
redistributed into other springs. Such an iteration within each load increment
proceeds as long as each currently active spring does not transmit force that is
less than its corresponding T
lim
. Gradual "softening" of individual springs
results in deviation of the limit loading curve from linear path. It is evident that
for a certain load level all springs will no longer be capable of increasing its
force and the bile begins to settle in a linear manner supported only by the heel
spring that has no restrictions on the transmitted force.
- 405 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
5) As a result the analysis provides the limit loading curve, forces developed in
the pile and a graph showing variation of shear as a function of deformation at
a given location.
Limit loading curve
The limit loading curve describes the variation of vertical load Q as a function of the pile
settlement.
By default the program offers the construction of this curve for the maximal value of
settlement equal to 25mm. This magnitude, however, can be adjusted up to the value of 100
mm before running the calculation. An example showing a typical shape of the limit loading
curve appears in the figure.
- 406 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Limit loading curve
Shear strength of skin
For each beam element of the analyzed pile the program determines the limiting value of the
force that can be transmitted by the pile skin at the location of a given element. Its value
depends on the geostatic stress o
z
found at a depth of a given element.
where:

- unit weight of soil
h - depth below the ground surface
Summation sign denotes that o
z
is summed over individual layers of the soil.
The allowable shear stress is then given by:
where: c - cohesion of soil at the location of beam

- angle of internal friction of soil at the location of beam

k - coefficient of increase of allowable skin friction due to technology
If the beam is found below the ground water table, the allowable skin friction is then reduced
to receive the form:
,
where: u - pore pressure below the ground water table
The allowable shear force then follows from:
,
where: O - length of perimeter of pile skin
l - length of pile beam
Coefficient of increase of limit skin friction
A specific input parameter is the coefficient of increase of limit skin friction k due to applied
technology of construction. By default the value of this coefficient is set equal to one. There is
no recommendation by standard for its specific value its adjustment depends solely on the
practical experiences of the designer. It has been found from the in situ measurements on
real piles that the value of k is usually greater than 1 and may reach the value of 1.5.
Theoretically, however, it may attain values even less than 1.
Depth of deformation zone
The assumed depth of influence is a variable, which considerably influences the stiffness of
soil below the pile heel. It is one of the input parameters for the determination of parameters
C
1
and C
2
of the Winkler-Pasternak model. The deeper the influence zone the smaller the
stiffness of subsoil. When the depth of influence zone approaches in the limit zero the
stiffness of subsoil tends to infinity.
The depth of influence zone depends both on subsoil parameters and magnitude of the
applied surcharge, thus on stress below the pile heel. The program assumes that the depth of
influence zone is found in the location, where the stress below the heel equals the geostatic
stress. Such an idea is depicted in the following figure:
- 407 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Determination of the depth of influence zone below the pile heel
For digital determination of the depth of influence zone H serves the function F(|). Its
distribution appears in figure. This function was derived using the above assumptions and in
the program appears in the form of table. Its application is evident from the following steps.
The values of F(|) are determined for the current value of stress f
z
below the pile heel and for
the original geostatic stress
h
. For this value of F(|) we determine the parameter |. This
value serves to determine for the actual value Poisson's number v and pile diameter r the
corresponding depth of influence zone H.
Variation of function F(|)
The depth of influence zone can be affected by the presence of ground water. In such s case
its determination is outlined in following figure:
- 408 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Determination of the depth of influence zone below the pile heel including water
For digital determination of the depth of influence zone H is then used the function G(|). Its
distribution appears in figure. In the analysis this function is exploited in the similar way as
function F(|). The only difference when determining the values of G(|) appears in the use of
hydrostatic pressure
w
h
w
.
- 409 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Variation of function G(|)
I ncompressible subsoil
At a certain depth below the ground surface it is possible to specify incompressible subsoil. If
the pile exceeds this specified depth then all beam elements found below this value are fixed
instead of being spring supported. The pile then essentially experiences no settlement. If
there is incompressible subsoil below the pile heel but not deeper than the reach of influence
zone below the heel, the depth of influence zone for the stiffness computation is then reduced
such that the influence zone just reaches the incompressible subsoil. This way also the
incompressible subsoil below the heel increases its stiffness and consequently also the
bearing capacity of the pile heel. If the incompressible subsoil is found below the reach of the
influence zone, then it does not influence the analyzed pile.
Negative skin friction
A negative skin friction is a phenomenon that arises from a settlement of soil in the vicinity of
a pile. The soil deforming around the pile tends to pull the pile downwards thus reducing its
bearing capacity for a given pile settlement.
The input parameters for assessing the influence of negative skin friction is the settlement of
ground surface w and a depth of influence zone of this deformation h. For a uniformly
distributed load around the pile the value of w should be measured in the distance equal to
three times the pile diameter from its outer face. The value of then represents the depth
influenced by the ground surface settlement and below which the soil is assumed
incompressible with no deformation.
Computation of negative skin friction is carried out first while determining the limit shear
- 410 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
forces transmitted by the pile skin T
lim
. The solution procedure assumes that the soil
settlement decreases linearly with depth from the value of w on the ground surface up to 0 at
a depth of h. The specific value of the soil settlement is therefore assumed for each level
below the ground surface till the depth of h. The forces developed in springs (springs
supporting individual elements) due to their deformation are determined and then subtracted
from T
lim
to reduce the bearing capacity of the pile skin.
From the presented theory it is evident that for large settlement w or large depth h the values
of T
lim
may drop down to zero. In extreme cases the negative skin friction may completely
eliminate the skin bearing capacity so that the pile is then supported only by the elastic
subsoil below the pile heel.
I nfluence of technology
The pile bearing capacity is considerably influenced by technological processes applied during
construction. The module Pile FEM allows for specifying the technology of pile construction.
The mobilized skin friction and the resistance at the pile heel are then reduced with the help
of reduction coefficients depending on the selected technology. The values of these
coefficients follow from the Dutch standard NEN 6743 Pile foundation.
Apart from technologies offered by the program and corresponding coefficients the users are
free to assign to these coefficients their own values. This way the users may introduce their
own practical experiences or information provided by other sources into the analysis.
Shear resistance on skin
The shear resistance on pile skin is in the analysis represented by stiffness of springs
supporting individual beams of a pile. This stiffness is associated with material parameters of
the Winkler-Pasternak model C
1
and C
2
. The values of C
1
and C
2
are determined from
parameter E
def
. They depend on the depth of influence zone, which varies with the pile
deformation (settlement). The variability of influence zone is in the analysis determined such
that for zero deformation it receives the value of 1x the pile diameter and for deformation at
the onset of skin failure equals 2,5x the pile diameter.
The decisive parameter for the determination of magnitudes of C
1
and C
2
is the deformation
modulus. Caution must be taken when estimating the value of E
def
from deformational
characteristics of soil using standards. In particular, in case of long piles we are essentially
dealing with deep seated foundations and the soil at the pile heel will certainly experiences
higher stiffness than that proposed by the standard for spread footings. This holds
particularly for cohesive soils. The most reliable estimates are of course those obtained
directly from experimental measurements.
Formulas given below serve to determine the stiffness of springs representing the shear
resistance of pile skin as a function computed parameters of the elastic subsoil. They depend
on the shape of cross-section and for the implemented cross-sections they receive the
following forms:
Circle:

where: r - radius of pile cross-section
C
1
, C
2
- subsoil parameters
- 411 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
K
1
(o r), K
2
(o
r)
- values of the modified Bessel functions
Parameter o attains the value:
.
Rectangle:
,
where a,b are lengths of rectangle edges and C
1
, C
2
are subsoil parameters and k
red
is the
reduction coefficient, which reduces the stiffness with respect to slenderness of the rectangle.
It receives the following values
for: ,
for: ,
where a is the length of a shorter edge of the rectangle and H is the depth of influence zone.
Croos, "I-section":
For these cross-sections the stiffness is derived from the stiffness for rectangular
cross-section reduced by subtracting the stiffness corresponding to four "removed" parts of
the cross-section.
,
a
1
, b
1
- evident from the following figure
Stiffness of subsoil below the pile heel
The soil stiffness below the pile heel follows from the value of stiffness of the Winkler model C
1
. The value of C
1
is determined for parameters E
def
and v of a soil at the location of pile
heel. The value of C
1
further depends on the depth of influence zone beneath the heel. The
spring stiffness introduced into the support of the beam at the pile heel is then provided by:
,
where: A - cross-sectional area at the pile heel
- 412 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
I ncrements of vertical loading
The analyzed pile is loaded gradually in ten increments. The magnitude of load increments in
individual steps is determined prior to the actual analysis. In particular, the program searches
for such a magnitude of load that causes the pile to exceed the limiting value of settlement
specified for the computed limit loading curve. This value is then divided into 10 increments
subsequently applied to the structure.
Distributions of forces acting on pile
Apart from the limit loading curve it is also possible to keep track of the distribution of normal
force in the pile and the distribution of shear force developed along the pile skin. The normal
forces decreases from the top to the bottom as the load is gradually taken by the shear force
developed along the pile skin. Unlike the normal force the shear force thus increases from the
top to the bottom. Both forces are evaluated in relative values related to the magnitude of
vertical load.
Dependence of shear on deformation
At an arbitrary (selected) depth it is possible to view the distribution of skin friction as a
function of deformation (settlement) of a given point of the pile. This graph shows the
process of gradual reduction of shear stiffness of pile skin until zero with increasing
deformation. This dependency is initially linear, particularly in stage, where the spring force
does not exceed the value T
lim
. When this value is exceeded the spring stiffness starts to
gradually decrease manifested by the flattening of the curve.
Horizontal bearing capacity
Horizontal bearing capacity of a pile, dimensioning
The horizontally loaded pile is analyzed using the finite element method as a beam on elastic
Winkler foundation. The soil parameters along the pile are represented by the modulus of
subsoil reaction. By default the pile is subdivided into 30 segments. For each segment the
program determines the values of the modulus of subsoil reaction, internal forces and
deformations. The program also allows for dimensioning of the steel-reinforced concrete pile
based on the standard specified in the frame "Proj ect"
The program also enables to analyze a pile loaded by the prescribed displacements
(translation or rotation of the pile head). In such a case the analysis is carried out only with
the prescribed displacement. The inputted mechanical loading is excluded.
The following options for inputting the modulus of subsoil reaction are available in the
program:
- by distribution (distribution of the modulus of subsoil reaction along the pile is specified)
- constant distribution
- linear distribution (Bowles)
- according to CSN 73 1004
- according to Matlock and Rees
- according to Vesic
In general, the modulus of subsoil reaction corresponds to the spring stiffness in the Winkler
model. This model describes settlement of a rigid plate as a function of the applied load. The
corresponding relationship is represented by the following formula:
where: p - load acting along plate-soil interface
k
- stiffness of Winkler spring
y
- translation of plate into subsoil
- 413 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008

Definition of the modulus of subsoil reaction


Constant distribution of modulus of subsoil reaction
The modulus of subsoil reaction of the i-th layer is provided by:
where:
E
def
- deformation modulus of soil
r - reduced width of pile given by:
where:
d - pile diameter
| - angle of dispersion is inputted with respect to the angle of internal friction in the
range of / 4-
Linear modulus of subsoil reaction
The modulus of subsoil reaction at a depth z follows from the formula:
where: d - pile diameter
l - length of pile
k - soil parameter after Bowles
r - reduced width of pile
where: d - pile diameter
- 414 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
|
- angle of dispersion introduced by the user is inputted with respect to
the angle of internal friction in the range of / 4-
Possible values of modulus k after Bowles [MN/ m
3
] :
dense sandy gravel 200 - 400
medium dense gravel 150 - 300
medium-graded sand 100 - 250
fine sand 80 - 200
stiff clay 60 - 180
saturated stiff clay 30 - 100
plastic clay 30 - 100
saturated plastic clay 10 - 80
soft clay 2 - 30
Modulus of subsoil reaction according to CSN 73 1004
The modulus of subsoil reaction for cohesive soil assumes the form:
where: E
def
- deformation modulus of soil
d - pile diameter
For cohesionless soils it is provided by:
where: n
h
- modulus of horizontal compressibility
d - pile diameter
z depth of a given section from finished grade
Soil
n
h
[MN/m
3
]
Relative density I
D
0,33 0,50 0,90
Dry sand and gravel
Wet sand and gravel
1,5
2,5
7,0
4,5
18,0
11,0
Possible values of modulus n
h
for cohesionless soils
Modulus of subsoil reaction after Matlock and Rees
This method is applicable for cohesionless soils. The modulus of subsoil reaction then
follows from the expression:
where: n
h
- modulus of horizontal compressibility
z depth of a given section from finished grade
- 415 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Soil
n
h
[MN/m
3
]
Dry sand and gravel
- loose
- medium dense
- dense
1,8 2,2
5,5 7,0
15,0 - 18,0
Wet sand and gravel
- loose
- medium dense
- dense
1,0 1,4
3,5 4,5
9,0 - 12,0
Possible values of modulus n
h
for cohesionless soils
Modulus of subsoil reaction after Vesic
The modulus of subsoil reaction is provided by:
where: E
p
- modulus of elasticity of pile
l
p
- moment of inertia of pile
E
s
- modulus of elasticity of soil
d - pile diameter
v - Poisson number
Settlement analysis
One of the following method is available to compute settlement:
- with the help of oedometric modulus
- with the help of compression constant
- with the help of compression index
- according to NEN (Buismann, Ladde)
- using the Soft soil model
- employing Janbu theory
- using DMT (constrained modulus)
The program offers two options to constrain the depth of influence zone:
- exploiting the theory of structural strength
- using the percentage of the magnitude of geostatic stress
The theory of elasticity (Boussinesq theory) is employed to determine stress in a soil state in
all methods available for the settlement analysis.
General theories of settlement analysis serve as bases in all the above methods.
When computing settlement below the footing bottom the programs first calculates the stress
in the footing bottom and then determines the overall settlement and rotation of foundation.
The general approach in all theories draws on subdividing the subsoil into layers of a different
thickness based on the depth below the footing bottom or ground surface. Vertical
deformation of each layer is then computed the overall settlement is then defined as a sum
of partial settlements of individual layers within the influence zone (deformations below the
influence zone are either zero or neglected):
- 416 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where: s - settlement
s
i
- settlement of the i
th
layer
Stress in the footing bottom
The stress in the footing bottom can be assumed as:
- rectangular (uniform in the footing bottom)
- general (trapezoidal) with different edge values
General distribution of stress follows from figure:
Stress in the footing bottom
where:
where: Q - vertical loading of footing
l,b - footing width and length
e
b
- loading eccenricity
M - moment acting on the footing
H - horizontal force
N - normal force at eccentric footing
p - column axis offset from the footing center
If in some points the stress becomes negative, the program continues with adjusted
dimensions b*l while excluding tension from the analysis. Before computing the stress
distribution due to surcharge the stress in the footing bottom is reduced by the geostatic
stress in the following way:
There are three options in the program to specify the geostatic stress in the footing bottom:
- From the original ground
- 417 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
It is therefore considered, whether the footing bottom in the open pit measured from the
original ground is free of stress for the time less than needed for soil bulkage and
subsequent loss of stress in the subsoil.
- From the finished grade
The same assumptions as above apply.
- Not considered at all
Overall settlement and rotation of foundation
The foundation settlement is substantially influenced by the overall stiffness of the system
represented by foundation structure and foundation soil given by:
where: E
zakl
- modulus of elasticity of footing
t - foundation thickness
E
def,prum
- weighted average of the deformation modulus up to depth of
influence zone
l - footing dimension in the direction of searched stiffness
For k > 1 the foundation is assumed to be rigid and as a representative point for the
determination of its settlement is assumed the characteristic point (distant by 0,37 times
the foundation dimension from its axis).
For k < 1 the foundation structure is assumed to be rigid and as a representative point for the
determination of foundation settlement is assumed the foundation center point.
The foundation rotation is determined from the difference of settlements of centers of
individual edges.
I nfluence of foundation depth and incompressible subsoil
When computing settlement it is possible to account for the influence of foundation depth
by introducing the reduction coefficient k
1
:
for strip footing:
for spread footing:
where: d - depth of footing bottom
z - depth under footing bottom
I nfluence of incompressible layer is introduced into the analysis by the reduction
coefficient k
2
:
where: z
ic
- depth of rigid base under footing bottom
z - depth under footing bottom
Incorporating the above coefficients allows transformation of the vertical component of
- 418 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
stress o
z
such that the actual depth is replaced by a substitute value z
r
given by:

where: k
1
- coefficient of footing bottom depth
k
2
- coefficient of rigid base
z - depth under footing bottom
I nfluence of sand- gravel cushion
If the sand-gravel cushion is specified below the spread footing, the material parameters X in
individual layers are computed in the following way:
For layer h
a,i
:
where: X
i
- material parameters at i
th
layer
X
c
- material parameters of sand-gravel cushion
For layer h
b,i
:
where: A
c
- area of sand-gravel cushion
X
c
- material parameters of sand-gravel cushion
X
b,i
- material parameters of b,i layer
b
i
- cushion widths in the i
th
layer
l
i
- cushion length in the i
th
layer
Analysis X
i
in the sand-gravel cushion
Settlement analysis using the oedometric modulus
Equation to compute compression of an i
th
soil layer below foundation having a thickness h
- 419 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
arises from the definition of deformation modulus E
oed
:
where:
o
z,i

-
vertical component of incremetal stress in the middle
of i
th
layer
h
i
- thickness of the i
th
layer
E
oed,i
- oedometric modulus of the i
th
layer
The oedometric modulus E
oed
can be specified for each soil either as constant or with the help
of an oedometric curve (o
ef
/ c relation). When using the oedometric curve the program
assumes for each layer the value of E
oed
corresponding to a given range of original and final
stress. If the value of oedometric modulus E
oed
is not available, it is possible to input the
deformation modulus E
def
and the program carries out the respective transformation.
where:
v
- Poisson's number
E
def
- deformation modulus
Settlement analysis using the compression constant
Equation to compute compression of an i
th
soil layer below foundation having a thickness h
arises from the definition of compression constant C:
where:
o
or,i

- vertical component of original geostatic stress in the middle of i
th
layer
o
z,i

- vertical component of incremental stress (e.g. stress due to structure
surcharge) inducing layer compression
h
i
- thickness of the i
th
layer
C
i
- compression constant in the i
th
layer
The program allows for inputting either the compression constant C
i
or the compression
constant C
10
(the program itself carries out the transformation).
Settlement analysis using the compression index
Equation for settlement when employing the compression index C
c
of the ith layer arises
from the formula:
- 420 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where:
o
or,i
- vertical component of geostatic stress in the middle of i
th
layer
o
z,i
- vertical component of incremental stress (e.g. stress due to structure
surcharge) inducing layer compression
e
o

- initial void ratio
h
i

- thickness of the i
th
layer
C
c,i
- compression index in the i
th
layer

Settlement analysis according to NEN ( Buismann, Ladd)
This method computes both the primary and secondary settlement. When computing the
methods accounts for overconsolidated soils and differentiates between two possible cases:
(1) sum of the current vertical effective stress in a soil and stress due to external surcharge is
less than the preconsolidation pressure so that only additional surcharge is considered
(2) sum of the current vertical effective stress in a soil and stress due to external surcharge is
greater than the preconsolidation pressure so that the primary consolidation is set on again.
The primary settlement is then larger when compared to the first case
Primary settlement
Primary settlement of the i
th
layer of overconsolidated soil (OCR > 1) is provided by:
for: o
or
+ o
z
o
p
(sum of the current vertical stress and its increment is less than the
preconsolidation pressure)
for: o
or
+ o
z
> o
p
(sum of the current vertical stress and its increment is greater than the
preconsolidation pressure)
where:
o
or,i

- vertical component of geostatic stress in the middle of i
th
layer
o
z,i
- vertical component of incremental stress (e.g. stress due to structure
surcharge) inducing layer compression
o
p,i
- preconsolidation pressure in the i
th
layer
e
o

- initial void ratio
h
i

- thickness of the i
th
layer
C
c,i
- compression index in the i
th
layer
C
r,i

- recompression index in thei
th
layer
Primary settlement of the i
th
layer of normally consolidated soil (OCR = 1) reads:
- 421 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where:
o
or,i

- vertical component of geostatic stress in the middle of i
th
layer
o
z,i

- vertical component of incremental stress (e.g. stress due to structure
surcharge) inducing layer compression
e
o

- initial void ratio
h
i
- thickness of the i
th
layer
C
c,i
- compression index thei
th
layer
Secondary settlement
Primary settlement of the ith layer assumes the form:
for: o
or
+ o
z
o
p
(sum of the current vertical stress and its increment is less than the
preconsolidation pressure)
pro o
or
+ o
z
> o
p
(sum of the current vertical stress and its increment is greater than the
preconsolidation pressure)
where: h
i
- thickness of the i
th
layer
C
or,i
- secondary compression index below preconsolidation pressure in the i
th
layer
C
o
- index of secondary compression in the i
th
layer
t
p
- time to terminate primary consolidation
t
s
- time required for secondary settlement
If we specify the value of preconsolidation index of secondary compression the same as for
the index of secondary compression, the program does not take into account in the
computation of secondary settlement the effect of preconsolidation pressure.
Settlement analysis using the Soft soil model
The analysis employs the modified compression index and is based on the Soft soil
elastic-plastic model developed in university of Cambridge. The soil deformation assumes the
volumetric strain to be linearly dependent on the change of effective mean stress plotted in
natural logarithmic scale. The settlement of the i
th
layer is then provided by:
kde:
o
or,i
- vertical component of geostatic stress in the middle of i
th
layer
o
z,i

- vertical component of incremental stress (e.g. stress due to structure
surcharge) inducing layer compression
h
i

- thickness of the i
th
layer
- 422 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008

- modified compression index in the i
th
layer
The analysis requires inputting the modified compression index usually obtained from
triaxial laboratory measurements.
If the modified compression index is not known, it is possible to specify the compression
index C
C
together with an average value of the void ratio e (if that is also not know it is
sufficient to provide the initial void ratio e
o
) and the program then performs an approximate
computation of the modified compression index using the available information.
Settlement analysis according to J anbu theory
It is based on principles of nonlinear elastic deformation, where the stress-strain relationship
is described by a function of two dimensionless parameters unique for a given soil. The
parameters are the exponent j and the Janbu modulus m. Equations describing the
settlement are obtained by specifying c from the definition of deformation modulus E
t
and by
subsequent integration. The program allows the user to compute settlement for the following
types of soil:
- noncohesive soils
- coarse - grained soil
- sands and silts
- overconsolidated sands and silts
- cohesive soils
- overconsolidated cohesive soils
Settlement analysis for cohesionless soils after J anbu
For cohesionless soils the stress exponent is not equal to zero. For layered subsoil the
resulting settlement equals to the sum of partial settlements of individual layers:

where:
o
or,i
- vertical component of geostatic stress in the middle of i
th
layer
o
z,i

- vertical component of incremental stress (e.g. stress due to structure
surcharge) inducing layer compression
j
i

- stress exponentin the i
th
layer
m
i

- Janbu modulus in the i
th
layer
h
i

- thickness of the i
th
layer

Settlement analysis for coarse- grained soils after J anbu
For dense coarse-grained soils (e.g. ice soil) the stress-deformation (settlement) relationship
is usually assumed as "elastic", i.e. the stress exponent j is equal to one. Thus for j = 1 and
the reference stress o
r
= 100 kPa the resulting settlement equals to the sum of partial
settlements of individual layers:
- 423 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where:
o
z,i

- vertical component of incremental stress (e.g. stress due to structure
surcharge) inducing layer compression - i.e. change of effective stress
m
i
- Janbu modulus in the i
th
layer
h
i
- thickness of the i
th
layer

Settlement analysis for sands and silts after J anbu
For sands and silts the stress exponent j receives the value around 0,5, for the reference
stress o
r
= 100 kPa the resulting settlement equals to the sum of partial settlements of
individual layers. It can be derived from the following formula:

where:
o
or,i
vertical component of geostatic stress in the middle of i
th
layer
o
z,i
vertical component of incremental stress (e.g. stress due to structure
surcharge) inducing layer compression
m
i
Janbu modulus in the i
th
layer
h
i
thickness of the i
th
layer

Settlement analysis for overconsolidated sands and silts
after J anbu
Providing the final stress in soil exceeds the preconsolidation pressure (o
or
+ o
z
> o
p
), the
settlement of layered subsoil is found from the following equation:

where:
o
or,i

- vertical component of geostatic stress in the middle of i
th
layer
o
p,i

- preconsolidation pressure in the i
th
layer
o
z,i

- vertical component of incremental stress (e.g. stress due to structure
surcharge) inducing layer compression
m
i
- Janbu modulus in the i
th
layer
m
r,i
- Janbuv modul optnho stlaen vi-t vrstv
h
i
- thickness of the i
th
layer
If the stress due to surcharge does not cause the final stress to exceed the preconsolidation
pressure (o
or
+ o
z
o
p
), it is possible to assume the following forms of equations for the
computation of settlement of layered sand or silt subsoil:

where:
o
or,i

- vertical component of geostatic stress in the middle of i
th
layer
o
p,i

- preconsolidation pressure in the i
th
layer
o
z,i

- vertical component of incremental stress (e.g. stress due to structure
surcharge) inducing layer compression
- 424 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
m
r,i
- Janbu modulus of recompression in the i
th
layer
h
i
- thickness of the i
th
layer


Settlement analysis for cohesive soils after J anbu
In case of cohesive soils the stress exponent is equal to zero. For normally consolidated soils
we obtain from the definition of the tangent modulus of deformation (by modification and
subsequent integration) E
t
equation for the settlement of layered subsoil formed by cohesive
soils in the form:
where:
o
or,i
- vertical component of geostatic stress in the middle of i
th
layer
o
z,i

- vertical component of incremental stress (e.g. stress due to structure
surcharge) inducing layer compression
m
i
- Janbu modulus in the i
th
layer
h
i
- thickness of the i
th
layer

Settlement analysis for overconsolidated cohesive soils
after J anbu
Most cohesive soils in the original order except very young or organic clays are
overconsolidated. If the final stress in the soil exceeds overconsolidation stress (o
or
+ o
z
> o
p
) than the settlement of the layered subsoil composites from cohesive soils is computed from
following relation:
for: o
or
+ o
z
> o
p
for: o
or
+ o
z
o
p
where:
o
or,i

- vertical component of geostatic stress in the middle of i
th
layer
o
p,i

- preconsolidation pressure in the i
th
layer
o
z,i

- vertical component of incremental stress (e.g. stress due to structure
surcharge) inducing layer compression
m
i

- Janbu modulusin the i
th
layer
m
r,i
- Janbu modulus of recompression in the i
th
layer
h
i

- thickness of the i
th
layer

- 425 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Settlement analysis using DMT ( constrained modulus)
Constrained modulus M
DMT
[MPa] is defined as the vertical drained confined tangent
modulus at o
vo
. M
DMT
is obtained from dilatometer test.
If the value of the constrained modulus M
DMT
is not available, it is possible to input the
coefficient of volume compressibility m
V
[m
2
/MN] (determined from the oedometer test) and
the program carries out the respective transformation:
where: M
DMT
- constrained modulus
m
V
- coefficient of volume compressibility
The analysis employs the constrained modulus M
DMT
or coefficient of volume compressibility
m
V
and is based on Marchetti method. This approach being based on linear elasticity,
provides a settlement proportional to the load and is unable to provide non linear predictions.
The settlement of the i
th
layer is then provided by:
where:
o
z,i
- vertical component of incremental stress in the middle of i
th
layer
h
i
- thickness of the i
th
layer
M
DMT
- constrained modulus
Theory of settlement
If the stress in a soil caused by ground surface surcharge, change in stress with the soil or in
the currently built earth structure is known, it is possible to determine the soil deformation.
The soil deformation is generally inclined and its vertical component is termed the settlement.
In general, the settlement is non-stationary dependent on time, which means that it does not
occur immediately after introducing the surcharge, but it rather depends on consolidation
characteristics of a soil. Permeable, less compressible soils (sand, gravel) deform fast, while
saturated low permeability clayey soils experience gradual deformation called consolidation.
Time dependent settlement of soil
Applied load yields settlement, which can be subdivided based on time dependent response
into three separate components:
- 426 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- instantaneous settlement (initial)
- primary settlement (consolidation)
- secondary settlement (creep)
Instantaneous settlement
During instantaneous settlement the soil experiences only shear deformation resulting into
change in shape without volumetric deformation. The loss of pore pressure in the soil is zero.
Primary settlement
This stage of soil deformation is characterized by skeleton deformation due to motion and
compression of grains manifested by volume changes. If the pores are filled with water
(particularly in case of low permeability soils), the water will be carried away from squeezed
pores into locations with lower pressure (the soil will undergo consolidation). The
consolidation primary settlement is therefore time dependent and is terminated by reaching
zero pore pressure.
Secondary settlement
When the primary consolidation is over the skeleton deformation will no longer cause the
change in pore pressure (theoretically at infinite time). With increasing pressure the grains
may become so closely packed that they will start to deform themselves and the volumetric
changes will continue this is referred to as creep deformation of skeleton or secondary
consolidation (settlement). Unlike the primary consolidation the secondary consolidation
proceeds under constant effective stress. Particularly in case of soft plastic or squash soils the
secondary consolidation should not be neglected in case of overconsolidated soils it may
represent app. 10% of the overall settlement, for normally consolidated soils even app. 20%.
Theory of primary settlement
The final primary settlement sis often is often substituted by the term settlement. Most of
the computational approaches can be attached to one of the two groups:
- linear elastic deformation
- nonlinear elastic deformation
Linear elastic deformation
The linear stress-strain relationship follows the Hook law:
where:
c
- induced deformation of the soil layer
Ao
ef
- induced change of effective stress in the soil layer
E
- Young modulus in the soil layer
v
- Poisson number
The applicability of Young's modulus E of elasticity is substantiated only in cases, in which the
stressed soil is allowed to stretch in the horizontal direction. This, however, is acceptable only
for small spread foundations. When applying the load over a larger area, the stressed soil
cannot, except for its edges, to deform sideways and experiences therefore only a vertical
(one-dimensional) strain related to the oedometric modulus E
oed
, that is larger than the
elastic modulus E.
The settlement of a soil layer s is determined by multiplying the deformation of a soil layer c
by the layer thickness (height) H
o
:
where:
c
- deformation of the soil layer
H
o
- thickness of the soil layer
VIn case of layered subsoil we get the total settlement by summing up settlements of
- 427 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
individual layers:
where:
s
- settlement of the layered subsoil
ci
- deformation of the i
th
soil layer
H
oi

- thickness of the i
th
soil layer
Nonlinear elastic deformation
For most soils the stress-strain relationship is nonlinear and often influenced by the loading
history. This nonlinearity cannot be neglected, particularly when computing the settlement of
fine-grained soils (silts, clays). Clearly, the procedure based on application of Young's
modulus of elasticity is not generally applicable. Even if employing the stress dependent
oedometric modulus of deformation, it will not be possible to receive reasonable estimates of
the behavior of certain overconsolidated soils. Nonlinear elastic deformation is generally
modeled using the void ratio and deformation characteristics derived from one-dimensional
deformation of a soil sample (e.g. compression constant, compression index, etc.).
Procedure for the computation of settlement of a compressible saturated soil layer using the
void e is described on the following soil element having the height H
o
and the width B = 1 m:
Analysis of settlement from phase diagram
Owing to the fact that the soil is a three phase medium (it contains solid particles and pore
filled with fluid and gas) it is possible to describe the solid particles (rock particles and
mineral grains) by their volume V
s
(and assumed to be equal to unity), while the porous
phase can be described using the void ratio e.
The soil element is subjected on its upper surface to a uniform loading q causing the change
in stress inside the sample and also the vertical displacement AH, which in turn leads to the
reduction of pores V
p
and therefore also to the reduction of void ratio (from its original value
- 428 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
e
o
to a new value e). The vertical strain c of a soil sample is given by the ratio of AH to the
original sample height H
o
, and can be expressed using the void ratio e:
where: c
- vertical relative compression
AH
- vertical deformation
H
o
- origin height of the element
s - settlement
e - void ratio
Ae
- change of void ratio
By modifying this equation we arrive at the formula describing the sample settlement with
the help of void ratio:
where:
c
- vertical relative compression
H
o
- origin height of the element
s - settlement
e - void ratio
Ae
- change of void ratio


Secondary settlement
To describe a gradual creep of soil during secondary settlement the program employs the
Buissman method (it incorporates the index of secondary compression C
o
derived by Lade).
From observations suggesting that the soil deformation follows a linear path when plotted in
semi-logarithmic scale against time Buissman proposed the variation of c due to long-term
stress in the form:
where:

- total deformation

p
- deformation associated with primary consolidation

s
- deformation associated with secondary consolidation
t - time of consolidation
t
0
- refereference time

- 429 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Time dependent variation of strain (primary and secondary consolidation)
Determination of the depth of influence zone
From the theoretical point of view when applying a load on the ground surface we may expect
the change of stress in subsoil into an infinite depth. The soil, however, deforms only up to a
certain depth within so called influenced zone.
The program offers two options to specify the influence zone:
- using the theory of structural strength
- by specifying a certain percentage of the primary geostatic stress
Determination of the depth of influence zone with the help
of structural strength
The structural strength represents the resistance of soil against deformation for a loading at
the onset of failure of its internal structure. With decreasing coefficient m the soil responds
tends to be linear.
If the structural strength is accounted for during settlement analysis, then:
a) the influence zone is characterized by the depth below the footing bottom at which the
increment of vertical stress o
z
becomes equal to the structural strength of soil (determined by
multiplying the original geostatic stress o
or
by the coefficient m):
where: m - coefficient of structural strength
o
or
- original geostatic stress
b) when computing the settlement of a layer, the increment of vertical stress o
z
due to
surcharge and reduced by the structural strength of soil is provided by:
where: m - coefficient of structural strength
o
or
- original geostatic stress
- 430 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
o
z
- incremetal stress in the middle layer
and the settlement s then follows from the stress denoted in figure by hatching and is given
by:
where: m - coefficient of structural strength
o
or
- original geostatic stress
o
z
- incremetal stress in the middle layer
Depth of influnece zone based on theory of structural strength
(area of effective surcharge is hatched)
Determination of influence zone by constraining the
magnitude of primary stress
Pokud If we assume in the settlement analysis the constrains in terms of the percentage of
primary geostatic stress, then:
a) the influence zone is represented by a depth below the footing bottom where the
incremental stress o
z
reaches a certain percentage of the original geostatic stress:
where: x% - considered magnitude of the geostatic stress
o
or
- geostatic stress
b) the settlement s is derived from stress value denoted in figure by hatching and it receives
the form:

where:
o
z
- incremetal stress
- 431 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
o
or
- geostatic stress
Depth of influence zone given by constraining the magnitude of primary stress
Characteristics of settlement analyses
Depending on the selected solution method the program GEO5 employs for the computation
of settlement the following characteristics that may differ by the type of experiment needed
for their determination or in the way of representation of measured variables:
- Compression index C
c
- Oedometric modulus E
oed

- Compression constant C
- Compression constant C
10
- Void ratio e
- Recompression index C
r
- Janbu characteristics
- Correcting coefficient m
- Modified compression index
- Index of secondary compression C
o
- Overconsolidation index of secondary compression C
o r
Compression index
It describes variation of the void ratio e as a function of the change of effective stress o
ef
plotted in the logarithmic scale:
- 432 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Void ratio e versus effective stress o
ef
It therefore represents a deformation characteristic of overconsolidated soil:
where:
Ae - variation of void ratio
Alogo
ef

- variation of effective stress
Range of compression index C
c
(Naval Facilities Engineering Command Soil MechanicsDESI GN
MANUAL 7.01)
A typical range of the compression index is from 0,1 to 10. Approximate values for
homogeneous sand for the loading range from 95 kPa to 3926 kPa attain the values from
0,05 to 0,06 for loose state and 0,02 to 0,03 for dense state. For silts this value is 0,20.
For lightly overconsolidated clays and silts tested in USA Louisiana Kaufmann and Shermann
(1964) present the following values:
Soil Effective
consolidation
stress o
cef
[kPa]
Final effective
stress in the soil
o
ef
[kPa]
Compression
index
C
c
[-]
CL soft clay 160 200 0,34
CL hard clay 170 250 0,44
ML silt of low plasticity 230 350 0,16
CH clay of high plasticity 280 350 0,84
CH soft clay with silt layers 340 290 0,52
Prof. Juan M.Pestana-Nascimento (University of California, Berkeley) offers the following
typical values of the compression index C
c
:
Soil
Compression index
C
c
[-]
- 433 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Normal consolidated clays 0,20 0,50
Chicago clay with silt (CL) 0,15 - 0,30
Boston blue clay (CL) 0,3 0,5
Vickburgs clay - dray falls into lumps (CH) 0,3 0,6
Swedish clay (CL CH) 1 3
Canada clay from Leda (CL CH) 1 4
Mexico City clay (MH) 7 10
Organic clays (OH) 4 a vce
Peats (Pt) 10 15
Organic silts and claye silts (ML MH) 1,5 4,0
San Francisco sediments (CL) 0,4 1,2
Clay in the old San Francisco Bay 0,7 0,9
Bangkok clay (CH) 0,4
In addition, there are empirical expressions available to determine approximate values of C
c
for silts, clays and organic soils; their applicability, however, is more or less local:
Soil Equations Reference
Transformed clays Skempton 1944
Clays Nishida 1956
Brazilian clays
Sao Paulo clays
Cozzolino 1961
New York clays Terzaghi a Peck 1948
Clays of low plasticity Sowers 1970
Taipei clays and silts Moh a kol. 1989
Clays Pestana 1994
Oedometric modulus
If the results from oedometric test are represented in terms of oedometric curve (Ac = f(Ao
ef
- 434 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
)), it becomes evident that for each point on the curve we receive a different ratio o
ef
/

c.
Determination of oedometric modulus E
oed
If the stress-strain curve is replaced for a certain interval of two neighboring stresses o
1ef -
o
2ef
by a secant line, it is acceptable to assume a linear behavior of soil within this interval and
represent the soil compressibility by as Ao
ef
/ Ac called the oedometric modulus of
deformation. The oedometric modulus of deformation is therefore a secant modulus linked to
a certain stress interval o
1ef -
o
2ef
selected on the stress-strain diagram Ac = (Ao
ef
):
In general, the oedometric modulus of deformation E
oed
tends to decrease its value with the
increasing stress interval. Therefore we should consider for each layer a specific value of E
oed
pertinent to a given stress interval (from original to final stress state). This is reflected in the
program by the way of inputting E
oed
, where it is possible to specify for each soil the
respective oedometric curve (o
ef
/ c diagram).
Practical experience, however, suggests (e.g. for clays) a several orders of magnitude
difference between the value of E
oed
derived from the deformation modulus E
def
and that
provided by the in situ measured loading curve.
Approximate range of values of oedometric modulus of deformation E
oed
for individual
soils and typical stress range (Vanek: Mechanika zemin (soil mechanics)):
Soil Oedometric modulus E
oed
[MPa]
gravels 60 600
medium dense sands to dense sands 7 130
cohesive 2 30
Compression constant
When plotting the effective vertical stress against the vertical strain in the semi-logarithmic
scale we often arrive at a linear dependency.
- 435 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Detemination of compression constant C
Slope of this curve is one of the soil parameters particularly in case of one-dimensional
deformation and is referred to as the compression constant C:
where:
o
1ef

- initial effective stress of soil in oedometer
o
2ef
- final effective stress of soil in oedometer
Margins of compression constant C (J .imek: Mechanika zemin)
Soil Compression constant
C [-]
Loess silt 15 45
Clay 30 120
Silts 60 150
Medium dense and dense sands 150 200
Sand with gravel > 250
Compression constant
In engineering practice the natural logarithm with base is sometimes replaced by logarithm
with base 10 when plotting the stress o
ef
. In this case it is common to denote the
compression constant with subscript 10: C
10
. Since it holds:
it is possible to derive a relationship between compression constant C and C
10
:
Arnold Verruijt (Soil Mechanics) offers the following values of compression constant:
Soil C C
10
- 436 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Sand 50 500 20 200
Silt 25 125 10 50
Clay 10 100 4 40
Peat 2 - 25 1 - 10
Void ratio
The void ratio e describes porosity of a soil and is provided by:
where: V
p
- volume of voids
V
s

- weight of soil solids
Ranges of void ratio e (Braja M. DAS: Principles of Foundation Engineering)
Soil
Void ratio
e [-]
Poorly graded sand with loose density 0,8
Well graded dense sand 0,45
Loose density sand with angular particles 0,65
Dense density sand with angular particles 0,4
Stiff clay 0,6
Soft clay 0,9 1,4
Loess 0,9
Soft organic clay 2,5 3,2
Glacial till 0,3
Recompression index
The recompression index C
r
is determined from the graph representing the variation of void
ratio e as a function of the effective stress o
ef
plotted in the logarithmic scale for unloading
reloading sequence:
- 437 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Determination of recompression index C
r
where:
Ae
- change of void ratio for the unloading-reloading curve
Alogo
ef
- change of effective stress for the unloading-reloading curve
If no results from either laboratory or in situ measurements are available, the recompression
index C
r
can be approximately derived from:
where:
C
c

- compression constant
J anbu characteristics
Values of the Janbu modulus m and of stress exponent j (according Canadian Foundation
Engineering Manual 1992)
Soil Janbu modulus m Stress index j
Very dense to dense till, glacial till 1000 300 1
Gravel 400 40 0,5
Dense sand 400 250 0,5
Medium condition sand 250 150 0,5
Loose sand 150 100 0,5
Dense silt 200 80 0,5
Medium condition silt 80 60 0,5
Loose silt 60 40 0,5
- 438 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Hard to very stiff clay 60 20 0
Medium to stiff clay 20 10 0
Soft claye silt 10 5 0
Soft marine clays 20 5 0
Organic clays 20 - 5 0
Peats 5 1 0
I nfluence of loading history on deformation characteristics
The loading history has a substantial influence on the distribution of deformation curve and
therefore also on the values of deformation characteristics. The following figure displays the
deformation curve (Ae = f(Ao
ef
) diagram) derived from oedometric loading test
corresponding, e.g. to natural dense sandy soil.
Loading history
a) Deformation curve for clayey soils from oedometric test
b) Simplified interpretation of deformation curve
VzorekThe soil sample was gradually loaded to reach the stress level o
bef
, the stress-strain
relationship (o
bef
-c) within the section a-b is linear and is denoted as primary or virgin (i.e.,
relative compression is encountered). Upon exceeding the stress level o
bef
the sample was
elastically unloaded and the soil moved up the b-c section of the deformation curve. Upon
reloading the soil moved down the b-c section till reaching the original stress o
bef
prior to
unloading. When loading beyond o
bef
the deformation curve aproaches asymptotically within
the d-e section the primary line accompanied by inelastic deformation of a soil sample. Such
a complex stress-strain curve is often simplified by the idealized deformation curve (fig. b).
Such a curve characterizes so called overconsolidated soils, which were in the past subjected
large stresses and subsequamtly unloded. The overconsolidation ratio (OCR) then represents
the ratio between the maximum preconsolidation stress the soil has ever experienced and the
current vertical stress. Overconsolidated soils typicaly follow the deformation curve given by
points c-d-e. The change in slope along this line (given app. by point d) corresponds either to
the vertical geostatic stress o
o
(normally consolidated soils) or to preconsolidation pressure o
c
(overconsolidated soils). This point influences the soil deformation, which is smaller within
the c-d section when compared to the d-e section (where for the large degree of
overconsolidation the soil deformation increases). Additional deformation characteristics such
as deformation modulus upon unloading E
e
, one-dimensional swelling index C
e
,
recompression index C
r
, etc. were introduced to describe such a complex soil behavior.
Currently the most often used parameter is the recompression index C
r
suitable for the
computation of settlement of overconsolidated soils.
- 439 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Coefficient m
Correction coefficient of surcharge due to structural strength m determines the structural
strength of soil.
Values of the correction coefficient of surcharge m
Type of fundamental soil m
Very compressible fine soils class F1 -F8
- with deformation modulus E
def
< 4 MPa
- nonoverconsoludated
- soft to hard consistency
(all 3 attributes must be fullfiled),
filling, made ground
secondary and tertiary sedimets
rocks class R1, R2
0,1
fine soils class F1-F8, not belonging to coefficient
m = 0,1 nor 0,4 nor 0,6
sands and gravels class S1, S2, G1, G2 under GWT
rock class R3, R4
0,2
Sands and gravels class S1, S2, G1, G2
above GWT
sands and gravels with clay, silt or fine soil admixture
soils class S3, S4, S5, G3, G4, G5
rocks class R5, R6
0,3
eluvium of igneous and metanorphic rocks 0,4
Modified compression index
The analysis employing the Soft soil model builds on the elastic-plastic model developed in
the university in Cambridge. Here, the vertical deformation of soil c assumes linear
dependence on the logarithmic variation of effective stress in a soil. Application of this model
requires an introduction of the modified compression index usually obtained from triaxial
tests.
If the modified compression index is not available from laboratory measurements, it can be
approximately found from the compression index C
C
:
where:
C
C

- compression index
e
- average void ratio (if this value is not available, it can be approximately
substituted by the initial void ratio e
o
)

I ndex of secondary compression
The index of secondary compression is proportional to the logarithm of time and the slope of
primary consolidation (it is strongly dependent on the final effective stress in soil):
- 440 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008

where: Co - index of secondary compression
o
- deformation of a soil layer
t
1
- initial time of a period of monitoring (measured from the start of
consolidation)
t
2
- final time of a period of monitoring
Determining the value of index of secondary compression C
o
requires either laboratory (e.g.
one-dimensional consolidation in oedometer) or in-situ measurements:
Determination of index of secondary compression C
o
Ranges of values of index of secondary compression C
o

sand 0,00003 0,00006
silty loess 0,0004
clay 0,01
The ratio between the index of secondary compression C
o
and the compression index C
c
is
approximately constant for most of the normally consolidated clays for loading typical in
engineering practice. Its average value is 0,05.
Variation of natural moisture of soil as a function of the index of secondary compression C
o
derived by Mesri appears in figure:
- 441 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Variation of natural moisture of soil as a function
of the index of secondary compression C
o
after Mesri
1 Whangamarino clay
2 Mexico City clay
3 Calcareous organic silt
4 Leda clay
5 Norwegian plastic clay
6 Amorphous and fibous peat
7 Canadian muskeg
8 Organic marine deposits
9 Boston blue clay
10 Chicago blue clay
11 Organic silty clay
Overconsolidation index of secondary compression
The overconsolidation index of secondary compression depends on laboratory measurements
(e.g. one-dimensional consolidation) and is proportional to the logarithm of time and slope of
virgin consolidation line providing the preconsolidation pressure was not exceeded:

- 442 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where: Co
r

- overconsolidation index of secondary compression

- deformation of a soil layer

t
1
- initial time of a period of monitoring (measured from the onset of
consolidation)
t
2
- final time of a period of monitoring





Analyses in program Ground Loss
Analyses performed in the program "Ground Loss" can be divided into the following groups:
- analysis of the shape of subsidence trough above excavations
- analysis of failure of buildings
The failure analysis of building is based on the shape of subsidence trough.
Analysis of subsidence trough
The analysis of subsidence trough consists of several sequential steps:
- determination of the maximum settlement and dimensions of subsidence trough for
individual excavations
- back calculation of the shape and dimensions of subsidence trough providing it is calculated
at a given depth below the terrain surface.
- determination of the overall shape of subsidence trough for more excavations
- post-processing of other variables (horizontal deformation, slope)
The analysis of maximum settlement and dimensions of subsidence trough can be carried out
using either the theory of volume loss or the classical theories (Peck, Fazekas, Limanov).
Volume loss
The volume loss method is a semi-empirical method based partially on theoretical grounds.
The method introduces, although indirectly, the basic parameters of excavation into the
analysis (these include mechanical parameters of a medium, technological effects of
excavation, excavation lining etc) using 2 comprehensive parameters (coefficient k for
determination of inflection point and a percentage of volume loss VL). These
parameters uniquely define the shape of subsidence trough and are determined empirically
from years of experience.
- 443 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Settlement expressed in terms volumes
The maximum settlement S
max
, and location of inflection point L
inf
are provided by the
following expressions:
where: A - excavation area
Z - depth of center point of excavation
k - coefficient to calculate inflection point (material constant)
VL - percentage of volume loss
The roof deformation u
a
follows from:
where: r - excavation radius
VL - percentage of volume loss
Recommended values of parameters for volume loss
analysis
Data needed for the determination of subsidence trough using the volume loss method:
Coefficient to calculate inflection point k
Soil or rock k
cohesionless soil 0,3
normaly consolidated clay 0,5
overconsolidated clay 0,6-0,7
clay slate 0,6-0,8
quartzite 0,8-0,9
Percentage of volume loss VL
Technology VL
TBM 0,5-1
Sequential excavation method 0,8-1,5
Several relationships were also derived to determine the value of lost volume VL based on
stability ratio N defined by Broms and Bennermarkem:
where:
o
v
- overall stress along excavation axis
- 444 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
o
t
- excavation lining resistance (if lining is installed)
S
u
- undrained stiffness of clay
For N < 2 the soil/rock in the vicinity of excavation is assumed elastic and stable. For Ne <
2,4 local plastic zones begin to develop in the vicinity of excavation, for Ne < 4,6 a large
plastic zone develops around excavation and for N = 6 the loss of stability of tunnel face
occurs. Figure shows the dependence of stability ration and lost volume VL.
Classical theory
Convergence analysis of an excavation and calculation of the maximum settlement in a
homogeneous body are the same for all classical theories. The subsidence trough analyses
then differ depending on the assumed theory (Peck, Fazekas, Limanov).
When calculating settlement the program first determines the radial loading of a circular
excavation as:
where:
o
z
- geostatic stress in center of excavation
K
r
- coefficient of pressure at rest of cohesive soil
The roof u
a
and the bottom u
b
deformations of excavation follow from:
where: Z - depth of center point of excavation

r - excavation radius
E - modulus of elasticity of rock/soil in vicinity of excavation
v
- Poisson's number of rock/soil in vicinity of excavation
The maximum terrain settlement and the length of subsidence trough are determined as
- 445 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
follows:
where: Z - depth of center point of excavation
r - excavation radius
E - modulus of elasticity of rock/soil in vicinity of excavation
v
- Poisson's number of rock/soil in vicinity of excavation
When the tunnel roof displacement is prescribed the maximum settlement is provided by
the following expression:
where: Z - depth of center point of excavation

r - excavation radius
u
a
- tunnel roof displacement
v
- Poisson's number of rock/soil in vicinity of excavation
Analysis for layered subsoil
When determining a settlement of layered subsoil the program first calculates the settlement
at the interface between the first layer above excavation and other layers of overburden S
int
and determines the length of subsidence trough along layers interfaces. In this case the
approach complies with the one used for a homogeneous soil.
Next (as shown in Figure) the program determines the length of subsidence trough L at the
terrain surface.
Analysis of settlement for layered subsoil
- 446 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The next computation differs depending on the selected analysis theory:
Solution after Limanov
Limanov described the horizontal displacement above excavation with the help of lost area F:
where: L - length of subsidence trough
F - volume loss of soil per 1m run determined from:
where: L
int
- length of subsidence trough along interfaces above excavation
S
int
- settlement of respective interface
Solution after Fazekas
Fazekas described the horizontal displacement above excavation using the following
expression:
where: L - length of subsidence trough
L
int
- length of subsidence trough along interfaces above excavation
S
int
- settlement of respective interface
Solution after Peck
Peck described the horizontal displacement above excavation using the following expression:
where: L
int
- length of subsidence trough along interfaces above excavation
S
int
- settlement of respective interface
L
inf
- distance of inflection point of subsidence trough from excavation axis at
terrain surface
Shape of subsidence trough
The program offers two particular shapes of subsidence troughs according to Gauss or
Aversin.
Curve based on Gauss

A number of studies carried out both in the USA and Great Britain proved that the transverse
shape of subsidence trough can be well approximated using the Gauss function. This
assumption then allows us to determine the horizontal displacement at a distance x from the
vertical axis of symmetry as:
- 447 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where: S
i
- settlement at point with coordinate x
i
S
max
- maximum terrain settlement
L
inf
- distance of inflection point
Curve based on Aversin
Aversin derived, based on visual inspection and measurements of underground structures in
Russia, the following expression for the shape of subsidence trough:
kde: S
i
- settlement at point with coordinate x
i
S
max
- maximum terrain settlement
L - reach of subsidence trough
Coefficient of calculation of inflection point
When the classical methods are used the inputted coefficient k
inf
allows the determination of
the inflection point location based on L
inf
=L/k
inf
. In this case the coefficient k
inf
represents a
very important input parameter strongly influencing the shape and slope of subsidence
trough. Its value depends on the average soil or rock, respectively, in overburden literature
offers the values of k
inf
in the range 2,1 - 4,0.
Based on a series of FEM calculations the following values are recommended:
- gravel soil G1-G3 k
inf
=3,5
- sand and gravel soil S1-S5,G4,G5, rocks
R5-R6
k
inf
=3,0
- fine-grained soil F1-F4 k
inf
=2,5
- fine-grained soil F5-F8 k
inf
=2,1
The coefficient for calculation of inflection point is inputted in the frame "Project".
Subsidence trough with several excavations
The principal of superposition is used when calculating the settlement caused by structured or
multiple excavations. Based on input parameters the program first determines subsidence
troughs and horizontal displacements for individual excavations. The overall subsidence
trough is determined subsequently.
Other variables, horizontal strain and gradient of subsidence trough, are post-processed from
the overall subsidence trough.
Analysis of subsidence trough at a depth
A linear interpolation between the maximal value of the settlement S
max
at a terrain surface
- 448 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
and the displacement of roof excavation u
a
is used to calculate the maximum settlement S at
a depth h below the terrain surface in a homogeneous body.
Analysis of subsidence trough at a depth
The width of subsidence trough at an overburden l is provided by:
where: L - length of subsidence trough at terrain surface
r - excavation radius
Z - depth of center point
z - analysis depth
The values l and S are then used to determine the shape of subsidence trough in overburden
above an excavation.
Calculation of other variables
A vertical settlement is accompanied by the evolution of horizontal displacements which may
cause damage to nearby buildings. The horizontal displacement can be derived from the
vertical settlement providing the resulting displacement vectors are directed into the center of
excavation. In such a case the horizontal displacement of the soil is provided by the following
equation:
where: x - distance of point x from axis of excavation
s(x) - settlement at point x
Z - depth of center point of excavation
The horizontal displacements are determined in a differential way along the x axis and in the
transverse direction they can be expressed using the following equation:
- 449 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where: x - distance of point x from axis of excavation
s(x) - settlement at point x
Z - depth of center point of excavation
L
inf
- distance of inflection point
Analysis of failure of buildings
The program first determines the shape and dimensions of subsidence trough and then
performs analysis of their influence on buildings.
The program offers four types of analysis:
- determination of tensile cracks
- determination of gradient damage
- determination of a relative deflection of buildings (hogging, sagging)
- analysis of the inputted section of a building
Tensile cracks
One of the causes responsible for the damage of buildings is the horizontal tensile strain. The
program highlights individual parts of a building with a color pattern that corresponds to a
given class of damage. The maximum value of tensile strain is provided in the text output.
The program offers predefined zones of damage for masonry buildings. These values can be
modified in the frame "Settings". Considerable experience with a number of tunnels
excavated below build-up areas allowed for elaborating the relationship between the shape of
subsidence trough and damage of buildings to such precision that based on this it is now
possible to estimate an extent of compensations for possible damage caused by excavation
with accuracy acceptable for both preparation of contractual documents and for contractors
preparing proposals for excavation of tunnels.
Recommended values for masonry buildings from one to six floors are given in the following
table.
Horizontal strains (per mille)
Proportional h.s. ( per
mille)
Damage Description
0.2 0.5 Microcracks Microcracks
0.5 - 0.75 Little damage - superficial Cracks in plaster
0.75 1.0 Little damage Small cracks in walls
1.0 1.8 Medium damage, functional Cracks in walls, problems with
windows and doors
1.8 - Large damage Wide open cracks in bearing
walls and beams
Gradient damage
One of the causes leading to the damage of buildings is the slope subsidence trough. The
program highlights individual parts of a building with a color pattern that corresponds to a
given class of damage. The maximum value of tensile strain is provided in the text output.
- 450 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The program offers predefined zones of damage for masonry buildings. These values can be
modified in the frame "Settings". Considerable experience with a number of tunnels
excavated below build-up areas allowed for elaborating the relationship between the shape of
subsidence trough and damage of buildings to such precision that based on this it is now
possible to estimate an extent of compensations for possible damage caused by excavation
with accuracy acceptable for both preparation of contractual documents and for contractors
preparing proposals for excavation of tunnels.
Recommended values for masonry buildings from one to six floors are given in the following
table.
Gradient
Gradient Damage Description
1:1200 - 800 Microcracks Microcracks
1:800 - 500 Little damage - superficial Cracks in plaster
1:500 - 300 Little damage Small cracks in walls
1:300 - 150 Medium damage, functional Cracks in walls, problems
with windows and doors
1:150 - 0 Large damage Wide open cracks in bearing
walls and beams
Relative deflection
Definition of the term relative deflection is evident from the figure. The program searches
regions on buildings with the maximum relative deflection both upwards and downwards.
Clearly, from the damage of building point of view the most critical is the relative deflection
upwards leading to "tensile opening" of building.
Relative deflection
Verification of the maximum relative deflection is left to the user the following tables list
the ultimate values recommended by literature.
Type of
structure
Type of
damage
Ultimate relative deflection A/l
Burland and Wroth Meyerhof Polshin a
Tokar
SN
73 1001
Unreinforced
bearing
walls
Cracks in
walls
For L/H = 1 - 0.0004
For L/H = 5 - 0.0008
0,0004 0,0004 0,0015
Cracks in
bearing
structures
For L/H = 1 - 0.0002
For L/H = 5 - 0.0004
- - -
Failure of a section of building
- 451 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
In a given section the program determines the following variables:
- maximum tensile strain
- maximum gradient
- maximum relative deflection
- relative gradient between inputted points of a building
Evaluation of the analyzed section is left to the user the following tables list the
recommended ultimate values of relative rotation and deflection.
Type of
structure
Type of
damage
Ultimate relative gradient
Skempton Meyerhof Polshin a
Tokar
Bjerrum SN
73 1001
Frame
structures
and
reinforced
bearing
walls
Structural 1/150 1/250 1/200 1/150
Cracks in
walls
1/300 1/500 1/500 1/500 1/500
Type of
structure
Type of
damage
Ultimate relative deflection A/l
Burland and Wroth Meyerhof Polshin a
Tokar
SN
73 1001
Unreinforced
bearing
walls
Cracks in
walls
For L/H = 1 - 0.0004
For L/H = 5 - 0.0008
0,0004 0,0004 0,0015
Cracks in
bearing
structures.
For L/H = 1 - 0.0002
For L/H = 5 - 0.0004
- - -
Rock slope
Program for stability analysis of rock slope treats the following types of failure of rock faces:
- sliding on the plane slip surface
- translation on the polygonal slip surface
- fall of the rock wedge
Failure of a rock face due to sliding on the plane slip surface
- 452 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Translation on the polygonal slip surface
Fall of the rock wedge
Plane slip surface
Failure on the plane slip surface is manifested by a rock block sliding down along this surface.
The solution procedure requires determination of the normal force N acting on the slip
surface, the shear force T
act
( active) and the resisting shear force T
res
( passive).
Forces on the slip surface
The shear strength parameters and the normal force N acting on the slip surface are the main
input data for the determination of the resisting shear forces T
res
. Calculation of the active
shear force T
act
and the normal force N is further influenced by the weight of block (depends
on the geometry and bulk weight of rock), anchorage, surcharge, influence of water and
seismic effects. The active force and the normal force are determined as a sum of all forces
entering the analysis.
The program offers several types of plane slip surfaces:
- smooth
- undulating
- 453 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- stepped
The slip surface can be specified with a tension crack.
The resulting verification can be carried out either according to the theory of limit states or
factors of safety.
The resulting verification can be carried out according to the theory of limit states or factors
of safety.
Stepped slip surface
If the rock body contains a system of parallel discontinuous cracks inclined to the top face of
a rock and the second system is indistinctive, then it is possible to consider a formation of a
stepped (jagged) slip surface in the rock body. This surface can be introduced into the
program using the Calla and Nicholas theory, which increases resistance on the slip surface
by At.
where:
o
n
- normal stress acting in the direction normal to the slip
surface
v
- waviness angle
T - effective tensile strength of steps in the intact rock
k - part of the height h
t
associated with steps in the intact rock
(not created by a secondary system of planes)
h
t
- normal height of stepped wedge resting on an inclined plane
of principal system of discontinuity planes
T
0
- tensile strength of intact rock
Stepped slip surface
Tensile strength of rock
- 454 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Tensile strength T
e
is 20 to 30 x smaller than the strength of rock in simple compression o
c.
Strength in simple tension T
o
for selected intact rocks [MPa]
Basalt 3 - 18
Gneiss 7 - 16
Granite 11 - 21
Limestone 3 - 5
Marble 7 - 12
Quarzite 4 - 23
Sandstone 5 - 11
Schist 5 - 12
Slate 2 - 17
Tuff 2 - 4
Undulating slip surface
If undulating surface is considered (on scale I to 10 m) it is possible to account for waviness
by angle v:
where:
o
- slip surface gradient
o
i
- gradient of the i-th fault of slip surface
The waviness increases the tensile strength t on slip surface by At:
where:
o
n
- normal stress acting in the direction normal to the slip surface
v
- waviness angle

Undulating slip surface
Anchorage of rock slope
Two types of anchors can be defined when running the slope stability analysis on a plane slip
surface:
- 455 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Active
An active anchor is represented by a pre-stressed anchor, for which the anchor forces are
activated before the sliding of a rock block takes place. The normal force increases the normal
stress on a slip surface and as such also the resisting forces; the tangent component of the
normal force is either added to or subtracted from the shear (active) forces.
Passive
A passive anchor is activated by sliding of a rock block (i.e. not pre-stressed anchors). The
normal force increases the normal stress on a slip surface and as such also the resisting
forces; the tangent component of the normal force is added to the resisting forces.
Resolution of anchor force
Surcharge of rock slope
The surcharge resultant is determined first. The normal component of the resultant force
increases the normal stress on a slip surface and as such also the resisting forces T
res
, the
tangent component is either added to or subtracted from the shear (active) forces T
act
.
Resolution of surcharge
I nfluence of water acting on slip surface
- 456 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The following options to account for water effects are available in the program:
Without ground water, water is not
considered
Hydrostatic pressure, GWT above
toe of slope
Hydrostatic pressure, GWT on
tension crack
Hydrostatic pressure, GWT on
tension crack, max
Hydrostatic pressure, water acting
on tension crack only
Own water force acting on slip
surface only
Own water force behavior
GWT above toe of slope
Hydrostatic pressure, GWT above toe of slope
The slip surface is either entirely or partially below the ground water table, the maximal
water pressure is at the toe of face.
Hydrostatic pressure on slip surface
- 457 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The value of water pressure u at the heel of slope is given by:
where:

w
- bulk weight of water
h
t
- height of GWT above toe of slope
The resulting compressive water force acting in the direction normal to the slip surface is
given by:
where:

w
- bulk weight of water
h
t
- height of GWT above toe of slope
o
- deflection of slip surface from horizontal
GWT on tension crack

GTW on tension crack
The slip surface is entirely below the ground water table; the GWT either intersects the
tension crack or is aligned with terrain, the maximal value of uplift pressure is at the toe of
face.
Hydrostatic pressure on slip surface and on tension crack, max. value at the toe of slope
The value of uplift pressure u at the intersection of slip surface and tension crack is given by:
where:

w
- bulk weight of water
h
t
- height of GWT above the line of intersection of slip surface and tension
crack
The resulting compressive water force V acting in the direction normal to the tension crack is
given by:
- 458 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where:

w
- bulk weight of water
h
t
- height of GWT above the line of intersection of slip surface and tension
crack
|
- deflection of tension crack from vertical
The value of pressure u
1
at the toe of slope is given by:
kde:

w
- bulk weight of water
H
w
- height of GWT above toe of slope
The resulting compressive water force U acting in the direction normal to the tension crack is
given:
kde: u - water pressure acting on the line of intersection of slip surface and
tension crack
u
1
- water pressure at toe of slope
h
t
- height of GWT above the line of intersection of slip surface and tension
crack
o
- deflection of slip surface from horizontal
H
w
- height of GWT above toe of slope
GWT on tension crack, max
GWT on tension crack
The slip surface is entirely below the ground water table, the GWT either intersects the
tension crack or is aligned with terrain, the maximal value of uplift pressure is at the
intersection of tension crack and slip surface.
Hydrostatic pressure on slip surface and on tension crack
- 459 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The value of uplift pressure u at the intersection of slip surface and tension crack is given by:
where:

w
- bulk weight of water
h
t
- height of GWT above the line of intersection of slip surface and tension
crack
The resulting compressive water force V acting in the direction normal to the tension crack is
given by:
where:

w
- bulk weight of water
h
t
- height of GWT above the line of intersection of slip surface and tension
crack
|
- deflection of tension crack from vertical
The resulting value of pressure u
1
at the toe of slope is equal to zero.
The resulting compressive water force U acting in the direction normal to the tension crack is
given:
where: u - water pressure acting on the line of intersection of slip surface and
tension crack
h
t
- height of GWT above the line of intersection of slip surface and tension
crack
o
- deflection of slip surface from horizontal
H
w
- height of GWT above toe of slope
Water acting on tension crack only
Water acting on tension crack only
The slip surface is fully dry; the GWT either intersects the tension crack or is aligned with
terrain, the maximal value of uplift pressure is at the intersection of slip surface and tension
crack.
- 460 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Water acting on tension crack only
The value of uplift pressure u at the intersection of slip surface and tension crack is given by:
where:

w
- bulk weight of water
h
t
- height of GWT above the line of intersection of slip surface and tension
crack
The resulting compressive water force V acting in the direction normal to the tension crack is
given by:
where:

w
- bulk weight of water
h
t
- height of GWT above the line of intersection of slip surface and tension
crack
|
- deflection of tension crack from vertical
The value of water pressure acting on slip surface is equal to zero.
Own water force acting on slip surface only
Own water force acting on slip surface only
The program allows for a manual input of the value of water pressure p
s
in [kPa] acting on a
slip surface, providing the pressure distribution is constant.
- 461 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Own value of water pressure acting on slip surface
Own water force behavior
Own water force behavior
The program allows for a manual input of the value of water pressure p
t
in [kPa] acting on a
tension crack, providing the pressure distributions are constant.
Own values of water pressure on slip surface and on tension crack
Polygonal slip surface
The program performs stability analysis of rock blocks moving along the polygonal slip
surface. Owing to the complexity of the general solution the program admits the following
assumptions:
- motion of rock blocks is only translational
- blocks translate along the polygonal slip surface formed either by planar planes or
planes with moderate waviness
- rock blocks are divided by joints with known directions
- actual deformation of rock mass inside the blocks is negligible
- failure on the polygonal slip surface and along joints is driven by the
Mohr-coulomb failure criterion
- the same factor of safety is assumed for all joints and along the entire polygonal
- 462 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
slip surface
- all rock blocks are in contact (opening of joints is not allowed)
- the shear forces on the polygonal slip surface have the same sign
The Mohr-Coulomb shear strength parameters on the slip surface and on joints separating
individual block are the main input data for the determination of stability of rock blocks. The
solution is further influenced by the weight of block (depends on the geometry and bulk
weight of rock), anchorage, surcharge, influence of water and seismic effects.
The basic theoretical grounds of the solution are described here.
Polygonal slip surface
Geometry of rock block
The block geometry is determined by the gradient o, by the length of a given slip surface and
by the gradient of a dividing joint | separating the subsequent block as well as by the
gradient o and the length l of the top face of external surface of a rock slope (natural profile).
Lengths of planes can be defined either by the total length or by the lengths of their
horizontal and vertical projections. It is necessary to ensure the condition that all rock blocks
are in contact (the opening between joints is not allowed).
Geometry of the i-th element
- 463 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Anchor forces, surcharge
It is possible to introduce anchor forces and surcharges of rock blocks. The resultant of forces
acting on the i-th block in kN/ m is then determined. All forces acting on the block excluding
the water pressure on the slip surface and the joints are taken into account.
Surcharge acting on the block
It is possible to input surface, strip and trapezoidal surcharge of terrain. The program then
determines their effect on individual rock blocks.
Anchor forces
The applied anchor force is adjusted per 1m run based on the specified horizontal spacing of
anchors.
External forces on the i-th element
I nfluence of water
The water pressure along the joints and on the slip surface can be taken into account. It is
introduced as external loading:
Water pressure on j oints ( water between blocks) F
v
It must be introduced into the analysis whenever the presence of water in the joints between
blocks is expected. It is applied as a resultant force F
v
in kN (the pressure acting on the
immerse part of the joint per 1m run is considered).
Water pressure on the external slip surface ( uplift pressure) U
It is defined as hydrostatic pressure on each slip surface of the polygon (external slip surface)
separately and introduced as an external loading (uplift pressure) U in kN, which can be
reduced depending on the slip surface permeability (the pressure acting on the immerse part
of the slip surface per 1m run is considered).
- 464 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Water forces acting on a rock block
Solution procedure
For each rock block resting on the polygonal slip surface the program applies the basic
equation of the stability of rock slope sliding along the plane slip surface as:
where: R - resultant of all active forces
k
1
,k
2
- coefficients depending on slope gradient, inclination of anchor
force, angle of internal friction and factor of safety
c - cohesion on slip surface
G - tha horninovho tlesa ohroenho weight of a rock body in
danger of sliding
such that the resultant of all active forces is assumed as an unknown interaction force K
i
between rock blocks (see figure). If, apart from interaction force, the i-th rock block is further
loaded by other external forces, it is possible to write the interaction force of the i-th block in
the form:
where: c
i
- cohesion on slip surface of i-th block
G
i
- weight of i-th rock block
P
i
G
- overall external force acting on i-th block in vertical direction
P
i
K
- overall external force acting on i-th block in the direction of
interaction force
K
i
G
- magnitude of interaction force on i-th block in vertical direction
K
i
K
- magnitude of interaction force on i-th in the direction of K
k
1i
-
coefficient depending on gradient of slip surface o, gradient of
external loading |
i
, stability of rock slope and angle of internal
friction
i
- 465 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
k
2i
-
coefficient depending on gradient of slip surface o, gradient of
external loading |
i
, stability of rock slope and angle of internal
friction
i
By combining the above forces it is possible to implicitly express the gradient of interaction
force K
i
of the i-th block as:
where: o
i
- gradient of interaction force Ki of i-th block
c
i
- cohesion on slip surface of i-th block
A
i
- slip surface of i-th rock block
R
i
- interaction force on i-th block
F - ratio of maximal shear resistance and acting shear force

i
- angle of internal friction on slip surface of i-th block
Forces acting on slip surfaces between blocks (internal slip surfaces)
Rock wedge
The program performs stability analysis of a rock wedge that is wedged in between two
surfaces (planes) and slides in the direction of the line of interaction (tray) of these planes.
- 466 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Gradient of this intersection must be considerably larger than the angle of internal friction
along dividing planes, whereas the falling line of both dividing planes must be directed
towards the line of intersection. It is further assumed that the tray is located in a stable rock
body.
The solution requires determination of the normal force N, the shear force T
act
(active)
and the resisting ( passive) shear force T
res
acting on slip surfaces A1 and A2. The active
force T
act
and the normal force N are obtained as a summation all forces entering the analysis
after performing the space resolution of these forces.
The Mohr-Coulomb shear strength parameters and the normal force N acting on the slip
surface are the main input data for the determination of the resisting shear forces T
res
.
Calculation of the active shear force T
act
and the normal force N is further influenced by the
weight of block (depends on the geometry and bulk weight of rock), anchorage, surcharge,
influence of water and seismic effects.
The slip surface can be specified with a tension crack. The resulting verification can be carried
out either according to the theory of limit states or factors of safety.
Components acting on a rock wedge
Geometry of rock wedge
Entering geometry of a rock wedge using either gradient or falling line gradient direction
requires definition of space orientation of the rock face, terrain (top face), slip surfaces N1
and N2 and/or tension crack, such that:
- Gradient (gradient angle) is an inclination angle o representing inclination of surface
from horizontal (it may receive values from 0 to 90)
- Gradient direction (falling line) is an angle between horizontal projection of the line
normal to the strike direction measured as an azimuth angle (from the north in the
clockwise direction) (the falling line corresponds to inclination of the plane), it may
receive values from 0 to 360
The program when defining space orientation of planes displays these planes using a
stereographic projection.
- 467 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008

Description of orientation of surfaces (vertical cut through a rock mass and plane projection)
Stereographic proj ection
When defining geometry of the wedge and slip surfaces using space projection, the program
displays individual surfaces with the help of great circles of Lambert's hemispherical
projection.
Hemispherical projection of the inclined plane
I nfluence of ground water
By default the program performs the stability analysis of a rock wedge without considering
ground water. If interested on the influence of ground water on a rock wedge it is necessary
to introduce the height of GWT from the line of intersection of slip surfaces and rock face (the
GWT takes an arbitrary position over the entire height of a rock wedge). The program
assumes that water can flow freely discontinuities located below the GWT (no restrictions,
e.g. due to ice blocks, are considered).
The water pressure acts in the direction normal to the slip surfaces against normal
components of the passive forces. If the height y
w
above the point of maximal pressure P
max
is equal or larger than Z/2 and it is fully contained by the rock wedge, then its value is
assumed to be equal to Z/2 (case A). If the height y
w
above the point of maximal pressure P
max
is less than Z/2 (case B), then its value reduced as:
- 468 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where: L* - length of the line of intersection of slip surfaces A1, A2
o
1
- gradient of rock face
o
- gradient of the of line of intersection of slip surfaces
The resulting water pressure on slip surfaces 1 and 2 is given by:
where: Z - height of GWT above the line of intersection of slip surfaces and rock
face
P
max
- maximal water pressure on the line of intersection of slip surfaces

w
- bulk weight of water
A
1
w
- are of the wetted part of the slip surface 1
A
2
w
- area of the wetted part of the slip surface 2
A) B)
Distribution of water pressure on the line of intersection of slip surfaces
If a tension crack is found either entirely or partially below the GWT, then the influence of
water pressure is reflected both on slip surfaces 1 and 2 through forces P
1
and P
2
acting on
intersection of these surfaces and on tension crack through force P
3
acting in the direction
normal to the tension crack.
- 469 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Distribution of water pressure when considering GWT in tension crack
Resolution of acting forces
Forces acting on a rock wedge (weight of rock wedge, external loading, anchor force) are
resolved into directions normal to planes A1 and A2 (the block is wedged in between these
surfaces) and into the direction of their intersection. The resolution of forces results into the
normal forces N1, N2 acting on planes A1 and A2, resisting (passive) forces T
res1
, T
res2
acting
along planes A1 and A2.
This step further generates the shear ( active) force T
act
acting in the direction of the line of
intersection of slip surfaces. The resulting shear ( active) force T
act
is obtained as a sum of
individual shear forces T
act,i
.
The resisting ( passive) force T
res
is found by summing up the components T
res1
, T
res2
(e.g.
due to external loading) and friction forces on planes A1 and A2 due to normal forces:
where: c
1
- cohesion on slip surface A
1
c
2
- cohesion on slip surfaceA
2

1
- angle of internal friction on slip surface A
1

2
- angle of internal friction on slip surface A
2
T
vzd1
- resisting forces on slip surface A
1
T
vzd2
- resisting forces on slip surface A
2
Space resolution of self weight of earth wedge W
Verification
Verification can be carried out either according to the theory of limit states or factor of
safety.
Verification according to the factor of safety
When performing verification according to the factor of safety the program directly
- 470 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
determines the value of the factor of safety F
S
. Verification condition has the form:
where: T
pos
- shear forces along the slip surface
T
vzd
- passive forces along the slip surface
F
s
- required factor of safety
When analyzing the polygonal slip surface the program directly determines the value of the
factor of safety F
S
.
Verification condition has the form:
where: F
S
- calculated factor of safety
SB - required factor of safety
Typical values for most cases when studying stability of rock slopes are, e.g. for walls of
foundation pits F =1,1 to 1,25, for rock cuts of highways F =1,2 to 1,5, etc.
Verification according to the theory of limit states
When performing verification according to the theory of limit states the program reduces
material parameters of rocks (angle of internal friction or tangent of the angle of internal
friction, cohesion) using partial coefficients entered in the frame "Settings".
Verification condition has the form:
where: T
pos
- shear forces along the slip surface
T
vzd
- passive forces along the slip surface

s
- coefficient of the overall stability of the structure
When analyzing the polygonal slip surface the program compares the calculated value with
the value corresponding to the fully stressed design (state of equilibrium with zero reserve).
Verification condition has the form:
where: F
S
- factor of safety calculated with the reduced material parameters

s
- coefficient of the overall stability of the structure
Recommended partial coefficients according to EC7:
- coefficient of reduction of the angle of internal friction

m
= 1.25
- coefficient of reduction of the cohesion

mc
= 1.25
- 471 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Rock - shear resistance criteria
The shear strength is the basic criterion to determine resisting passive forces. The resisting
force is given by the following expression:
where:
t
- shear strength on the slip surface
l - length of the slip surface
The shear strength for the planar slip surface can be written as:
- Mohr - Coulomb
- Hoek - Brown
- Barton - Bandis
Mohr - Coulomb
The shear strength according to the Mohr-Coulomb is given by:
where: N - normal force acting on the slip surface
l - length of the slip surface
c - cohesion of soil / rock

- angle of internal friction

Approximate ranges of parameters of the Mohr-Coulomb failure criterion for selected soils are
given here.
Parameters Mohr Coulomb
If possible the strength parameters should be determined in-situ measurements. The results
of in-situ and laboratory experiments show that the angle of internal friction is found for
majority of discontinuities in the rock mass in the range of 27 to 47. Approximate values of
the angle of internal friction and cohesion c for rocks based on the RMR classification are
stored in the following table:
Rock class I II III IV V
RMR 100 - 81 80 - 61 60 - 41 40 - 21 < 20
angle of internal
friction ||
> 45 35 - 45 25 - 45 15 - 25 < 15
cohesion c [kPa] > 400 300 - 400 200 - 300 100 - 200 < 100
Hoek - Brown
The modified Hoek-Brown failure criterion describes the failure of a rock mass (based on the
performed analyses of hundreds of underground structures and rock slopes) as:
where:
o
1ef
- major principal stress during rock failure
o
3ef
- minor principal stress during rock failure
- 472 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
o
c
- strength of the intact rock in simple compression
m
b
,s - nonlinear material constant depending on the rock quality
a - coefficient depending on the rock breaking
Basic parameters of the modified Hoek-Brown model should be determined from in-situ and
laboratory measurements. To become more acquainted with this model, a brief list of ranges
of individual parameters is provided.
If rock mass classification using GSI is known then it is possible to let the program to
determine the H-B parameters by itself.
For actual analysis the H-B parameters are transformed into the M-C parameters. The
solution procedure then becomes identical to that of the Mohr-Coulomb criterion.
This transformation employs the solution derived by Hoek and Brown in 1990 for known value
of the effective normal stress o
n
, which is typical for the solution of slope stability problem.
where:
o
c
- strength of the intact rock in simple compression
m - nonlinear material constant depending on the rock quality
a - coefficient depending on the rock breaking
Parameters Hoek Brown
Parameter of rock breaking a
Parameter a is an exponent receiving values from 0,5 to 0,65 (for the original Hoek-Brown
condition it is equal to 0,5) and depends on the degree of rock breaking.
Nonlinear parameters m
b
= m, s for a = 0,5
(index r denotes residual values)
Carbonate
rocks with
well
developed
cleavage
dolomite,
limestone,
marble
Argillaceous
rocks
mudstone,
siltstone,
shale, slate
Arenaceous
rocks
sandstone,
quartzite
Fine grained
igneous
crystalline
rocks
andesite,
dolerite,
basalt,
rhyolite
Coarse
metamorphic
and igneous
rocks
gabbro, gneiss,
granite
- 473 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Intact rock
material
Laboratory
specimens have
no discontinuities
RMR=100
Q=500
m = 7.00
s = 1.00
mr = 7.00
sr = 1,00
m = 10.00
s = 1.00
mr = 10.00
sr = 1.00
m = 15.00
s = 1.00
mr = 15.00
s = 1.00
m = 17.00
s = 1.00
mr = 17.00
s = 1.00
m = 25.00
s = 1.00
mr = 25.00
s = 1.00
Very good quality
rock mass
Rocks without
isolated blocks,
with
non-weathered
discontinuities
RMR=85
Q=100
m = 2.40
s = 0.082
mr = 4.10
sr = 0.189
m = 3.43
s = 0.082
mr = 5.85
sr = 0.189
m = 5.14
s = 0.082
mr = 8.78
sr = 0.189
m = 5.82
s = 0.082
mr = 9.95
sr = 0.189
m = 8.56
s = 0.082
mr = 14.63
sr = 0.189
Good quality rock
mass
Slightly damaged
rocks with
non-weathered
discontinuities
spaced from 1 to
3 m
RMR=65
Q=10
m = 0.575
s = 0.00293
mr = 2.006
sr = 0.0205
m = 0.821
s = 0.00293
mr = 2.865
sr = 0.0205
m = 1.231
s = 0.00293
mr = 4.298
sr = 0.0205
m = 1.395
s = 0.00293
mr = 4.871
sr = 0.0205
m = 2.052
s = 0.00293
mr = 7.163
sr = 0.0205
Fair quality rock
mass
Partially
weathered
discontinuities
spaced from 0,3
to 1 m
RMR=44
Q=1
m = 0.128
s = 0.00009
mr = 0.947
sr = 0.00198
m = 0.183
s = 0.00009
mr = 1.353
sr = 0.00198
m = 0.275
s = 0.00009
mr = 2.030
sr = 0.00198
m = 0.311
s = 0.00009
mr = 2.301
sr = 0.00198
m = 0.458
s = 0.00009
mr = 3.383
sr = 0.00198
Poor quality rock
mass
Numerous
weathered
discontinuities
spaced from 30 to
500 mm
RMR=23
Q=0,1
m = 0.029
s = 0.000003
mr = 0.447
sr = 0.00019
m = 0.041
s = 0.000003
mr = 0.639
sr = 0.00019
m = 0.061
s = 0.000003
mr = 0.959
sr = 0.00019
m = 0.069
s = 0.000003
mr = 1.087
sr = 0.00019
m = 0.102
s = 0.000003
mr = 1.598
sr = 0.00019
- 474 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Very poor quality
rock mass
Numerous
extremely
weathered
discontinuities
with filling spaced
by less than 50
mm, fine grained
waste rock
RMR=3
Q=0,01
m = 0.007
s =
0.0000001
mr = 0.219
sr = 0.00002
m = 0.010
s =0.0000001
mr = 0.313
sr = 0.00002
m = 0.015
s = 0.0000001
mr = 0.469
sr = 0.00002
m = 0.017
s =
0.0000001
mr = 0.532
sr = 0.00002
m = 0.025
s = 0.0000001
mr = 0.782
sr = 0.00002
Strength of rocks in simple compression o
c ,
Poisson's number v and bulk weight of
rock
Rock
strength
Types of rock (examples) Strength
o
c
[MPa]
Poisson's
number
v
Bulk weight of
rock
[kN/m
3
]
Solid rock most hard solid rock, intact,
compact and dense quartz rock
and basalt, other extraordinary
hard rocks
>150 0,1 28,00 - 30,00
Highly
hard rock
very hard granit rock, quartz
porphyry, very hard granite,
hard flinty shale, quartzite, very
hard sand rock and very hard
cacite
100 - 150 0,15 26,00 - 27,00
Hard rock granite, very hard sandstone
and calcite, quarzite lode, hard
conglomerate, very hard ore,
hard limestone, marble,
dolomite, pyrite
80 - 100 0,20 25,00 - 26,00
Rock sandstone, ore, medium sandy
shale, flagstone
50 - 80 0,25 24,00
Medium
rock
hard mudstone, softer sand
rock and calcite, chalky clay
20 - 50 0,25 0,30 23 - 24,00
Soft rock shale, soft limestone, calk, salt
rock, frozen ground, anthracite,
marl, remoulded sandstone,
soft conglomerate, ground with
fels
5 - 20 0,3 0,35 22,00 26,00
Weak soil compact clay, soil eluvium,
black coal
0,5 - 5 0,35 0,40 20,00 - 22,0
18,00 - 20,00
Calculation of Hoek- Brown parameters
If rock mass classification using GSI (Geological Structure Index) is known then it is possible
to let the program to determine the H-B parameters as follows:
- 475 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where: GSI - Geological Structure Index
D - damage coefficient of rock mass
m
i
- strength material constant of the intact rock for peak
conditions
Values of damage coefficient D for rock slope
Description of rock mass
Suggested
value of
coefficient D
Small scale blasting in engineering
slopes results in modest rock mass
damage, particularly if controlled
blasting is used. However, stress
relief results in some disturbance.
(Good blasting).
0,7
Small scale blasting in engineering
slopes results in modest rock mass
damage, particularly if controlled
blasting is used. However, stress
relief results in some disturbance.
(Poor blasting).
1
Very large open pit mine slopes
significant disturbance due to heavy
production blasting and due to stress
relief from overburden removal.
(Production blasting).
1
In some softer rocks excavation can
be carried out by ripping and dozing
and the degree of damage to the
slope is less.
(Mechanical excavation).
0,7
Approximate vlaues of strength material constant of the intact rock m
i
(after Hoek)
Type of rock Representative rocks m
i
[-]
Limestone rocks with well
developed crystalline
cleavage
Dolomite, calcite, marble
~ 7
Consolidated clayey rocks Mudstone, siltstone, silty
shale, slate
~ 10
Sandy rocks with solid
crystals and poorly
developed crystalline
cleavage
Sandstone, quarzite
~ 15
Fine grained igneous
crystalline rocks
Andesite, dolerite, diabase,
rhyolite
~ 17
- 476 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Coarse grained and
metamorphic rocks
Amphibolite, gabbro,
gneiss, granite, diorite
~ 25
Barton - Bandis
The Barton-Bandis shear strength failure criterion for the rock mass takes the following form:
where: JRC - joint roughness coefficient
o
n
- normal stress acting on the surface of the rock joint
JCS - joint compressive strength

b
- basic angle of internal friction of the slip surface
If possible the shear strength parameters should be determined from in-situ measurements.
Approximate ranges of parameters of the Barton-Bandis failure criterion are given here.
Barton Bandis parameters
J oint roughness coefficient J RC
If the value of JRC cannot be determined by direct measurements on the joint surface, it is
possible to obtain this value from the Barton graph (see figure) showing the variation of the
coefficient JRC as a function of length of profile and roughness depth.
- 477 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Diagram to determine J RC (after Barton)
Rock joint roughness profiles showing the typical range of J RC are plotted next.
- 478 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Rock joint roughness profiles showing the typical range of J RC (Barton & Chubey 1977)
Compressive strength of discontinuity J CS
Methods allowing us to determine the compressive strength of discontinuity (slip surface) JCS
are generally recommended by ISRM. The value of JCS can be obtained from the Deer-Miller
graph showing its dependence on the rock strength found from the Schmidt hammer
measurements, see figure below.
- 479 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Basic angle of internal friction on slip surface
b
The basic value of the angle of internal friction on the surface is approximately equal to the
residual value
r
. Nevertheless, it can be generally measured in laboratories using shear
measurement devices (typical area of the specimen is 50 x 50 mm). Typical ranges of the
basic angle of internal friction for weathered rock surfaces are 25 to 35.
Bulk weight of rocks
Bulk weight or rock
Rock strength Rock category (examples)
Bulk weight of rock
[kN/m
3
]
Solid rock most hard solid rock, intact, compact and
dense quartz rock and basalt, other
extraordinary hard rocks
28,00 - 30,00
Highly hard
rock
very hard granit rock, quartz porphyry, very
hard granite, hard flinty shale, quartzite, very
hard sand rock and very hard cacite
26,00 - 27,00
Hard rock granite, very hard sandstone and calcite,
quarzite lode, hard conglomerate, very hard
ore, hard limestone, marble, dolomite, pyrite
25,00 - 26,00
- 480 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Rock sandstone, ore, medium sandy shale,
flagstone
24,00
Medium rock hard mudstone, softer sand rock and calcite,
chalky clay
23 - 24,00
Soft rock shale, soft limestone, calk, salt rock, frozen
ground, anthracite, marl, remoulded
sandstone, soft conglomerate, ground with
fels
22,00 26,00
Weak soil compact clay, soil eluvium, black coal
20,00 - 22,0
18,00 - 20,00
I nfluence of seismic effects
The programs allows for taking into account the earthquake effects using two variables
coefficient of horizontal acceleration K
h
and coefficient of vertical acceleration K
v
.
The coefficient of acceleration is a dimensionless number, which represents the seismic
acceleration as a fraction of the gravity acceleration. Earthquake effects are introduced
through the seismic force S, which is determined by multiplying the weight of the rock
subjected to earthquake (i.e. rock block) by the coefficient of acceleration. When assuming
seismic waves only in the horizontal direction the seismic force is given by:
where: K
h
- coefficient of horizontal acceleration
W - weight of the rock body
The seismic force always acts in the center of gravity of the rock body. Usually, only seismic
effects in the horizontal direction are considered. Nevertheless, the program also allows for
treating the vertical direction (with the help of vertical coefficient of acceleration K
v
). Effects
in both directions are then combined.
M_C_S grade horizontal acceleration coefficient of horizontal
acceleration
(MSK-64) [mm/s
2
] K
h
1 0,0 - 2,5 0,0 - 0.00025
2 2,5 - 5,0 0,00025 - 0.0005
3 5,0 - 10,0 0,0005 - 0.001
4 10,0 - 25,0 0,001 - 0.0025
5 25,0 - 50,0 0,0025 - 0.005
6 50,0 - 100,0 0,005 - 0.01
7 100,0 - 250,0 0,01 - 0.025
8 250,0 - 500,0 0,025 - 0.05
- 481 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
9 500,0 - 1000,0 0,05 - 0.1
10 1000,0 - 2500,0 0,1 - 0.25
11 2500,0 - 5000,0 0,25 - 0.5
12 > 5000,0 > 0.5
The values of factor Kh correspond to individual degrees of earthquake according to M-C-S
scale
Dimensioning of concrete structures
Concrete structures can by analyze by folowing standards:
- CSN 73 1201R
- EC2 (EN 1992 1-1)
- PN-B-03264
- BS 8110
- IS 456
- ACI 31802
- AS 3600-2001
CSN 73 1201 R
This help contains the following computationals methods:
- Materials, coefficients, notation
- Verification of cross-section made from plain concrete
- RC rectangular cross-section under M
- RC rectangular cross-section under the bending moment
and normal compression force
- Verification of spread footing for punching shear
- Verification of circular RC cross-section
Materials, coefficients, notation
The following notation for material parameters is used:
R
bd
- design strength of concrete in compression
R
btd
- design strength of concrete in tension

u
- coefficient of the shape of cross-section
z - lever arm (arm of internal forces)
Coefficient
u
is given by equation:
- 482 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The most common notation for geometrical parameters:
b - cross-section width
h - cross-section depth
h
e
- effective depth of cross-section
z - lever arm (arm of internal forces)
Verification of cross- sections made from plain concrete
The cross-section is rectangular, loaded by the bending moment M, normal force N (applied
in the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force Q. The cross-section bearing capacity
subjected to bending moment is given by:
The shear strength is provided by:
Strength of concrete cross-section subject to the combination of bending moment and normal
force is derived from the following expressions depending on the normal force eccentricity e:
for:
The ultimate bearing capacity is checket using the following formula:
RC rectangular cross- section under M
The cross-section is rectangular, reinforced on one side and loaded by the bending moment M
d
.
The ultimate moment is provided by:
- 483 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The program further checks whether the location of neutral axis x is less than the limit
location of neutral axis x
lim
given by:
The computed degree of reinforcement is checked using the following expressions:
RC rectangular cross- section under the bending moment
and normal compression force
The cross-section is rectangular, unilaterally reinforced and loaded by the bending moment M
and normal compression force. The location of the neutral axis follows from:
where:
For x < x
lim
permissible normal force is given by:
For x > x
lim
the corrected location of neutral axis is found from:
where:
Permissible normal force is given by:
- 484 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Permissible bending moment is provided by:
Compression reinforcement is not taken into account.
Verification of spread footing for punching shear
The program allows for the verification of spread footing for punching shear or for the design
of shear reinforcement. The critical section loaded in shear U
cr
is distant from the column
edge by one half of the footing thickness. It is loaded by the prescribed moments M
x
, M
y
and
by the shear force Q
r
provided by:
where: A - area of footing
Q - assigned vertical force developed in column
A
t
- hatched area in fig.
Dimensioning of shear reinforcement area A
t
The program computes the maximal shear force Q
dmax
developed in the critical section, the
shear force transmitted by concrete with no shear reinforcement Q
bu
, and the maximal
allowable force Q
max
:
where for: is: or else:
For Q
dmax
< Q
bu
no shear reinforcement is needed.
- 485 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
For Q
dmax
> Q
bu

and Q
dmax
< Q
max
the shear reinforcement must be introduced. The ultimate
shear force is given by:
where: U
cr
- critical cross-section span
o
- is angle of crooks
A
s
- overall area of crooks in footing
For Q
dmax
> Q
max
the shear reinforcement cannot be designed. It is therefore necessary to
increase the cross-section height.
Verification of circular RC cross- section
The program verifies a reinforced concrete pile using the method of limit deformation. The
maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is 0,002 - 0.0035. The degree of
reinforcement is checked using the formula:
where: d - pile diameter
A
s
- reinforcement area
EC2 ( EN 1992 1- 1)
This help contains the following computationals methods:
- Materials, coefficients, notation
- Standard values of coefficiens
- RC rectangular cross-section under M
- RC rectangular cross-section under the bending moment
and normal compression force
- Verification of spread footing for punching shear
- Verification of cross-section made from plain concrete
- Verification of circular RC cross-section
Materials, coefficients, notation
The following notation for material parameters is used:
f
ck
- charakteristic value of cylindrical strength of concrete in copression
f
cd
- design strength of concrete in compression
f
cm
- average value of tensile strength of concrete
f
ctk0,05
- doln hodnota charakteristick pevnosti betonu v tahu
- 486 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
f
ctd
- design strength of concrete in tension
f
yk
- characteristic strength of steel
f
yd
- design strength of steel in tension
The characteristic compressive strength of concrete is the basic input parameter given by the
class of concrete it serves to derive the remaining coefficients of reliability.
pro:
pro :
Standard values of coefficients o
cc
,
c
,o
ct
,
s
are built in the program these values can also
be inputted by the user depending on the selected National supplement.
The most common notation for geometrical parameters:
b - cross-section width
h - cross-section depth
d - effective depth of cross-section
z - lever arm (arm of internal forces)
Standard values of coefficients
The standard contains a number of coefficients, which can be adjusted in supplements of
National standards. The table provides description of individual coefficients, their values
and corresponding artical of the standard. In some cases the formula contains a variable,
which has no symbol in the standard - in such a case the variable in the expression is
denoted by X.
Coefficient Value Annotations Article

c
1,5 2.4.2.4

s
1,15 2.4.2.4
o
cc
1 3.1.6
o
ct
1 3.1.6
o
cc,pl
0,8 12.3.1
- 487 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
o
ct,pl
0,8 12.3.1
k
f
1,1 2.4.2.4
k 1,5 12.6.3

min
0,0013 9.2.1.1
X 0,26 9.2.1.1

max
0,04 9.2.1.1
X 0,18 6.2.2
v
min
- 6.2.2
X 0,5 6.2.2
v - 6.2.2
RC rectangular cross- section under M
The cross-section is rectangular, reinforced on one side and loaded by the bending moment M
sd
.
The permissible moment for a given area of reinforcements A
s
reads:
The computed degree of reinforcement is checked using the following expressions:
Standard values of coefficients
min
,
max
are built in the program these values can also be
inputted by the user depending on the selected National supplement.
RC rectangular cross- section under the bending moment
and normal compression force
The cross-section is rectangular, unilaterally reinforced and loaded by the bending moment M
and normal compression force. The location of the neutral axis follows from:
- 488 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where:
For x < x
lim
permissible normal force is given by:
For x > x
lim
the corrected location of neutral axis is found from:
where:
Permissible normal force is given by:
Permissible bending moment is provided by:
Compression reinforcement is not taken into account.
Verification of spread footing for punching shear
The critical section loaded in shear u is distant from the column edge by one half of the
footing thickness. It is loaded by the prescribed moments M
Ex
, M
Ey
and by the shear force V
e
provided by:
where: A - area of footing
V - assigned vertical force developed in column
A
t
- hatched area in fig.
- 489 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dimensioning of shear reinforcement area A
t
The program computes the maximal shear force V
ed
developed in the critical section, the
shear force transmitted by concrete with no shear reinforcement V
Rd,c
and the maximal
allowable force V
Rd,max
:
Standard values of coefficients C
Rd,c
, v
min
,v
max
are built in the program these values can
also be inputted by the user depending on the selected National supplement.
The subsequent verification then depends on the magnitude of maximal shear force V
Ed
.
For V
Ed <
V
Rd,c
no shear reinforcement is needed.
For V
Ed >
V
Rd,c
and V
Ed <
V
Rd,max
the shear reinforcement must be introduced. The ultimate
shear force is given by:
where: u - critical cross-section span
o
- is angle of crooks
A
sw
- overall area of crooks in footing
For V
Ed >
V
Rd,max
the shear reinforcement cannot be designed. It is therefore necessary to
increase the cross-section height.
Verification of cross- sections made from plain concrete
The cross-section is rectangular, loaded by the bending moment M
sd
, normal force N
sd
(applied in the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force V
sd
.
The shear strength is provided by:
- 490 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where: A
cc
- tlaen plocha betonu
Standard value of the coefficient k is built in the program (Art. 12.6.3) this value can also
be adjusted in the program based on the selected National supplement.
Strength of concrete cross-section subject to the combination of bending moment and normal
force is derived from the following expressions depending on the normal force eccentricity e:
Standard values of coefficients o
cc,pl
, o
ct,pl
,
c
are built in the program these values can also
be inputted by the user depending on the selected National supplement.
Verification of circular RC cross- section
The program verifies a reinforced concrete pile using the method of limit deformation. The
maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is 0,002 - 0.0035. Cocrete strength q-f
cd
is reduced by ten percent due to shape of cross-section (Art. 3.1.7).
The degree of reinforcement is checked using the formula:
- 491 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where: d - pile diameter
A
s
- cross sectional area of reinfocement
Standard values of coefficients
min
,
max
are built in the program these values can also be
inputted by the user depending on the selected National supplement.
PN- B- 03264
This help contains the following computationals methods:
Materials, coefficients, notation
RC rectangular cross-section under M
RC rectangular cross-section under the bending moment and
normal compression force
Verification of spread footing for punching shear
Verification of cross-section made from plain concrete
Verification of circular RC cross-section
Materials, coefficients, notation
The following notation for material parameters is used:
f
ck
- characteristic strength of concrete in compression
f
cd
- design strength of concrete in compression
f
ctk
- characteristic strength of concrete in tension
f
ctd
- design strength of concrete in tension
f
yk
- characteristic strength of steel
f
yd
- design strength of steel
f
ctm
- design strength of steel in tension
where:
o
cc
=1
o
ct
=1

c
=1,5
- for steel reinforced concrete structures

c
=1,8
- for concrete strustures
The most common notation for geometrical parameters:
b - cross-section width
- 492 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
h - cross-section depth
d - effective depth of cross-section
z - lever arm (arm of internal forces)
RC rectangular cross- section under M
The cross-section is rectangular, reinforced on one side and loaded by the bending moment M
d
.
The permissible moment for a given area of reinforcements A
s
reads:
The program further checks whether the location of neutral axis x is less than the limit
location of neutral axis x
lim
given by:
- for steel class A0
- for steel class AI
- for steel class AII
- for steel class AIII
- for steel class AIIIN
The computed degree of reinforcement is checked using the following expressions:
where:
RC rectangular cross- section under the bending moment
and normal compression force
The cross-section is rectangular, unilaterally reinforced and loaded by the bending moment M
and normal compression force. The location of the neutral axis follows from:
where:
- 493 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
For x < x
lim
permissible normal force is given by:
For x > x
lim
the corrected location of neutral axis is found from:
where:
Permissible normal force is given by:
Permissible bending moment is provided by:
Compression reinforcement is not taken into account.
Verification of spread footing for punching shear
The critical section loaded in shear u is distant from the column edge by one half of the
footing thickness. It is loaded by the prescribed moments M
x
, M
y
and by the shear force N
sd
provided by:
where: A - area of footing
V - assigned vertical force developed in column
A
t
- hatched area in fig.
- 494 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dimensioning of shear reinforcement area A
t
The program computes the maximal shear force N
sd
developed in the critical section, the
shear force transmitted by concrete with no shear reinforcement N
rd1
and the maximal
allowable force N
max
:
For N
sd <
N
rd
no shear reinforcement is needed.
For N
sd >
N
rd
and N
sd <
N
max
the shear reinforcement must be introduced. The ultimate
shear force is given by:
where: u - critical cross-section span
o
- is angle of crooks
A
sw
- overall area of crooks in footing
For N
sd >
N
max
the shear reinforcement cannot be designed. It is therefore necessary to
increase the cross-section height.
Verification of cross- sections made from plain concrete
The cross-section is rectangular, loaded by the bending moment M
sd
, normal force N
sd
(applied in the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force V
sd
. The cross-section bearing
capacity subjected to bending moment is given by:
The shear strength is provided by:
where:
- 495 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Strength of concrete cross-section subject to the combination of bending moment and normal
force is derived from the following expressions depending on the normal force eccentricity e:
where:
Verification of circular RC cross- section
ProgramThe program verifies a reinforced concrete pile using the method of limit
deformation. The maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is 0,002 - 0.0035.
The degree of reinforcement is checked using the formula:
where:
where: d - pile diameter
A
s
- reinforcement area
BS 8110
This help contains the following computationals methods:
- Materials, coefficients, notation
- RC rectangular cross-section under M
- RC rectangular cross-section under the bending moment
and normal compression force
- Verification of spread footing for punching shear
- Verification of cross-sections made from plain concrete
- 496 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- Verification of circular RC cross-section
Materials, coefficients, notation
The following notation for material parameters is used:
f
cu
- characteristic cube compressive strength of concrete
f
y
- characteristic strength of reinforcement
f
yd
- design strength of steel in tension
The characteristic compressive strength of concrete is the basic input parameter given by the
class of concrete.
The most common notation for geometrical parameters:
b - cross-section width
h - cross-section depth
d - effective depth of cross-section
z - lever arm (arm of internal forces)
All computations are carried out according to the theory of limit states.
RC rectangular cross- section under M
The cross-section is rectangular, reinforced on one side and loaded by the bending moment
M.
The permissible moment for a given area of reinforcements A
s
reads:
The program further checks whether the location of neutral axis x is less than the limit
location of neutral axis x
max
given by:
The computed degree of reinforcement is checked using the following expressions:
where:
- for f
y
= 460 N/ mm
2
- for f
y
= 250 N/ mm
2
- 497 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
RC rectangular cross- section under the bending moment
and normal compression force
The cross-section is rectangular, unilaterally reinforced and loaded by the bending moment M
and normal compression force. The location of the neutral axis follows from:
where:
For x < x
lim
permissible normal force is given by:
For x > x
lim
the corrected location of neutral axis is found from:
where:
Permissible normal force is given by:
Permissible bending moment is provided by:
Compression reinforcement is not taken into account.
Verification of spread footing for punching shear
The critical section loaded in shear (U
cr
) is distant from the column edge by one half of the
footing thickness. It is loaded by the prescribed moments M
x
, M
y
and by the shear force V
r
provided by:
- 498 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where: A - area of footing
Q - assigned vertical force developed in column
A
t
- hatched area in fig.
Dimensioning of shear reinforcement area A
t
The program computes the maximum shear force Vdeveloped in the critical section, the
shear force transmitted by concrete with no shear reinforcement V
c
, and the maximal
allowable force V
u
:
where:
v
c
- is design concrete shear stress given by following table:
Effective dept d [mm]
100.A
s
/ b.h 150 175 200 225 250 300 400
1,15 0,50 0,48 0,47 0,45 0,44 0,42 0,40
0,25 0,60 0,57 0,55 0,54 0,53 0,50 0,47
0,50 0,75 0,73 0,70 0,68 0,65 0,63 0,59
0,75 0,85 0,83 0,80 0,77 0,76 0,72 0,67
1,00 0,95 0,91 0,88 0,85 0,83 0,80 0,74
1,50 1,08 1,04 1,01 0,97 0,95 0,91 0,84
2,00 1,19 1,15 1,11 1,08 1,04 1,01 0,94
3,00 1,36 1,31 1,27 1,23 1,19 1,15 1,07
The v
c
values are for f
cu
below 40N/ mm
2
multiplied by (f
cu
/40)
1/ 3

or 5 N/ mm
2
- 499 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
v
c
- is ultimate shear stress
For V<V
c
no shear reinforcement is needed.
For V>V
c
and V
c
<V
u
it is necessary to design shear reinforcement. The permissable shear
force is given by:
where: u - critical cross-section span
o
- angle of crooks
A
us
- overall area of crooks in footing
For V
c
>V
u
the shear reinforcement cannot be designed. It is therefore necessary to increase
the cross-section depth.
Verification of cross- sections made from plain concrete
The cross-section is rectangular, loaded by the bending moment M, normal force N (applied
in the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force V.
Strength of concrete cross-section subject to the combination of bending moment and normal
force with eccentricity e is derived from the following expressions:
where:
The shear strength is provided by:
where:
v
c
- is the design value of shear stress in concrete for degree of longitudinal
reinforcement =0 (see :Verification of spread footing for punching
shear).
Verification of circular RC cross- section
The program verifies a reinforced concrete pile using the method of limit deformation. The
maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is 0,002 - 0.0035.
The degree of reinforcement is checked using the formula:
where:
- 500 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- for f
y
= 460 N/ mm
2
- for f
y
= 250 N/ mm
2
where: d - pile diameter
A
s
- reinforcement area
I S 456
This help contains the following computationals methods:
- Materials, coefficients, notation
- RC rectangular cross-section under M
- RC rectangular cross-section under the bending
moment and normal compression force
- Verification of spread footing for punching shear
- Verification of cross-sections made from plain concrete
- Verification of circular RC cross-section
Materials, coefficients, notation
The following notation for material parameters is used:
f
ck
- characteristic cube compressive strength of concrete
f
cd
- design strength of concrete in compression
f
ctk
- characteristic strength of concrete in tension
f
ctd
- design strength of concrete in tension
f
yk
- characteristic strength of steel
f
yd
- design strength of steel in tension
The characteristic compressive strength of concrete is the basic input parameter given by the
class of concrete it serves to derive the remaining coefficients of reliability.
- 501 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The most common notation for geometrical parameters:
b - cross-section width
h - cross-section depth
d - effective depth of cross-section
z - lever arm (arm of internal forces)
All computations are carried out according to the theory of limit states.
RC rectangular cross- section under M
The cross-section is rectangular, reinforced on one side and loaded by the bending moment
M.
The permissible moment for a given area of reinforcements A
s
reads:
The program further checks whether the location of neutral axis x is less than the limit
location of neutral axis x
max
given by:
- for steel Fe 250
- for steel Fe 400
- for steel Fe 500
The computed degree of reinforcement is checked using the following expressions:
RC rectangular cross- section under the bending moment
and normal compression force
The cross-section is rectangular, unilaterally reinforced and loaded by the bending moment M
and normal compression force. The location of the neutral axis follows from:
- 502 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where:
For x < x
lim
permissible normal force is given by:
For x > x
lim
the corrected location of neutral axis is found from:
where:
Permissible normal force is given by:
Permissible bending moment is provided by:
Compression reinforcement is not taken into account.
Verification of spread footing for punching shear
The critical section loaded in shear U
cr
is distant from the column edge by one half of the
footing thickness. It is loaded by the prescribed moments M
x
, M
y
and by the shear force V
r
provided by:
where: A - area of footing
Q - assigned vertical force developed in column
A
t
- hatched area in fig.
- 503 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dimensioning of shear reinforcement area A
t
The program computes the maximum shear force Vdeveloped in the critical section, the
shear force transmitted by concrete with no shear reinforcement V
c
, and the maximal
allowable force V
max
:
where:
where: c
x
,c
y
- are dimensions of footing column
t
c,max
- is the maximum allowable shear stress in concrete listed in table 20
of the IS 456 standard
For V<V
c
no shear reinforcement is needed.
For V>V
c
and V
c
<V
max
it is necessary to design shear reinforcement. The permissable shear
force is given by:
where: u - critical cross-section span
o
- is angle of crooks
A
us
- overall area of crooks in footing
For V
c
>V
max
the shear reinforcement cannot be designed. It is therefore necessary to
increase the cross-section depth.
Verification of cross- sections made from plain concrete
The cross-section is rectangular, loaded by the bending moment M, normal force N (applied
in the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force V:
- 504 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The shear strength is provided by:
where:
t
c
- is the design value of stress in concrete obtained from table 19 of the
IS456 standard for degree of longitudinal reinforcement =0.
Strength of concrete cross-section subject to the combination of bending moment and normal
force with eccentricity e is derived from the following expressions:
where:
Verification of circular RC cross- section
The program verifies a reinforced concrete pile using the method of limit deformation. The
maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is 0,002 - 0.0035.
The degree of reinforcement is checked using the formula:
where:
where: d - pile diameter
A
s
- reinforcement area
I S Road Bridges
ACI 31802
This help contains the following computationals methods:
- 505 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
- Materials, coefficients, notation
- Verification of cross-section made from plain concrete
- RC rectangular cross-section under M
- RC rectangular cross-section under the bending
moment and normal compression force
- Verification of spread footing for punching shear
- Verification of circular RC cross-section
Materials, coefficients, notation
The following notation for material parameters is used:
f
c
- design strength of concrete in compression
E
c
- modulus of elasticity
The modulus of elasticity is provided by:
The most common notation for geometrical parameters:
b - cross-section width
h - cross-section depth
d - effective depth of cross-section
Verification of cross- sections made from plain concrete
The cross-section is rectangular, loaded by the bending moment M, normal force N (applied
in the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force V
n
.
The shear strength is provided by:
Strength of concrete cross-section subject to the combination of bending moment and normal
force is derived from the following expressions:
for compression side:
where:
A
1
- loaded area
for tension side:
- 506 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where:
RC rectangular cross- section under M
The cross-section is rectangular, reinforced on one side and loaded by the bending moment M
d
.
The ultimate moment is provided by:
The computed degree of reinforcement is checked using the following expressions:
RC rectangular cross- section under the bending moment
and normal compression force
The cross-section is rectangular, unilaterally reinforced and loaded by the bending moment M
and normal compression force. The location of the neutral axis follows from:
- 507 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where:
For x < x
lim
permissible normal force is given by:
For x > x
lim
the corrected location of neutral axis is found from:
where:
Permissible normal force is given by:
Permissible bending moment is provided by:
Compression reinforcement is not taken into account.
Verification of spread footing for punching shear
The program allows for the verification of spread footing for punching shear or for the design
of shear reinforcement. The critical section loaded in shear U
cr
is distant from the column
edge by one half of the footing thickness. It is loaded by the prescribed moments M
x
, M
y
and
by the shear force V
u
provided by:
where: A - area of footing
- 508 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
V - assigned vertical force developed in column
A
t
- hatched area in fig.
Dimensioning of shear reinforcement area A
t
The program computes the maximal shear force V
u
developed in the critical section, the shear
force transmitted by concrete with no shear reinforcement V
c
, and the maximal allowable
force V
max
:
For V
u
< |V
c
no shear reinforcement is needed.
For V
u
> |V
c

and V
c
< V
max
the shear reinforcement must be introduced. The ultimate shear
force is given by:
where: U
cr
- critical cross-section span
o
- is angle of crooks
A
s
- overall area of crooks in footing
For V
c
> V
max
the shear reinforcement cannot be designed. It is therefore necessary to
increase the cross-section height.
Verification of circular RC cross- section
The program verifies a reinforced concrete pile using the method of limit deformation. The
maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is 0,002 - 0.0035. The degree of
reinforcement is checked using the formula:
- 509 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
where: d - pile diameter
A
s
- reinforcement area
AS 3600- 2001
This help contains the following computationals methods:
- Materials, coefficients, notation
- RC rectangular cross-section under M
- RC rectangular cross-section under the bending
moment and normal compression force
- Verification of spread footing for punching shear
- Verification of cross-sections made from plain concrete
- Verification of circular RC cross-section
Materials, coefficients, notation
The following notation for material parameters is used:
f'
c
- characteristic copressive cylinder strength of concrete at 28 days
E
c
- mean value of the modulus of elasticity of concrete at 28 days

- density of concrete , in kilograms per cubic metre (kg/m3)

f'
cf
- characteristic flexural tensile strength of concrete
f'
ct
- characteristic principal tensile strength of concrete
f
sy
- yield strength of reinforcing steel
The characteristic compressive strength of concrete is the basic input parameter given by the
class of concrete.
The most common notation for geometrical parameters:
b - cross-section width
D - cross-section depth
d - effective depth of cross-section
z - lever arm (arm of internal forces)
- 510 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
All computations are carried out according to the theory of limit states.
Verification of cross- sections made from plain concrete
The cross-section is rectangular, loaded by the bending moment M, normal force N (applied
in the cross-section centroid) and by the shear force V.
The shear strength is provided by:
Strength of concrete cross-section subject to the combination of bending moment and normal
force is derived from the following expressions:
where:
A
g
- loaded area
RC rectangular cross- section under M, V
The cross-section is rectangular, reinforced on one side and loaded by the bending moment
M.
The permissible moment for a given area of reinforcements A
s
reads:
The program further checks whether the of neutral axis parameter K
u
is less than the limit
value:
where:
x - depth of neutral axis
- 511 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
The computed degree of reinforcement is checked using the following expressions:
where:
The program further checks ultimate shear strength:
where:
RC rectangular cross- section under the bending moment
and normal compression force
The cross-section is rectangular, unilaterally reinforced and loaded by the bending moment M
and normal compression force. The location of the neutral axis follows from:
where:
For x < x
lim
permissible normal force is given by:
For x > x
lim
the corrected location of neutral axis is found from:
where:
- 512 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Permissible normal force is given by:
Permissible bending moment is provided by:
Compression reinforcement is not taken into account.
Verification of circular RC cross- section
The program verifies a reinforced concrete pile using the method of limit deformation. The
maximum allowable strain of concrete in compression is 0,002 - 0.0035. The degree of
reinforcement is checked using the formula:
where: D - pile diameter
A
s
- reinforcement area
Verification of spread footing for punching shear
The program allows for the verification of spread footing for punching shear. The critical
section loaded in shear U
cr
is distant from the column edge by one half of the footing
thickness. It is loaded by the prescribed moments M
x
, M
y
and by the shear force V
*
provided
by:
where: A - area of footing
V - assigned vertical force developed in column
A
t
- hatched area in fig.
- 513 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Dimensioning of shear reinforcement area A
t
The program checks, whether the cross-section bursting strength is sufficient according to the
relation:
where:
where:
|
h
- the ratio of the longest overall dimension of the effective loaded area, Y
, to the overall dimension, X, measured perpendicular to Y
a - the dimension of the critical shear perimeter measured parallel to the
direction of M
*
v
M
*
v
- the bending moment transferred from the slab to a support in the
direction being considered
The analysis is carried out independently in directions x and y, as the decisive one the lower
value of V
u
is accepted.
Verification according to CSN 73 6206
When selecting "CSN 73 6206", frame "Proj ect", the verification analysis of decisive joints
is performed according to the standard CSN 73 6206 "Design of concrete and steel reinforced
concrete bridge structures", including changes a-10/1989 a Z2/1994. The program allows for
verification of cross-sections from plain concrete or single-ended steel reinforced concrete. All
calculations related to concrete are carried out using the theory of allowable stresses.
The main difference when compared to other standards appears in the dimensioning of
concrete joints where the earth pressure is computed always without reduction of input
parameters independently of the input in the frame "Settings".
When performing the verification analysis of cross-sections made either from plain or steel
reinforced concrete it is possible input the coefficient of allowable stress according to art.
- 514 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
47 CSN 73 6206 to increase the material allowable stress.
The following joints can be verified by the program:
Abutment stem foundation, construction j oint - the cross-section can be made either
from plain or steel reinforced concrete. The joint is verified for the load due to normal force
and bending moment. The allowable stresses of concrete, steel and concrete in concentric
pressure are checked. In case of reinforced concrete the program also checks the degree of
reinforcement, cross-sections from plain concrete are then checked for overturning (h/2e
<1,35) and translation (N.f<1,5; friction concrete-concrete is assumed as f=0.5),
Closure wall - bearing block - the cross-section is verified for the load due to normal force
and bending moment. The steel reinforced concrete cross-section is always assumed. The
allowable stresses of concrete and steel and the degree of reinforcement are checked.
Wing wall abutment the joint can be made either from concrete or steel reinforced
concrete. The allowable stresses of concrete, steel and concrete in concentric pressure are
checked. In case of reinforced concrete the program also checks the degree of reinforcement.
Front j ump of abutment foundation the front jump of abutment is verified according to
its projection. In case of jump projection v < 0.5 h
z
(h
z
is the height of foundation jump) the
program checks the magnitude of stress in principal tension due to forces developed in the
above-foundation joint. The stress is determined as:
where: d - width of above-foundation joint
M,N - moment and normal force in above-foundation joint
In case of jump projection v > 0.5 h
z
the jump is analyzed as cantilever bended by the
reaction (stress) of foundation soil. The joint can be made either from concrete or steel
reinforced concrete. The allowable stresses of concrete, steel and concrete in concentric
pressure are checked. In case of reinforced concrete the program also checks the degree of
reinforcement.
- 515 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Index
- 1 -
1.LS - bearing of a footing 194
- 2 -
2.LS - settlement and rotation of a footing 195
- 3 -
3D View 264
- A -
About company 295
Accounting for wall jump 358
ACI 31802 504
Active dimensions and objects 25
Active earth pressure 303, 307, 306, 304, 305, 303, 308
Adding and editing section 73
Adding interface 35
Adding picture 287
Adhesion of soil 345
Alternate angel of internal friction of soil 319
Analyses in program Ground Loss 442
Analysis 69, 84, 98, 57, 215, 251
Analysis 69, 84, 98, 57, 215, 251
Analysis according to EC 7-1 (EN 1997-1:2003) 395
Analysis according to NEN (Buismann, Ladd) 420
Analysis according to the Janbu theory 422
Analysis according to the theory of limit states / factor of safety 385
Analysis for coarse-grained soils after Janbu 422
Analysis for cohesionless soils after Janbu 422
Analysis for cohesive soils after Janbu 424
Analysis for layered subsoil 445
Analysis for overconsolidated cohesive soils after Janbu 424
Analysis for overconsolidated sands and silts after Janbu 423
Analysis for sands and silts after Janbu 423
Analysis of anchored wall fixed in heel 368
Analysis of anchored wall simply supported at heel 369
Analysis of bearing capacity of foundation 391
Analysis of failure of buildings 449
Analysis of internal stability 349
Analysis of nails bearing capacity 347
Analysis of sheet pile wall 367
Analysis of subsidence trough 442
Analysis of subsidence trough at a depth 447
Analysis of walls 353
Analysis using the compression constant 419
Analysis using the compression index 419
Analysis using the oedometric modulus 418
Analysis using the Soft soil model 421
Analysis plane slip surface 262
Analysis polygonal slip surface 263
Analysis rock wedge 268
Anchor forces, surcharge 463
Anchorage of rock slope 455
Anchors 61, 80, 93, 384
Anchors plane and polygonal slip surface 260
Anchors rock wedge 267
Arrango theory 340
AS 3600-2001 509
Assign 60, 75, 146, 173, 92, 200, 106, 134, 185, 272, 161, 53, 120, 223, 212, 237, 249
Assign 60, 75, 146, 173, 92, 200, 106, 134, 185, 272, 161, 53, 120, 223, 212, 237, 249
Assigning soils 38
- 516 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Automatic calculation of height 274
- B -
Barton - Bandis 476
Barton Bandis parameters 476
Base anchorage 125, 111, 354
Basic data 269
Bearing capacity 152, 179, 114, 140, 168, 243, 128, 231
Bearing capacity of foundation on bedrock 394
Bearing capacity of foundation soil 360
Bearing capacity on drained subsoil 391
Bearing capacity on undrained subsoil 393
Blocks 156
Bore holes 278
Braced sheeting 379
BS 8110 495
Buildings 246
Bulk weight of rocks 479
- C -
Calculating abutment forces 366
Calculation of Hoek-Brown parameters 474
Calculation of other variables 448
Changing inclination of dividing planes 388
Characteristics of settlement analyses 431
Circular slip surface Petterson, Bishop 389
Classical theory 444
Coefficient m 439
Coefficient of calculation of inflection point 447
Coefficient of increase of limit skin friction 406
Coefficient of passive earth pressure Kp 312
Common input 29
Compression constant 434
Compression constant 10 435
Compression index 431
Concentrated surcharge 331, 336
Connecting programs 41
Constant distribution of modulus of subsoil reaction 413
Constrains on the optimization procedure 100
Control menu 13
Control menu Print and export 291
Copy to clipboard 26
Corrector of inputted interface 36
CSN 73 1201 R 481
- D -
Damages 252
Dependence of shear on deformation 412
Depth of deformation zone 406
Design coefficients 39
Determination of cross-sectional internal forces 402
Determination of the depth of influence zone 429
Dialogue windows 24
Dimensioning 196, 180, 169, 231, 244, 114, 141, 153, 128
Dimensioning of concrete cover 352
Dimensioning of concrete structures 481
Dimensioning of masonry wall 359
Distribution of earth pressures in case of broken terrain 320
Distributions of forces acting on pile 412
- E -
Earth - pressure wedge 327
Earth cut 210, 90
Earth grading 279
- 517 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Earth pressure 302
Earth pressure at rest 316
Earth pressure at rest for inclined ground surface at the back of structure 317
Earthquake 67, 83, 166, 241, 56, 111, 139, 151, 178, 97, 125, 229, 261
Earthquake 67, 83, 166, 241, 56, 111, 139, 151, 178, 97, 125, 229, 261
Earthquake effect 384
EC2 (EN 1992 1-1) 485
Edges 275
Editing interface 36
Effective area 401
Effective/total stress in soil 298
Embankment 209, 89
Envelopes 88
Estimated bond strength 349
Excavation 76
Export DXF 49
External stability 245, 87
- F -
Factor of safety 350
Failure of a section of building 451
Foliation 389
Footing 158
Force of transmitted by nails 350
Forces 67, 80
Foundation steps 220
Frames 21
Front face resistance 164, 109, 137, 149, 176, 123, 227
- G -
Generate 281
Geo-reinforcements, mesh overhangs 354
Geometry 61, 73, 157, 234, 51, 103, 131, 188, 143, 171, 201, 117, 249, 264
Geometry 61, 73, 157, 234, 51, 103, 131, 188, 143, 171, 201, 117, 249, 264
Geometry 61, 73, 157, 234, 51, 103, 131, 188, 143, 171, 201, 117, 249, 264
Geometry cut 217
Geometry of nails 235
Geometry of rock block 462
Geometry of rock wedge 466
Geometry plane view 219
Georeinforcements 384
Geostatic stress, uplift pressure 297
Global coordinate system 270
Gradient damage 450
GWT above toe of slope 456
GWT on tension crack 457
GWT on tension crack, max 458
- H -
Height multiplier 101
Hoek - Brown 471
Homogenization of layered subsoil 400
Horizontal bearing capacity 207, 412
Horizontal bearing capacity of foundation 398
Horizontal tool bars 14
Hydrodynamic pressure 323
Hydrostatic pressure, ground water 321, 322
- I -
Import - export DXF 46
Import of loading 187
Import of points 274
Incompressible subsoil 211, 409
Increment of earth pressure due to surcharge 299
- 518 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Increment of earth pressure under footing 300
Increments of vertical loading 412
Index of secondary compression 440
Influence of earthquake 337
Influence of foundation depth and incompressible subsoil 417
Influence of friction between soil and back of structure 343
Influence of ground water 467
Influence of loading history 438
Influence of sand-gravel cushion 418
Influence of seismic effects 480
Influence of technology 410
Influence of tensile cracks 326, 390
Influence of water 321, 341, 382, 463
Influence of water 321, 341, 382, 463
Influence of water acting on slip surface 456
Input regimes and analysis 50
Inputted forces 165, 110, 138, 150, 177, 124, 228
Inputting and editing soils 30
Inputting data using template 47
Interface 89, 208
Interfaces in 2D environment 34
Internal stability 86, 242
Internal stability of gabion 362
Internal stability of gabion wall factor of safety 365
Internal stability of gabion wall limit states 364
IS 456 500
IS Road Bridges 504
- J -
Janbu characteristics 437
- L -
Launching 285
Limit loading curve 405
Line constructions 284
Line surcharge 332
Linear modulus of subsoil reaction 413
Load 186, 201
Loading - LC 223
- M -
Manual classification of soil 33
Material 103, 131, 190, 170, 202, 117, 220, 236
Materials, coefficients, notation 481, 486, 491, 496, 500, 505, 509, 372
Measurement 250
Method of restriction of the magnitude of primary stress 430
Minimal dimensioning pressure 326
Modeling terrain on edges 282
Modified compression index 439
Modifying template during data input 48
Modulus of subsoil reaction 71, 198, 373
Modulus of subsoil reaction - Chadeisson 376
Modulus of subsoil reaction - CSN 73 1004 414
Modulus of subsoil reaction - CUR 166 374
Modulus of subsoil reaction - iterations 376
Modulus of subsoil reaction - Matlock and Rees 414
Modulus of subsoil reaction - Mnard 375
Modulus of subsoil reaction - Schmitt 375
Modulus of subsoil reaction - Vesic 415
Mohr - Coulomb 471
MononobeOkabe theory 340
- N -
Nailed slopes 347
- 519 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Negative skin friction 204, 409
Nonlinear modulus of subsoil reaction 380
- O -
Oedometric modulus 433
Optimization of circular slip surface 390
Optimization of polygonal slip surface 388
Options 26
Options - input 29
Options copy to clipboard 27
Options print picture 28
Outputs 287
Overall settlement and rotation of foundation 417
Overconsolidation index of secondary compression 441
Own water force acting on slip surface only 460
Own water force behavior 461
- P -
Page numbering 295
Page properties 294
Parameters Hoek Brown 472
Parameters Mohr Coulomb 471
Parameters of rocks 346
Parameters to compute foundation bearing cap. 396
Parameters polygonal slip surface 258
Parameters rock wedge 266
Passive earth pressure 308
Passive earth pressure - Absi theory 314
Passive earth pressure - Caquot Krisel theory 310
Passive earth pressure - Coulomb theory 310
Passive earth pressure - Mller Breslau theory 313
Passive earth pressure - Rankin and Mazindrani 309
Passive earth pressure - Sokolovski theory 314
Passive earth pressure total stress 316
Picture list 288
Pile analysis 403
Plane slip surface 452
PN-B-03264 491
Point constructions 283
Points 272
Polygonal slip surface 461
Polygonal slip surface - Sarma 386
Pressure specification 63
Primary settlement 426
Print and export document 289
Print and export picture 290
Profile 159, 51, 59, 71, 104, 132, 183, 144, 172, 198, 118, 221, 236, 247
Profile 159, 51, 59, 71, 104, 132, 183, 144, 172, 198, 118, 221, 236, 247
Program Abutment 216
Program Block Wall 143
Program Cantilever Wall 102
Program Earth Pressure 50
Program Gabion 170
Program Gravity Wall 130
Program Ground Loss 246
Program Masonry wall 116
Program Nailed slopes 233
Program Pile 197
Program RediRock Wall 155
Program Rock slope 254
Program Settlement 208
Program Sheeting Check 70
Program Sheeting Design 58
Program Slope Stability 88
- 520 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Program Spread Footing 182
Program Terrain 269
Project 88, 50, 58, 143, 170, 197, 102, 130, 182, 155, 70, 116, 208, 216, 233, 246, 254, 269
Project 88, 50, 58, 143, 170, 197, 102, 130, 182, 155, 70, 116, 208, 216, 233, 246, 254, 269
Project 88, 50, 58, 143, 170, 197, 102, 130, 182, 155, 70, 116, 208, 216, 233, 246, 254, 269
Project 88, 50, 58, 143, 170, 197, 102, 130, 182, 155, 70, 116, 208, 216, 233, 246, 254, 269
Project - Analyses 182
Project Earth pressures 29
Props 62, 81
- R -
RC rectangular cross-section - bending moment 483, 487, 492, 497, 501, 506
RC rectangular cross-section - bending moment.. 511
RC rectangular cross-section under M 482, 487, 492, 496, 501, 506, 510
Reading data into template 47
Recommended values of parameters for volume loss analysis 443
Recompression index 436
Reduction coefficient of passive earth pressure 313
Reinforcements 94
Reinforcements 94
Relative deflection 450
Resolution of acting forces 469
Rigid body 92
Rock 256
Rock - shear resistance criteria 471
Rock slope 451
Rock wedge 466
Running more analyses / verifications 40
- S -
Sand-gravel cushion 189
Scale color definition 45
Secondary settlement 428
Selecting and storing views 42
Setbacks 156
Setting 166, 57, 68, 84, 112, 139, 193, 151, 178, 98, 205, 126, 229, 215, 241, 262
Setting 166, 57, 68, 84, 112, 139, 193, 151, 178, 98, 205, 126, 229, 215, 241, 262
Setting color range 44
Setting header and footer 293
Setting results visualization 43
Setting visualization style 19
Settings 251
Settlement analysis 415
Settlement analysis using DMT 425
Shape of subsidence trough 446
Shear resistance on skin 410
Shear strength of skin 406
Sheeting check 370
Sheeting design 367
Sign convention 302
Slip surface - polygonal 257
Slip surface plane 256
Slip surface rock wedge 265
Slope stability analysis 381
Soil and rock labels 33
Soil body 381
Soil classification 32
Soils 160, 248, 52, 59, 72, 105, 133, 184, 145, 173, 91, 199, 119, 222, 212, 237, 271
Soils 160, 248, 52, 59, 72, 105, 133, 184, 145, 173, 91, 199, 119, 222, 212, 237, 271
Soils 160, 248, 52, 59, 72, 105, 133, 184, 145, 173, 91, 199, 119, 222, 212, 237, 271
Solution according to CSN 73 1001 395
Solution procedure 464
Special distribution of water pressure 324
Stability 169, 115, 142, 154, 181, 129, 233
- 521 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Standard analysis 392, 394, 395
Standard values of coefficients 486
Stepped slip surface 453
Stereographic projection 467
Stiffness of subsoil below the pile heel 411
Stress in a soil body 297
Stress in the footing bottom 416
Strip surcharge 330, 335
Style manager 20
Subsidence trough with several excavations 447
Supports 62, 82
Surcharge 163, 329, 55, 66, 79, 108, 136, 191, 148, 175, 95, 122, 226, 213, 240, 383
Surcharge in non-homogeneous soil 334
Surcharge of rock slope 455
Surcharge plane and polygonal slip surface 260
Surcharge rock wedge 266
Surface surcharge 329, 334, 337
- T -
Table of recommended values DELTA/F 345
Table of ultimate friction factors 344
Tables 22
Tensile cracks 449
Tensile strength of rock 454
Terrain 161, 54, 64, 77, 106, 134, 146, 174, 120, 224, 238, 255
Terrain 161, 54, 64, 77, 106, 134, 146, 174, 120, 224, 238, 255
Theory 297
Theory of limit states 351
Theory of settlement 425
Theory of structural strength 429
Tool bar 3D visualization 17
Tool bar Files 14
Tool bar Plot setting 16
Tool bar Print and export 292
Tool bar Scale and shift 15
Tool bar Selections 18
Tool bar Stage of construction 16
Trapezoidal surcharge 331, 336
Types of nails 234
- U -
Undulating slip surface 454
Unit metric / imperial 26
Uplift pressure in footing bottom 325
User catalogue 74
User defined environment 12
Using function Find 12
- V -
Verification 167, 113, 140, 152, 179, 127, 230, 242, 469
Verification 167, 113, 140, 152, 179, 127, 230, 242, 469
Verification - factor of safety 357
Verification according to CSN 73 6206 513
Verification according to the factor of safety 470
Verification according to the theory of limit states 470
Verification of bearing capacity of nails 352
Verification of circular RC cross-section 485, 490, 495, 499, 504, 508, 512
Verification of cross-sections - plain concrete 482, 489, 494, 499, 503, 505, 510
Verification of internal stability of structure 378
Verification of spread footing for punching shear 484, 488, 493, 497, 502, 507, 512
Verification limit states 356
Vertical bearing capacity 205
Vertical bearing capacity - FEM 404
Vertical bearing capacity CSN 205
- 522 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Vertical bearing capacity FEM 206
Vertical bearing capacity according to CSN 403
Vertical tool bars 18
Void ratio 436
Volume loss 442
- W -
Wall dimensioning 361
Water 277, 162, 54, 65, 78, 107, 135, 147, 175, 96, 121, 225, 214, 239
Water 277, 162, 54, 65, 78, 107, 135, 147, 175, 96, 121, 225, 214, 239
Water acting on tension crack only 459
Water plane slip surface 259
Water rock wedge 268
Water, incompressible subsoil 192, 203
Window for application 12
Wings 218
Without ground water, water is not considered 321
World coordinates 38
- 523 -
Geo 5 - User's Guide Fine Ltd. 2008
Fine Ltd. 2008
www.fine.cz